155428 items (155428 unread) in 108 feeds
NewsPopular
(89791 unread)
DoWireFeeds
(55890 unread)
CitizenMedia
(6495 unread)
Radio
(3252 unread)
CitizenMedia (200 unread)
This is a post by Lully Posada of Hiperbarrio, simultenously published in Global Voices Online.
Violence, murder, theft and crime are a constant in Medellín, Colombia and its metropolitan area; issues all people must learn to live with and a social phenomenon that has grown in the last year. Members of the Rising Voices grantee Hiperbarrio expressed their feelings and different viewpoints on this matter in their personal and group blogs.
Yuliana Paniagua, in the Hiperbarrio site [es], highlights the area of Castilla, where members of the blog Hope Revolution (Revolución Esperanza) went to take pictures. She also shows the importance of Hiperbarrio as a positive alternative for the community.
Jorge Vasquez wrote at Villactivos collective blog [es] about the influence of a lack of values as a result of an uncontrollable situation, despite the government's investment in military spending:
What has been set up here is a world of secrecy, mistrust, prevention, in which recognizing a mistake is slipping, a world with its own laws, icons and exemplars for young people from the underworld, from the images by the businessmen in the serious media, who have made a lucrative business our of the advocacy of violence. A heartless world, where the child is taught by example, that to be kind to another is to be dumb, that to compete for a centimeter of a street, for a desk at school, for the favor of a partner is what counts. And here are some of these neighborhoods made in the image, likeness and scale of the selfishness of the powerful, some more than others, like vortex of fire, while the authorities in this country, which is among the 10 largest military spenders in the world, has not been able to control the symphony of rifles that lulls the dream of its inhabitants.Se ha configurado aquí un mundo del sigilo, de la desconfianza, de la prevención, en el cual reconocer un error es resbalar, un mundo con sus propios leyes, iconos y figuras ejemplares para los jóvenes provenientes de los bajos mundos, de las imágenes de los comerciantes de los medios de comunicación serios, que han hecho de la apología del violento un negocio lucrativo. Un mundo despiadado, donde al niño se le enseña con el ejemplo, que ser bondadoso con el otro es ser tonto, que disputar el centímetro de calle, el pupitre en el colegio, el favor de la pareja es lo que vale. Y aquí están algunos de estos barrios hechos a imagen, semejanza y escala del egoísmo de los poderosos, unos más, otros menos, como vórtices de fuego, mientras la autoridad, de este país, que está entre los 10 de mayor gasto militar en el mundo, no ha podido controlar la sinfonía de fusiles que arrulla el sueño de sus habitantes.
Photo of Comuna 13 neighborhood in Medellín by author Lully Posada
Luis Elías, a member of Convergentes, cries out in his personal blog [es] for the war in the neighborhoods to stop. He wrote a second post [es] where he also refers to unemployment and laziness as causes for this violent situation:
I'm tired of this war, they don’t even respect under-age children, they use [them] as a cart to carry weapons, but that also goes for parents who have not noticed what they are doing to their children or also siblings who are involved in armed groups and ask [under-age children] to take away the body of a crime, and worse of all they ruin neighborhoods that are good to live in, when will this end? Hopefully soon! They kill those who do not have anything to do with the conflict.Estoy harto de esta guerra , no respetan ni los niños menores de edad, ya lo utilizar como carrito para cargar armas, pero eso también va en los padres que no se han dado cuenta de lo que están haciendo sus hijos o también de los hermanos que están metidos en los grupos armados le piden en favor para que le lleve el cuerpo del delito , y para mal de todos acabar con los barrios que son buenos para vivir, ¿esto cuando se va a terminar? ¡Ojalá rápido! Matan a los que no tiene nada que ver con el conflicto.[
(…] cuando llega el desempleo o la falta de estudio para los jóvenes buscan otras opciones para salir de la misma rutina en la que estaban y probar cosas nuevas, cosas fáciles para sobrevivir en mundo que está lleno de corrupción.
[…] when it comes to unemployment or lack of education for young people they look for other options to get out of the routine in which they were and try new things, easy things to survive in a world that is full of corruption.
Jaider Ochoa makes a positive comment about Hiperbarrio in the collective blog Revolución Esperanza [es]:
The idea of restoring the social and cultural memory of the neighborhoods, of highlighting these good things that are available, but are overshadowed by the media hype about violence, allow us to see that these communities are not full of criminals, but that you can also say there are endless features, people, traditions and activities that make the difference and allow us to see it as a place where you can also live in decent conditions.La idea de recuperar la memoria social y cultural de los barrios, de destacar esas cosas buenas con las que se cuenta, pero que se ven opacadas por el despliegue mediático sobre la violencia, permiten ver que estas comunidades no sólo tienen delincuentes, sino que también hay quien pueda decir que en ellas hay un sinfín de rasgos, personajes, tradiciones y actividades que hacen la diferencia y que permiten conocerla como un lugar donde también se puede habitar en condiciones dignas.
Finally, Henry Osorio at the Funacrate collectibe blog, raises some questions after narrating an event [es] experienced by an acquaintance called Manuel.
The minutes passed, Manuel was watching from the terrace and saw a member of the Army, how he alienated with his gun a man who climbed another terrace in the vicinity, when the former had a chance he shot him almost busting his arm. After Manuel told me his story, I was left with a lot of questions that make me think about the violent situation in some parts of the city and the intervention of the Public Forces [the Military and Police] in the communities.Pasaban los minutos, Manuel seguía observando desde la terraza y vio a un miembro del Ejército, como alienaba con su fusil a un señor que se trepaba por otra terraza de la vecindad, cuando el primero tuvo la oportunidad le disparó casi botándole el brazo. Después que Manuel me narró su versión, quedé con una cantidad de interrogantes que me hacen reflexionar sobre la situación violenta en algunos sectores de la ciudad y la intervención de la Fuerza Pública en las comunidades.
¿Cuál es el tipo de intervención que debe hacer la Fuerza Pública cuando suceden estos hechos? […] ¿Cuál es el tipo de confianza que brinda la Fuerza Pública cuando interviene las comunidades afectando algunos habitantes de estos barrios? ¿Las personas que corren en busca de refugio ante estos hechos acaso son delincuentes?
What is the type of intervention the Public Force should have when these things happen? […] What type of confidence does the Public Force bring when it interpheres in communities, affecting some inhabitants of these neighbohoods? Are the people looking for refuge in these events deliquents?
Translated by Silvia Viñas.
From Mick Souder, E-Democracy.org co-founder, Board member and Rules Committee Chair:
Greetings,
Every few years E-Democracy.org reviews the rules we ask our forum participants to abide by. We are currently collecting input for a rules review we have scheduled to complete by the end of this year. We invite our forum participants and moderators to submit suggestions on rules adjustments that may enhance our forums’ effectiveness.
The rules can be found at [e-democracy.org]
At this time the request for input is open ended. Later in our process the Board of Directors will decide what changes (if any) our rules committee should focus on based on the input we receive and in light of E-Democracy.org‘s mission and strategic plan.
If you have any suggestions on rule changes or re-wording, please send your suggestions to committee members at rules@e-democracy.org') //-->rules@e-democracy.org [Email address: rules #AT# e-democracy.org - replace #AT# with @ ] .
The suggestion should include:
1) The specific rule that you are interested in E-Democracy.org reviewing.
2) What change or rewording you suggest E-Democracy.org make.
3) Why you suggest E-Democracy.org make the adjustment to the rule.
Please submit these suggestions by Tuesday 14 September 2010. You may also post copies of your submissions on the blog, but official input should go in via e-mail') //-->via e-mail [Email address: rules #AT# e-democracy.org - replace #AT# with @ ].
Thank you.
Mick Souder
E-Democracy.Org Rules Committee, Board of Directors
Editors Note: Our home grown rules have evolved since 1994. We uniquely use a warning and time-based suspension process for violating our rules rather than a moderate everything or delete violating posts process. These rules are not just “terms of service” that don’t matter. They give participants rights and limit our power as hosts based on our democratic ideals and mission. – Steven Clift
Please read the full rules, but here is the current summary:
Rules Summary1. Real Names – Sign posts including your real name and city.
2. Limits on Posting – Two per member per day in most forum charters.
3. Keep Topics within Forum Purpose – Local issues on a local forum for example.
4. Be Civil – No name-calling. Respect among citizens with differing views is our cornerstone.
5. No Attacks or Threats – This keeps the forums safe. If content is illegal it will be forwarded to the proper legal authorities.
6. Private Stays Private – Don’t forward private replies without permission.
7. Avoid False Rumors – Asking for clarification of what you’ve heard in the community can be appropriate if issues-based. You alone are responsible for what you post.
8. Right to Post and Reply – Sharing your knowledge and opinions with your fellow citizens is a democratic right.
9. Items Not Allowed in Forums – No chain letters, etc.
10. Public Content and Use – You are sharing your content forever, but retain your copyright.
11. Warnings – You may receive informal or official warnings from the Forum Manager.
12. Suspension – With your second official warning in one year, you are suspended for two weeks. It goes up from there.
13. Appeals Process – You can appeal a warning(s) once you receive a third warning and six month removal. Rare appeals are not received most years.

On August 10th and 11th, 2010, the Department of Play (DoP) hosted its first Summer Institute, a workshop for practitioners and researchers, all with one thing in common: a commitment to improving the lives of youth through technology. The purpose of the Summer Institute was to bring together people from across the globe that were pursuing similar work, but had not necessarily connected with one another yet. Attendees were asked to rethink the role of technology in youth participation, social inclusion and local civic engagement, and in the process form meaningful partnerships for future projects.
Participants included Media Lab professors, researchers and students, representatives from the MIT Center for Future Civic Media, members of the DoP, program officers from UNICEF, the co-directors of the Children’s Environments Research Group at CUNY, and a member of Plan International, West Africa, as well as the founder and director of the Srishti School of Art and Design in Bangalore, India.
The Summer Institute began with each participant creating a map and timeline of his or her professional and personal path, and explaining it to the group. This activity allowed everyone to learn about one another and become familiar with each other’s perspectives and experiences. For example, Nitin Sawney, a DoP member explained, “Seeing how media and arts education programs helped young people deal with trauma in the Palestinian refugee camps has really molded the direction of my work.”
This workshop then took the format of "World Café", a methodology for hosting conversations about questions that matter. The group broke into three smaller teams and had in-depth discussions and debates about three “provocative propositions,” which included:
These questions ultimately forced participants to reflect about their role in the field of youth empowerment and the overall effects of their own work. Professor Roger Hart from CUNY went on to explain that in order for each individual to begin to understand this, the group needed to understand why youth choose to use technology versus why NGOs and governments choose to use the same tools.
Each participant had the opportunity to present his or her own projects and receive feedback from the team. These presentations fueled a larger discussion: were social media, blogging, and digital mapping really useful tools for youth in marginalized communities? The group extensively debated why we use these tools and the various tangible outcomes of using them. For example, it was agreed that digital mapping helped youth gain a sense of ownership over their communities.
By the end of the workshop, most participants agreed that a next step for the group should be to evaluate the impact of technology in the lives of youth through methodological research and studies. “We need to see if it is really making a difference and how,” said Geetha Narayanan of the Srishti School. To do this and to continue exploring the questions that were raised at the Summer Institute, the participants formed the DoP Working Group to keep in touch with one another, share ideas, and collaborate on projects.
City Comptroller John Liu has endorsed Nassau County District Attorney Kathleen Rice in her bid to become attorney general.
Kathleen Rice is progressive, shes tough and she will be an excellent attorney general, said Liu. From her work taking on corrupt public officials and sexual predators, to her tireless commitment to protecting consumers, immigrants and taxpayers from fraud, Kathleen has proven that she is the candidate most capable of reforming Albany and most capable of managing an office that is so vital to New York families. In addition to her unrivaled law enforcement and legal experience, there is no doubt that Kathleen gives our party the best chance to keep this office in progressive hands after November. Shes got my support and I look forward to campaigning hard with her over the next week.
This is a major endorsement for Rice who is trying to make inroads into New York City. Sen. Eric Schneiderman’s campaign has racked up a list of impressive city based endorsements in the last month. And the tide has not stopped.
Schneiderman’s most recent endorsement comes from Rep. Anthony Weiner.
“I am endorsing Eric Schneiderman for Attorney General because he has been a lifelong champion for middle-class families and those struggling to make it into the middle-class,” said Weiner. “No one has fought harder for fair wages, for equality and flexibility in the workplace, for foreclosure protections than Eric. We need a strong, lifelong progressive Democrat to fight for the working people of this state as Attorney General. We need a real leader with guts, who fights for whats right, not just whats politically popular. The choice is clear. The only choice for progressives is Eric Schneiderman.”
There primary is on Sept. 14.
Since we last updated readers on DocumentCloud's progress, we've made it much easier to upload a lot of documents at once, and introduced a related documents search that uses data about names and places provided by OpenCalais to find documents that are probably related to the one you're looking at. We've also added a bit more contextto the data we help reporters comb through. Most of this work is happening inside the gates of the DocumentCloud workspace, but it is resulting in some lively reporting. For example...
Using Documents to Tell the StoryThis summer, as the federal 5th Circuit Court of Appeals prepared to hear arguments in a challenge to the University of Texas's affirmative action policy, Texas Tribune complemented its coverage of the case with nearly 200 pages of annotated court documents, including the original district court ruling, the university's appellate brief, as well as that of the plaintiffs in the case.
The Las Vegas Sun incorporated quite a trove of documents into its series on hospital care in Las Vegas. Readers were invited to browse everything from Department of Health and Human Services reports to individual records, right along with the Sun's reporters. When they say that hospital-acquired infections cost the country $30 billion per year or account for close to 100,000 deaths, they back each number up with original documents.
The Columbia Missourian annotated the city budget and took a local blogger to task for exaggerating Columbia, Missouri's cash reserves.
When Texas Governor Rick Perry challenged reporters to find anyone who can out-work him, Texas Tribune posted the governor's May 2010 schedule alongside that of Florida's Gov. Crist, New York's Gov. Paterson and California's Gov. Schwarzenegger and invited readers to help them skim over a hundred pages of briefings, receptions and photo ops for stories deserving of a closer look.
The Washington Post supplemented its reporting on the cozy relationship between the oil industry and the federal agency assigned to regulate them with an annotated report on the prospects for "Moving beyond Conflict" between regulator and regulated. Their document cache also included reports outlining just how cozy things had gotten by 2008. As Emily Keller pointed out in Free Government Info, a transparency project, documents like these give more transparency to journalism itself.
New Features in the Testing LabWe're also hard at work fine tuning the document viewer, transforming it into something that users could reasonably plug into a template with a narrower content column. Thus far folks have been stuck with a full page viewer. We haven't fully rolled it out yet, but we've worked with a couple of our beta testers to implement it already.
Iowa State has a new men's basketball coach, and the Des Moines Register included all 14 pages of his contract to their coverage of the finer points contained in it. Among the unusual clauses? Hoiberg can walk away if the university decides to increase academic standards for student athletes beyond the NCAA's minimum.
Meanwhile, at the Santa Fe Reporter, Alexa Schirtzinger opted not to publish tables of information right inside her story on elder abuse in New Mexico, but she did use her staff blog to share the data that she had such a hard time tracking down. An annotation highlights the numbers that showed her that New Mexico fields more abuse complaints per nursing home bed than any other state.
DocumentCloud watchers will notice that they posted the contract right on the same page as Randy Peterson's writeup instead of displaying the document in a full page. We'll be making tweaks like this a lot easier for all of our users. In the meantime, if you're skilled at the art of reverse engineering JavaScript, you can view the source of the Register's story (or the Reporter's) to see just how they toggled the sidebar or zoom on those documents.
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
What do you get when you cross a lawyer and a journalist? Most of the time, of course, you get a lawyer. You know: The kids who worked so hard on the college paper but jetted off to Boalt when the prospect of years of unpaid internships scared them off. Most journalists remember a few people like that. (I know a dozen or so.)
Sometimes, of course, you end up with a journalist: Take Adam Liptak, the New York Times lawyer who started writing book reviews and ended up covering the Supreme Court for the Grey Lady. The Fox News crowd has their own Liptak in Brooklyn Law School grad Geraldo Rivera. Michael Kinsley started working at the New Republic during his third year at George Washington Law School. But not every journalist who covers legal issues has the time (or the money) to get a law degree. That's where John Nockleby comes in.
Journalist Law SchoolFor the past five years, Nockleby has been trying to construct a third breed of reporter/attorney hybrid: the journalist with a crash course in the law. To bring this new beast into the world, this avuncular, bespectacled, aggressively friendly law professor is prepared to push the limits of what you can teach someone about the American legal system in three and a half days.

Every summer, Nockleby's Journalist Law School (JLS) brings several dozen reporters to Loyola Law School in Los Angeles for 84 hours of lectures, seminars, and discussion panels on the law. This June, my colleague at Mother Jones, Stephanie Mencimer, who attended JLS in 2009, suggested I apply. That Stephanie found the program useful was a shock: She literally wrote the book on tort reform -- it's called "Blocking the Courthouse Door" -- and I never imagined that she had much more to learn about the legal system. On the other hand, it would be very useful to me to have a bit more of a background in the law. Covering civil liberties issues for Mother Jones, I run into a lot of legal documents -- habeas petitions, Office of Legal Counsel memos, and so on. So I applied and got accepted. Next thing I knew, I was in L.A.
Learning and SchmoozingThe JLS program is centered around what are essentially miniature versions of standard first-year law classes: Constitutional law, criminal law, civil procedure, criminal procedure, torts, and so on. I had heard a lot of the basic concepts because my girlfriend (not a former journalist) is a law student. You might think a basic familiarity with the concepts would make the classes boring. But Nockleby, knowing that journalists are an "especially critical" audience, did an excellent job of assembling an engaging group of professors to teach the core classes. Even the most jaded of my fellow students seemed engaged.
The core JLS classes are supplemented by a series of small-group sessions focusing on more specific topics. I attended two on terrorism-related issues, and got a number of story ideas (and contacts) that made the entire program worthwhile in and of themselves. In addition, JLS offers a series of talks and schmoozing sessions featuring practicing judges and attorneys. The schmoozing includes one's fellow journalists, too, of course.
The "fellows" (that's what they called us) were a diverse crowd -- television, radio, Internet, and print journalists, with everything from a few years to a few decades of experience in the media. Our beats ran the gamut from local crime reporter to the New York Times' Mexico City bureau chief.
Why does Nockleby even bother to do this? At first, he just got tired of the complaining. Nockleby kept hearing complaints that people didn't understand the legal system -- and that the media did a bad job of explaining it.
"You guys keep going on about how the media doesn't get it," he told potential funders. "Put your money where your mouth is."
They did. The American Board of Trial Advocates (ABOTA), which represents top plaintiffs' and civil defense attorneys, wrote a big check. It has kept on writing them.
Program GoalsIdeally, the goal of the program is to provide an overview so that the particular legal issues journalists cover "can be placed in broader perspective," Nockleby said.
You'd be hard-pressed to find a New York Superior Court beat reporter who doesn't understand how that court works. But she might not know how that court's procedures differ from others, or how to find out.
"It's not that we can provide a legal education in three and a half days," Nockleby said. "We can't show journalists how to go about investigating a particular problem. But we can give a systemic overview so that problems get placed in a context where they make a lot more sense."
Is Nockleby's experiment succeeding? The reviews of the program are certainly positive. Then again, most journalists I know appreciate any opportunity to meet new sources and gobble up some background information -- especially if there are open bars involved. My fellow "fellows" appreciated the experience. If our reporting gets even a little bit better or more informed, that's what counts, right?
Nockleby's ambitions aren't limited to half-week fellowships, however. Longtime New York Times Supreme Court reporter "Linda Greenhouse had a year of legal education and that helped her tremendously," he said. "If everybody reporting on law had a law degree, that would be great."
But not every journalist can be Adam Liptak, or Geraldo. And while the Pentagon may sometimes wish that more military embeds had prior military experience, and scientists may wish more reporters had lab experience, that won't always be the case, either. Even Nockleby acknowledges that there's more to journalism that subject-matter expertise.
"All that is great, but more important is the ability to explain things in simple terms," he said. "A lot of lawyers don't have that."
Nick Baumann is an assistant editor at Mother Jones. He covers national politics out of the Washington, D.C. bureau. Nick's writing has also appeared in the Economist, the Washington Monthly, and Commonweal. Email tips and insights to nbaumann [at] motherjones [dot] com. You can also follow him on Twitter.
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
As we write today, Mayor Michael Bloomberg endorsed State Assemblymember Jonathan Bing earlier this summer. Now the billionaire mayor has put his money where his mouth is, giving almost $4,000 to Bing’s campaign on Aug. 31.
Bing was the sponsor of an unsuccessful bid to change the current system of laying off teachers, which depends on seniority. This spring, when the city feared massive teacher layoffs, Bloomberg’s school chancellor, Joel Klein, repeatedly endorsed altering the “last in, first out” system.
In the primary, Bing faces Gregg Lundhahl, a longtime teacher backed by the teachers union. The winner will compete against Republican Paul Niehaus in November.
Daniel Padernacht, a Bronx lawyer who was campaigning to oust Sen. Pedro Espada has dropped out and put his support behind surging candidate Gustavo Rivera. There was a lot of talk that the anti-Espada vote would be split as Rivera racked up endorsements and Padernacht continued his campaign.
Here is a statement from Rivera regarding Padernacht’s decision:
“Dan Padernacht is a tireless community advocate who ran a great campaign, and his selfless decision today puts our community first. With a united front, the thousands of voters in the district who are seeking change can turn to one place. That’s the message that Dan and I are going to be getting out together over the next 9 days. I am deeply grateful for his support.”
Rivera also received the endorsement of the New York Times.
The Albany Times Union has endorsed Sen. Eric Schneiderman for attorney general. A number of other candidates were hoping that an endorsement by the paper would help establish them as the “upstate candidate” but Schneiderman has added the paper to his long list of recent endorsements that include The New York Times, The Amsterdam News, El Diario, The Nation and Rev. Al Sharpton.
Here is a snippet from the endorsement:
“New Yorkers might be understandably wary of drawing their next attorney general from the state Senate, a body that has symbolized dysfunction. But Mr. Schneiderman has long distinguished himself as a cut far above the rest in that chamber. Whether he was in the minority or the majority, he has been an eloquent, progressive voice, speaking out for reform, sensible gun control, marriage equality and equal protection for all New Yorkers.”
The endorsement notes that Assemblymember Richard Brodsky has a strong reformer buy says he “grates on even his allies.” It describes Kathleen Rice as having done “some good work,” on local government corruption but questions her independence from Cuomo and her experience. It cites Eric Dinallo’s time in the attorney general’s office under Spitzer but questions his record as Insurance Superintendent. The endorsement says that Sean Coffey could be called the “most independent” but worries about his political contributions that seem to have lead to business for his firm.
The endorsement could come as a surprise to some as Schneiderman recently no-showed a debate in Albany hosted by public radio station WAMC. He was slammed by the other four candidates and Alan Chartock, the host of the debate, for not appearing. But Schneiderman did host a forum on gun violence in Albany in the last few weeks.
Schneiderman has raised the most money during this period but Nassau County District Attorney has the most cash on hand heading into the Sept. 14 Democratic Primary.
It has been said that Schneiderman is relying heavily on votes from minorities in the city but the Times Union endorsement should solidify him as a force upstate.
On the 700+ member Democracies Online Exchange, I started a conversation about Your Square Mile, a very interesting proposal that could directly impact our the UK-based local communities in our international Issues Forum network and the Neighbourly/Neighorly idea.
Here are is an excerpt from their two pager and some questions I’ve posed:
Here is
some text from the Big Society site (an excerpt from the two
pager David Wilcox linked to) – then some questions below:
There are 93,000 square miles in the UK. We tend to only hear about
two of them, the square miles of the City and Westminster, and have
felt badly let down by both of them in recent years. “Your Square
Mile” is about enabling citizens to make changes in as many of the
other 92,998 square miles as possible.
There are an estimated 900,000+ community groups in the UK and 238,000
Social Entrepreneurs. We want to enable citizens to find and join
these organisations easily, using their own needs and passions as a
start-point, and to feel able to start their own neighbourhood groups.
We want to link these groups, social enterprises and communities to
each other to share ideas and resources, complementing the role of
existing umbrella organisations.
We want to create a platform to enable and empower all kinds of
citizens and social entrepreneurs to achieve things their way: be an “
i-phone for their apps.”
We are therefore going to create the U.K’s biggest mutual: to which
all citizens will be able to belong.
Over the summer and autumn, we will engage in a public co-designing
process to gather ideas and best practice, to raise awareness and
solicit feedback on our proposals. Concurrently, we will work with
commercial and non-commercial partners to develop a benefits package
for membership and a delivery platform that will be as inclusive and
easy to use as possible (including PC’s, mobiles, public kiosks and
other technologies as well as printed materials, community centres and
face-to-face meetings.)
By December 2010 we will have launched Phase 1 of the mutual providing
national tools, advice and practical benefits such as highly
affordable liability insurance for all kinds of local volunteering and
events.
My questions:
1. “Neighbourhood groups” – do they mean general interest resident
associations (which is a very different frame than “social action”
around specific issues? How does this jive with the neighbourhood
efforts of local councils where existing resources seem to support far
larger areas often designated by the government?
2. Does the “co-designing process” have a home on the web where
detailed proposals outlines will be shared?
3. What the heck does “be an ‘i-phone for their apps.’” mean to
everyday people?
4. So, who is leading the effort to outline the technology platform -
finding existing voluntary sector groups seems straight forward – but
does this envision everyone having their own dynamic square mile of
online interactivity with their neighbors or are you going to break up
the country into 93,000 pieces people can identify with? (We’ve been
pondering dynamic and personalized neighbour circles for private
exchange among groups 25-100 nearby people – http://neighbour.be -
with a design the connects people into public life online at a larger
scale where we have our historical base of experience. To me the
“platform” sounds quite complex … almost like something twice as
complex as Facebook behind the scenes.)
5. Is there any evidence that neighbourhood Facebook Pages/Groups are
so successful that you’d mention them by brand (in the evaluation
section)? They seem pretty darn lightweight engagement-wise even if
they theoretically attract numbers compared to other community blogs
and online groups I’ve seen.
6. As a “mutual,” will members be required to pay? Where will/is seed
funding come from to make this all work?
4MR is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
In this week's 4MR podcast I talk about MediaShift's Beyond J-School series so far, including the stories on teaching social media, the 5Across roundtable and Jen Lee Reeves' take on getting j-students over their fear of technology. I talked with Reeves more about how she is asking her students this semester to pay $36 each for Lynda.com courses on learning the basics of Photoshop, Illustrator and Flash. Reeves talked candidly about her students and their fears of failing with technology.
Check it out:
>>> Subscribe to 4MR <<<
>>> Subscribe to 4MR via iTunes <<<
Listen to my entire interview with Jen Lee Reeves:
Background music is "What the World Needs" by the The Ukelele Hipster Kings via PodSafe Music Network.
Here are some links to related sites and stories mentioned in the podcast:
Special Series - Beyond J-School at MediaShift
How to Conquer Journalism Students' Fear of Technology at MediaShift
Making a Change at Jen Lee Reeves' blog
Reporter's Guide to Multimedia Proficiency by Mindy McAdams
How Do I Teach Students to Integrate Multimedia Tools into Storytelling? at Poynter
AEJMC - Teaching Social Media in the Classroom at Reportr.net
Also, be sure to vote in our poll about what you think the biggest change is in journalism schools:
What's the most important change for journalism schools?customer surveys
Mark Glaser is executive editor of MediaShift and Idea Lab. He also writes the bi-weekly OPA Intelligence Report email newsletter for the Online Publishers Association. He lives in San Francisco with his son Julian. You can follow him on Twitter @mediatwit.
4MR is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
Have no plans this weekend? Going to be upstate? Perhaps in Columbia County? Cash burning a hole in your pocket? If so maybe you want to drop by the Sen. Kirsten Gillibrand’s house in Hudson. She is throwing a shindig to raise some cash.
A general admission ticket will cost you $100, VIP tickets $250 and “host” tickets $1,000. The senator has been known as a prodigious fundraiser since her days as the congresswoman from the 20th district.
Gillibrand is facing primary challenger Gail Goode in the Democratic Primary and will face one of three Republican challengers in the general election, if she wins. Her Republican challengers are Joe DioGuardi, Bruce Blakeman and David Malpass. If anyone goes please tell me how the BBQ was– press are NOT invited. Hurumph. I tried! And to think I was born in Hudson. Have a happy Labor Day!

Here is the text of the invite:
Please join Kaye & Chuck Abraham, Jon Arnason, Phebe & George Banta, Margaret & David Bova, Mary Burns & Vince Clephas, Paige Crable & Ray DeMarco, Kathleen H. Dittus, Esq., Joan & Wolcott Dunham, Fran & Steve Edelstein, Karen Feldman, Julie Fenster, Kristin & Charles Flood,
Paula & Philip Forman, Joan & Harvey Friedman, Judith B. Grunberg, Cyndy Hall, Linda Hirshman & David Forkosh, Sylvia K. Johann, Barney Karpfinger & Eric Marcus, Jamie Kibel, Katherine Kolbert & Richard P. Rubinstein, Debbie Lans & Sharon Grubin, Jeffrey Lick & Steve McCarthy,
Kerry Madigan & Neal Rosenthal, Stephen Mazoh & Martin Kline, Robert Montgomery, Sue & Henry Neale, Susan & Harry Newton, Polly N. Rutnik, Susan & Roger Tilles, Ulster Cty Democratic Women, and David B. Wood, III for a Labor Day Weekend Barbeque at the home of
UNITED STATES SENATOR
KIRSTEN GILLIBRAND
Saturday, September 4
The home of Kirsten & Jonathan Gillibrand
Hudson, New York
VIP Reception and Photo Line: 4:00 p.m. 4:30 p.m. | General Reception: 4:30 p.m. 6:00 p.m.
Host: $1,000 (write or raise) | VIP: $250 (per individual) | General Ticket: $100 (per individual)
The city’s largest public employee union has endorsed Assemblymember Richard Brodsky. The union boasts 125,000 members and 50,000 retirees. In a low turnout election unions that have proven to be able to mobilize their membership will be key and by scoring this endorsement Brodsky has taken a bit of steam out of Sen. Eric Schneiderman’s bid to dominate the vote in the city.
*Update* I goofed a bit–District Council 37 endorsed Brodsky in July–so it doesn’t change any of Schneiderman’s plans for victory via the city vote.
In other news for the race for attorney general, fund raising numbers are coming in and Sen. Eric Schneiderman has raised the most this period with $380,000 raised in an 18 day period (the New York Times endorsement likely helped out a bit.) Schneiderman has approximately $1.3 million on hand.
Nassau County District Attorney Kathleen Rice raised $278,405 and has $2.8 million on hand. She was the top fundraiser in the last period. Eric Dinallo raised $66,908 and has $1.6 million on hand. Brodsky raised $98,999 and has $335,494 on hand. Sean Coffey raised $39,120 and has $1.57 million on hand. He loaned his campaign $1 million.
For more on what differentiates the candidates (besides money) check out our recent story on the race.
As the candidates for attorney general struggle to carve out identities for themselves, Eric Dinallo may have found his. The Financial Times is reporting (registration required) that the former state insurance regulator is emerging as the candidate of Wall Street.
The paper analyzed his campaign donations and found Dinallo had far outpaced other candidates in money from Wall Street, bringing in $109,000, compared to the $65,000 financial companies gave Nassau County District Attorney Kathleen Rice.
The paper also found that eight of Dinallo’s 10 top donors work in finance, including Jim Chanos, who gave $50,000 himself and $16,500 through his hedge fund.
The irony is that Dinallo worked former Wall Street nemesis Eliot Spitzer when he was attorney general. But, Blair Horner of New York Public Interest Research Group, told the Times that Dinallo may have tuned that to his advantage, going back to contacts he made in his earlier job to “shake the money tree.”
For his part, Dinallo told the paper that his Wall Street supporters know that, while he can be “tough on people who’ve cheated, who’ve had conflicts of interest … ultimately I am fair.”
Dinallo also has worked in finance — at Morgan Stanley and Willis Group. And he won the endorsement of Crain’s. In the editorial the paper praised Dinallo for having “a profound understanding of financial services, which he is eminently prepared to police — without the ego and the mean streak that made Mr. Spitzer the industry’s enemy” and chided two of his opponents, Assemblymember Richard Brodsky and State Sen. Eric Schneiderman for having priorities “not aligned with the business community.”
Editors Note: This Inclusive Social Media update is from Boa Lee, our Community Outreach and Information Leader focused on Frogtown.
By Boa Lee,
Community Outreach and Information Leader, Greater Frogtown Neighbors Forum
A post appeared on the Minneapolis citywide issues forum in mid-March 2009. The poster, Jay Clark, the director of the Minnesota Center for Neighborhood Organizing and a well-known community organizer in the North Minneapolis and Hmong communities, told forum members about a recent Minneapolis Park Board meeting. At that meeting, Clark wrote, Latino kids and their parents were separated from the wider audience – and eventually removed from the premises – without having been given a fair opportunity to air their concerns. The Latino community members had attended the meeting to advocate for soccer fields at Powderhorn Park in Minneapolis; the meeting was taking place in another part of the city. Even before attending the park board meeting, the Latinos who were extracted from the meeting – with Clark’s help – had began a large awareness campaign to put pressure on the park board and city leaders to create soccer fields for the Latino kids already playing soccer in Powderhorn. The group had also been distributing hundreds of postcards to residents, asking the residents to send the notice of support to decision-makers like the mayor of Minneapolis.

Soccer at Powderhorn - Photo by Gayla Ellis for Powderhorn 365
Meeting organizers saw Clark’s post and one park commissioner responded the next day, explaining that park commissioners were aware of the group’s campaign to get the soccer fields. Neighbors responded to the topic.
My mid-April 2009, the topic had moved to the Powderhorn Neighbors Forum, where dozens more posts from residents both in support of and against the soccer fields shared their thoughts. One Latino teen who played soccer at Powderhorn logged on to the forum using Clark’s name (but signing his own at the end of post). The teen invited neighbors to come watch a game. By this time, the issue was also receiving wide media attention and several neighborhood newspapers picked up the story and/or published Letters to the Editor written by the Latino teens asking for the soccer fields.
The best success indicator of the community’s campaign to get the soccer fields was not necessarily that the soccer fields actually came to be or even that a public official responded to Clark’s original post; rather, it was the ability to reach many more people – neighbors – through the forum and garnering a wider and more diverse base of supporters that Clark would later note in an interview with me as the most positive part of the project. Clark said he has used the forum to help highlight other campaigns – for example a campaign spearheaded by Hmong teens to get more Hmong-speaking officers to work the day shift in North Minneapolis – and intends to continue using the E-Democracy forums as another tool in his community organizer’s toolbox.
While community organizing is not E-Democracy’s direct mission, the organization’s desire to increase civic engagement by providing an online space for neighbors to meet and discuss issues lends well to also aiding in, or perhaps inciting, organizing work. Giving neighbors and organizers a venue in which to share information can complement traditional community organizing. At the same time, this raises the question of how E-Democracy might enhance community organizing and social change in the 21st century.
Lessons Applied in Frogtown
In June 2010, I seeded a topic asking the Greater Frogtown Neighbors Forum members where they got their hyper-local (neighborhood) news. No one responded to that thread. But one person did start a new related thread that same day in response, stating that Frogtown was at a disadvantage by not having a dedicated newspaper and asking for creative ideas to get community news distributed to neighbors. The following day and just eight posts later (the thread ballooned to 19 posts), Tony Schmitz – a Frogtown resident and the former owner of the now defunct Frogtown Times newspaper – offered to take the online discussion offline. Schmitz offered to host a brainstorming session at his house.
Seven days after the thread started, Tony and two other residents (one of whom was Tony’s wife), Mary Turck from the Twin Cities Daily Planet (an online news site) and I discussed the idea of starting a Frogtown neighborhood newspaper. By the time the meeting ended, those in attendance had each volunteered to do more research or outreach about the idea. The neighbors become their own community organizers.
The two stories shared above represent the convergence of new technologies with old organizing models. What we know of traditional community organizing is that results are met when a group of people can come together to push for a common benefit. To build a foundation of support requires outreach, strategic planning and, oftentimes, good timing. Organizers will need to determine whether and when E-Democracy is the proper venue in which to share information and receive input. As community organizing takes greater advantage of social media and the Internet, adding a new tool like posting on the E-Democracy online forums can become part of the strategic outreach method that capitalizes on changing technology and a growing and attentive audience.
Editor’s Note: The soccer field story is ongoing with some Powderhorn Park changes and a permanent artificial turf field being built in next door in the Phillips neighborhood (after making this post, I received a telephone call from an elected official crediting in large part the campaign described above even if the permanent field will be in a nearby park).
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
For decades, journalists in mainstream news organizations were shielded from the revenue side of the operation. Many argued their lack of knowledge helped avoid even the appearance of commercial influence in the editorial well. But with increased stress in the news industry and new disruptive technologies giving even entry-level reporters an understanding of audience behaviors and income streams, things have started to shift.
Journalism educators have increasingly been helping students learn the workings of the business side of news. The trend mirrors similar changes in the newsroom. Plus, with many journalists being laid off, having the business skills to run their own media enterprise -- whether it's a blog, podcast or independent news site -- is vital to many more people.
"It came to be recognized that journalists needed to play more of a role in the future of their enterprises," said Stephen Shepard, who talked to me recently in a phone interview. Shepard is the founding and current dean of the CUNY Graduate School of Journalism and former editor-in-chief of BusinessWeek magazine.
CUNY's J-school and a raft of other journalism schools and institutes have introduced business courses into their curricula, teaching students to read and create basic financial statements and the principles of media management. They are also launching new training programs for mid-career journalists and editors.
Janice Castro is the senior director of graduate education and teaching excellence at Medill. She told me that at Northwestern University, the Medill School of Journalism and Kellogg business school have cooperated "for a long time" in developing a media management and research center.
Full disclosure: Medill is a longtime sponsor of MediaShift.

Four years ago, as Medill revamped its curriculum, seats in two courses in media management at Kellogg were reserved for Medill students. Medill graduate students are also required to take either a course in "Audience Insight" or "How 21st Century Media Work," and have the option to take Kellogg classes in finance.
"We think it's really important for students who are going out to operate as journalists to understand the business of media," Castro said. "It's going to help them make better choices in where they're going to work, because they'll be better able to size up the company and its direction and its vision. They'll know more than the brand or the name of a big media organization. They'll be able to assess it."
Students will also better be able to help guide the organization strategically, according to Castro and Shepard. "When you have a student who's graduated and immediately put on the management track at a major media company, that's not something that used to happen," Castro said.
Demand for Entrepreneurial InstructionThere's also increasing demand from students joining or launching startup ventures.
CUNY this month expects to announce the formation of a master's degree program in Entrepreneurial Journalism, further enriching and extending courses offered since the school's inception four years ago.

At the Cronkite School of Journalism at Arizona State University, the Knight Center for Digital Media Entrepreneurship" is devoted to the development of new media entrepreneurship and the creation of innovative digital media products," according to its site. (Read this previous MediaShift article about how the school teaches digital media entrepreneurs.)
Retha Hill is the director of the New Media Innovation Lab at Cronkite.
During a lab-focused semester, Cronkite school students "have to think about the business implications of their ideas or the information they are gathering," Hill told me via email.
Even at Columbia University, where school founder Joseph Pulitizer in 1904 wrote that he found the idea of teaching business "repugnant," students are required to learn business principles. All Masters of Science students, about 85 percent of matriculants, take a class on the "Business of Journalism" that was conceived and introduced last year by dean of academic affairs and former Wall Street Journal Online managing editor Bill Grueskin.
The course includes a Harvard Business School case study about a Norwegian media company called Schibsted that moved its business more strongly into digital media; instruction on managing profit and loss in a business; the differences in advertising and circulation revenues; principles of ad pricing; and other business issues.
Grueskin told me via email that the faculty at Columbia overwhelmingly supported the course. In a letter to them, Grueskin wrote that while Pulitzer "went out of his way to exclude business courses from the curriculum," today "journalists are increasingly being called upon to make business models work. We owe it to our students to give them a grounding in that field."
Training Institutes Step InTraining institutes, too, are helping journalists and editors learn business principles.
The Knight Digital Media Center, based at both the University of Southern California and the University of California at Berkeley, in May held a week-long "News Entrepreneur Boot Camp."
Full disclosure: Knight Digital Media Center is a sponsor of MediaShift.
Attendees, many of them mid-career journalists, learned disciplines such as business models, building a feasibility plan, customer acquisition and web analytics.
The Poynter Institute, a Florida-based journalism think tank and training center where I contribute articles and have lectured on business principles, in July named two Ford Fellows in Entrepreneurial Journalism who are mentoring startup initiatives and teaching business disciplines.
Heartening TrendWhile some journalism purists may bemoan what they consider fuzzing the lines between "church (journalism) and state (business)," I find the move to integrate business into journalism education encouraging.
It's healthy, I think, that reporters and editors now believe they should understand what it is that brings in the money that goes into their paychecks.
This is not to say they should pander to commercial or financial interests -- and there is certainly a danger as even junior reporters learn how many page views (and by implication advertising impressions) a story they produce garners. One journalism educator told me that even in his "little blog" he considered whether to disrupt the center column with an ad and make more money.
It's always been a balancing act, though, even if the rank-and-file weren't completely aware. At BusinessWeek, "ad placement was always an issue," Shepard said.
That even new J-school graduates now understand some of the struggles is probably a good thing -- as long as they also are grounded in what Shepard called the "professionalism and judgment" to not "cave in all the time to advertising demands in a way that would hurt the reader or viewer."
In the long run, those guiding journalistic enterprises must understand both the editorial principles that over time bring in and maintain a community of readers and participants, as well as the business principles that sustain the operation.
If they can do so successfully, perhaps the new news businesses they are molding and creating can then survive the fate of so many of today's severely stressed news organizations.
A former managing editor at ABCNews.com and an MBA, Dorian Benkoil has devised and executed marketing and sales strategies for MediaShift. He is SVP at Teeming Media, a strategic media consultancy focused on attracting, engaging, activating communities through digital media. He tweets at @dbenk.
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
It is a good day for Gustavo Rivera. His bid to unseat Sen. Pedro Espada is gaining some big-name support. Rev. Al Sharpton is scheduled to endorse him today and he has won the approval of the Daily News.
The News does not hold back in their contempt for Rivera’s opponent Sen. Pedro Espada. Here is an excerpt from the endorsement:
“The grounds for dumping Espada, poster boy for Albany insanity, are almost beyond imagining. He was the party-flipping, power-grabbing instigator of the Senate coup last summer that paralyzed Albany for a month. He also stands credibly accused by state Attorney General Andrew Cuomo of looting $14 million from a taxpayer-financed chain of health clinics.
On top of that, Espada notoriously lives outside his district, in Mamaroneck; persistently ignores campaign finance laws, and is even being sued for allegedly stiffing his tailor on $7,200 worth of fancy suits. Rivera bears no such ethical taint. His professional background consists mainly of campaigning for Democrats, including President Obama. He most recently worked as an aide to U.S. Sen. Kirsten Gillibrand. He also teaches political science part time at Pace University. While this page is not in sync with Rivera on some issues, he is likely in line with the sensibilities of the district and is surely in tune with the economic interests of working New Yorkers.”
Rev. Al Sharpton is set to endorse Gustavo Rivera today in his bid to unseat Sen. Pedro Espada today at noon. The endorsement is set to take place at the studios of WWRL at 333 7th Ave. today. Rivera received the endorsement of El Diario earlier this week.
Sharpton recently endorsed Sen. Eric Schneiderman for attorney general. Sen. John Sampson stood alongside Sharpton and Schneiderman on that day but don’t expect to him to show up for the Rivera endorsement.
I got a few minutes with the conference leader during the Schneiderman endorsement and asked for his thoughts on Gustavo Rivera. “Who?” he asked. “The man who is challenging Pedro Espada,” I replied. “Well senator Espada is a colleague,” Sampson said flashing a smile.
Sampson will host an immigration forum with Espada on Sept.9 from 5 p.m. to 9 p.m. at Bronx Community College.
Ninja gold miners digging in evaporated river. Image by Flickr user chenyingphoto. CC BY
Gold production in Mongolia is growing rapidly and it saw a seventeen-fold increase between 1991 and 2001. But the real boost came in July 2001, when a Canadian company called Ivanhoe Mines found a large gold and copper deposit at Oyu Tolgoi (turquoise hill). Foreign investment in the country on explorations soared. And the great Mongolian gold rush began with mining companies from around the world coming to the Gobi desert.
But not only the mining companies, this gold rush has also changed some of the lives of the Mongolian poorest. Thousands of people, called the “Ninjas”, have left home to take up digging and sifting for gold full-time. Otgonsuren Jargal writes in the Nomad Green blog:
A Ninja gold miner. Image by Chenyingphoto. CC BY
“Ninja”–or artisan miners–in Mongolia means people who dig dirt, live outlaws and seek for gold on old/used mining fields. There are around 5000 artisan miners working in Uyanga soum (village) of Uvurkhangai aimag (province) in Mongolia, today.There was some false information saying that the number of ninjas was decreasing in last few years. Actually the number increased to 10,000 during summer season at the area where Ongi river starts which is the range named Taats coming from Khangai mountain.
The average ninja earns about $10 in a week. Lured by this small fortune, they consist of not only destitute, many students on summer break come to search for golds in potential locations with their parents to help pay tuition. But their work damages the environment. Otgonsuren Jargal explains:
Image by Chenyingphoto. CC BY
The evaporation of Ongi river made many who live in Gobi suffer for past ten years. Mongolia is the most effected area from desertification, especially in Gobi, the water is a really hard issue at this moment. The Ongi river was the only one water resource of Gobi's life. But, there are more than 10,000 ninjas digging dirt at the very beginning of this river and destroying and poisoning the source of water.
A group of journalist including Nomad Green members and Italian journalist Gabriele came to this place to report about the artisan miners.
Many people were working here and there between dump, picking up some dirt and washing them in the pools among the hills. You can see a lot of ghers /traditional Mongolian yurt/ of different shapes-round and roofless and tumbledown etc. These were the accommodation of ninjas.
Here is the video they produced:
They saw that excavators were destroying the highest dump which is called “Eifel” by local people.
The rest of this big mountain will be diminished if they continue digging for another 10 years.
The gold rush is not going to end anytime soon. The Gold price across the world have reached an all-time high at $1100 an ounce and it is predicted to rise further. Christian A. DeHaemer at Wealthdaily puts it this way:
You may not be aware of it, but there is a new gold mine in Mongolia. In fact, it is the world's largest — a mine bigger than the state of Ohio!
The spending on this mine will double the GDP of Mongolia. That's right — double… which means Mongolia will become to Central Asian minerals what Dubai is to Middle Eastern oil.
So the Ninja miners will not be stopping any time soon.
The droughts in Mongolia are a big problem which decreases production of wheat and other crops. However Mandah shares an expert opinion:
Mungunbaatar, coordinator of “Rain richness” state manufacturing agency says “Having rain by shooting rain clouds has great economic efficiency”.
Meanwhile the Nomad Green citizen journalists continue to write about their trip to Taiwan. Botanist Dorjgotovariungerel writes how environmentally friendly the Taiwanese people are. Dorjgotovariungerel thinks that the irresponsible action and processing of Mongolians have already brought desertification and land degradation in the country and they could use the examples of the Taiwanese people to turn things around.
Lunch at Tea firm. Image by ariungerel, Nomad Green.
Dorjgotovariungerel also writes about the experience of the Nomad Green team who visited a tea garden and factory in Taiwan.
They cook all meal in the tea such as bean, cans and rice. All food was very delicious.
The city Charter Revision Commission has issued its final report (available here) on its six months of work.
The 219-page document includes the two proposals that will appear on the November ballot — one on term limits and the other a potpourri of measures related to “elections and government administration.” These include requiring disclosure of independent campaign expenditures, reducing the number of signatures prospective candidates must receive to qualify for the ballot and increasing the penalties for conflicts of interest. The commission did “not recommend change at this time” to loosen the mayor’s iron grip on the Conflicts of Interest Board, which seems to make members of his administration exempt from penalties, whatever their size.
The report offers background on the issue, texts of the proposed amendments and lots of supporting materials along with information on commission members, staff and procedures.
It also includes a section on items for future consideration, including nonpartisan (or to use the current parlance, top-two) elections. Although the commission heard testimony on this issue from experts and the general public, the report said, “Many commission members, regardless of their personal feelings about top-two elections, expressed doubts about placing a proposal on the ballot without further consideration.”
Amid its official tone, there are some nuggets here and there. For example, on term limits (the issue that for all intents and purposes led to creation of the commission) the report attributes the move to extend them in 2008 to the City Council. As for the mayor’s role: He established the Charter Commission and ” asked that the voters be given another opportunity to weigh in on the issue.”
Somehow that isn’t quite how we remember it.
The new Quinnipiac Poll shows what the last one did–voters mostly have no idea which Democrat they will vote for in the Sept. 14 primary. The last poll showed 81 percent of Democratic voters undecided, the latest poll puts the number at 77.
Only 4 percent of voters say they plan to vote for Nassau County DA Kathleen Rice, 3 percent for Sen. Eric Schneiderman, 1 percent for Assemblymember Richard Brodsky and 1 percent for Sean Coffey. Meanwhile 2 percent say they won’t vote and 5 percent refused to answer.
The poll goes a long way to showing why the candidates are still desperatly trying to differentiate themselves from one another.
Sen. Eric Schneiderman picked up more endorsements today and it seems that he is hell-bent on winning the race on votes from the city and minorities.
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
In a time and age when many of my generation assume the younger generation understands technology, I have been surprised by the number of students who walk into my class and announce that they "don't know anything about computers."
It's a rampant attitude. I beg each and every student who says this to pretend they never said it and try everything I introduce to them in my class. Over the last seven years I've been teaching, I've seen a slow change that is now very obvious: It isn't just a belief that they don't know about computers, many students are simply afraid to fail.
I am open to writing about my professional failures for this site. I thrive from the learning experience that comes from doing everything I can, even if I fail. So my students' reaction to failure has been difficult to understand, and even more difficult to verbalize.
A Different ApproachWhen they arrive in my class, I teach students how to go beyond what they already learned in the radio/television sequence at the Missouri School of Journalism. The students know how to produce stories for on-the-air and online. They know how to edit stellar video and audio. But there is another level of multimedia journalism that I try to help them add to an already solid base of knowledge. This can be scary, as many of my students are overachievers who are frightened to get a bad grade. They're afraid to jump into something new before they even have a chance to fail. I used to just think that was funny and it didn't interfere with my teaching. But lately I have decided it is time to teach my class differently.
In the past I taught students the basics of software like Flash, Photoshop and Illustrator. I introduced blogging, video conversion tools and many other web-based tools that can make delivering online stories a richer experience. The students who try it all walk away with a knowledge of how things work. But even more important, they understand how to talk about the technology. They may not be experts, but they can talk to an expert and be able to understand his or her needs when they work together on a project.
I will not stop teaching these tools, but I am going to do it with more help. I think I need to spend classroom time presenting my case for the basic knowledge of software instead of teaching it during class time. I plan on going about this campaign in a number of ways.
Four ElementsHere are the four main elements of my new approach:
Not all of my students are afraid of technology. The shifts I am making in my class are focused on helping this group of students succeed just as well as the more fearful ones. And I'm ready to push ahead with these changes with the knowledge that they too could fail.
Jennifer Reeves worked in television news for the majority of her career. In the last six years, she has moved from traditional journalist to non-traditional thinker about journalism and education. Jen is currently the New Media Director at KOMU-TV and komu.com. At the same time, she is an associate professor at the Missouri School of Journalism and was a part of the inaugural class of Reynolds Journalism Institute fellows (2008-09).
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
The Cartoonist, our winning entry in the 2010 Knight News Challenge, emerged from two research programs. For the past two years, my research group at the Georgia Institute of Technology has been cataloging and analyzing the burgeoning genre of "newsgames" -- videogames about current and past real-world events. That research produced a book, Newsgames, which will be published next month by MIT Press.
Meanwhile, on the other side of the country, professor Michael Mateas and his Expressive Intelligence Studio at UC Santa Cruz have been working on the problem of game generation by creating artificial intelligence tools to create a virtually infinite number of games.
The goal of our two-year Knight grant is to create a tool for generating newsgames on the fly, making it viable to create a videogame about a breaking event. This is done by identifying the issue and an angle for editorial or reporting, boiling the story down into its constituent agents and their relationships, and selecting from a range of rhetorical archetypes. Anyone who understands how to use the tool will be able to create a newsgame, remixed from the structures and mechanics of popular arcade games, within five minutes or less. The game will output to Flash and HTML 5 for instant uploading to the web, where it can be paired with reportage, columns, video, infographics, and cartoons covering the same current event.
Early NewsgamesOur project strives to enhance the online viability of local newspapers and to lower the technical barrier required to produce videogames with editorial intent. We see it as as an extension of, rather than a replacement for, the tradition of editorial cartooning. The creator of the earliest newsgames, Gonzalo Frasca, was the first to describe his work as "playable political cartoons." The French-language history and geography textbooks Frasca encountered in high school featured many cartoons drawn by an artist from Le Monde, and they were, according to him, all that made civics education bearable.
By now, anyone studying or working in journalism understands the great loss to news revenue caused by the shift of classifieds to online sources such as Craigslist and eBay. It is our contention that the abandonment of staff cartoonists at many papers -- a tragic and highly visible symptom of overall budget cuts during the recent recession -- represents a similarly vital loss, though of a different kind. For over a century, editorial cartoons drew attention to issues of local importance and generated a sense of regional pride. Their contribution to the wellbeing of local papers has never been easily quantifiable, but it's clear that they've always served a pivotal role in maintaining product loyalty and funneling readers toward the rest of the paper.
Appeal of PuzzlesGames accomplish a similar goal: Studies by the New York Times, the London Times, and a number of local papers showed that a significant percentage of their readerships bought the paper primarily for the puzzles. Although the crossword retains its loyalists, and despite the advent of Sudoku having ushered in a new generation of puzzlers, the rise in popularity of online web game portals represents yet another threat to the growth and retention of news readerships.
The new online news media require a new form of game, one that draws from the accessibility of arcade games and the capability of videogames to present an editorial opinion. Indeed, The Cartoonist has uses far beyond interactive cartoons, and as a result we will be changing the final product's name to reflect its broad potential. More on that as things progress.
Once it is fully developed, our studios will work with local reporters, columnists, and cartoonists in Atlanta and Santa Cruz to introduce them to the authoring system. Later, we'll make the tool and its source code available to everyone, from veteran cartoonists, to indie game developers, to citizen journalists. Until then, we'll be publishing findings, problems, and points of interest twice a month on this blog, along with other articles on our own Newsgames and Expressive Intelligence Studio websites. We look forward to your questions, comments, and continued support.
The Cartoonist, our winning entry in the 2010 Knight News Challenge, emerged from two research programs. For the past two years, my research group at the Georgia Institute of Technology has been cataloging and analyzing the burgeoning genre of "newsgames" -- videogames about current and past real-world events. That research produced a book, Newsgames, which will be published next month by MIT Press.
Meanwhile, on the other side of the country, professor Michael Mateas and his Expressive Intelligence Studio at UC Santa Cruz have been working on the problem of game generation by creating artificial intelligence tools to create a virtually infinite number of games.
The goal of our two-year Knight grant is to create a tool for generating newsgames on the fly, making it viable to create a videogame about a breaking event. This is done by identifying the issue and an angle for editorial or reporting, boiling the story down into its constituent agents and their relationships, and selecting from a range of rhetorical archetypes. Anyone who understands how to use the tool will be able to create a newsgame, remixed from the structures and mechanics of popular arcade games, within five minutes or less. The game will output to Flash and HTML 5 for instant uploading to the web, where it can be paired with reportage, columns, video, infographics, and cartoons covering the same current event.
Early NewsgamesOur project strives to enhance the online viability of local newspapers and to lower the technical barrier required to produce videogames with editorial intent. We see it as as an extension of, rather than a replacement for, the tradition of editorial cartooning. The creator of the earliest newsgames, Gonzalo Frasca, was the first to describe his work as "playable political cartoons." The French-language history and geography textbooks Frasca encountered in high school featured many cartoons drawn by an artist from Le Monde, and they were, according to him, all that made civics education bearable.
By now, anyone studying or working in journalism understands the great loss to news revenue caused by the shift of classifieds to online sources such as Craigslist and eBay. It is our contention that the abandonment of staff cartoonists at many papers -- a tragic and highly visible symptom of overall budget cuts during the recent recession -- represents a similarly vital loss, though of a different kind. For over a century, editorial cartoons drew attention to issues of local importance and generated a sense of regional pride. Their contribution to the wellbeing of local papers has never been easily quantifiable, but it's clear that they've always served a pivotal role in maintaining product loyalty and funneling readers toward the rest of the paper.
Appeal of PuzzlesGames accomplish a similar goal: Studies by the New York Times, the London Times, and a number of local papers showed that a significant percentage of their readerships bought the paper primarily for the puzzles. Although the crossword retains its loyalists, and despite the advent of Sudoku having ushered in a new generation of puzzlers, the rise in popularity of online web game portals represents yet another threat to the growth and retention of news readerships.
The new online news media require a new form of game, one that draws from the accessibility of arcade games and the capability of videogames to present an editorial opinion. Indeed, The Cartoonist has uses far beyond interactive cartoons, and as a result we will be changing the final product's name to reflect its broad potential. More on that as things progress.
Once it is fully developed, our studios will work with local reporters, columnists, and cartoonists in Atlanta and Santa Cruz to introduce them to the authoring system. Later, we'll make the tool and its source code available to everyone, from veteran cartoonists, to indie game developers, to citizen journalists. Until then, we'll be publishing findings, problems, and points of interest twice a month on this blog, along with other articles on our own Newsgames and Expressive Intelligence Studio websites. We look forward to your questions, comments, and continued support.
"I cannot blame them too much. If I had loved something my whole life, I would find it difficult to let go too."
(tags: relevance newspapers career evolution)
Sen. Eric Schneiderman was a no show for a debate in Albany today and Nassau County District Attorney took the opportunity to jab the senator on a number of occasions.
Particularly Rice attacked Schneiderman over a bill she favors that would increase the penalties for luring a child over the internet. Rice said the bill has “languished” in the senate codes committee for “over a year.” Her campaign released a television ad attacking Schneiderman on the issue.
Schneiderman’s campaign issued a rebuttal, saying that Rice does not understand the law. In the TV spot Rice says the bill she supports would make luring a child over the internet a felony. Luring a child over the internet is already a felony in the state. Schneiderman’s campaign said he voted for a law that made it so in 2008.
Here is a statement from Schneiderman’s campaign manager:
With all due respect, now we know why multiple editorial pages have said in recent days that Ms. Rice lacks a grasp of the issues facing this office, Schneiderman campaign manager Emily Arsenault said today. While Ms. Rice called for making internet luring a felony in her commercial, it already is one. And while she attacked Eric Schneiderman for not supporting making internet luring a felony, it turns out he voted for a luring bill that was enacted in 2008, while Ms. Rices preferred measure would actually require more proof than currently required to convict. If Ms. Rice wants to actually make it harder to convict internet predators, thats her right, but she should make sure she has the facts straight.
Meanwhile Schneiderman was endorsed by El Diario and Congresswoman Carolyn Maloney.
Here is Maloney’s statement:
“I’m proud to endorse Eric Schneiderman for Attorney General, he’s the best person for the job,” said Maloney. “There is no one who is better prepared, more experienced or a stronger advocate for working families than Eric Schneiderman. Whether it’s fighting for women’s rights, economic justice or government reform, Eric has stood up for progressive values and delivered results for all New Yorkers. We need a fierce defender of the people of New York to be Attorney General, there’s only one option: elect Eric Schneiderman on September 14th.
Wayne Barrett of the Village Voice is not so happy to see Schneiderman riding the wave of recent endorsements and challenges his independence in this recent post.
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
As Australian democracy hangs in the balance, and with the outcome of the August 21 national election unlikely to be resolved for weeks, I'm considering the implications for journalism education -- and how we can invent new models for political reporting.
I am a former Australian Broadcasting Corporation political journalist who now teaches journalism in at the University of Canberra, which is situated just down the road from Australia's national parliament. Parliament House is home to the Canberra Press Gallery, the Holy Grail of Australian political journalism.
I made a small but successful attempt at innovating political reporting in the classroom through the employment of Twitter as a student-reporting platform in a Canberra regional election in 2008. But it's time my school, which bills itself as Australia's "Capital University," embarked on a political journalism project that marries journalism students and media-active citizenry with industry partners, new media players and civic agencies.
Such an approach could enable the implementation of a citizen-informed editorial agenda; the engagement of a now essential social media strategy; and the enhancement of industry partner's political coverage, with the social objective of enabling participatory democracy. It should also provide an opportunity for academic research, so that the outcomes can be appropriately measured and academically published, as well as being reported for mass consumption through a variety of media.
Superficial CoverageProblematic Australian political reporting, which became a theme of its own during the heavily stage-managed campaign, has been cited as one of the causes of this historic result: The first hung Parliament since World War II, and the upending of Australia's entrenched, highly combative, two-party democracy.
Journalists have been accused of producing superficial stories that were heavily influenced by polls and the major parties' political agendas, but light on critique and context. Citizen journalists bit back on blogs and Twitter, telling journalists to lift their game.
They complained about Press Gallery obsessions with predictions, personalities and political processes at the expense of policies. They also cited the impact of spin and campaign stage management on editorial agendas at the expense of independent, inquiring journalism as evidence of the need for changing practice. They asked why Australia's increasingly costly involvement in the war in Afghanistan wasn't probed during the campaign, and they wanted to know why both major parties virtually ignored climate change. This public critique of professional political journalism provoked defensive reactions from some reporters and triggered a vigorous Twitter debate on political journalism between the Fourth Estate and the New Estate. Witness the below exchange between a journalist and one of my colleagues at the university:


Four independent Members of Parliament, bent on upending the Oz political landscape, are likely to hold the Balance of Power in the new government -- and they've already taken aim at the Fourth Estate for its failures and apparent determination to maintain the status quo. In a National Press Club (NPC) address last week, one MP, Tony Windsor, challenged the journalists present, saying, "if you people are sick of the nonsense, then promote some of [our] concepts." Another, Rob Oakeshott, pointed to what he sees as the essence of the problem. "In focusing so heavily on the [Prime Minister], the cabinet and the polls ... we have lost the focus on the local member," he told the NPC. And with it, the local community.
A challengeNYU journalism professor Jay Rosen visited Australia in the middle of the election campaign to speak at a national conference of journalists. He was intrigued to find what he calls horse race journalism being practiced on the Australian election campaign trail. He revived his alternative model for political reporting driven by the "citizens agenda" during his highly publicized visit. He also proposed a new role of media outlet as "explainer" for the national public broadcaster, ABC.
U.S. political journalist John Nichols was another keynote speaker at the conference. His rousing speech invoked Finley Peter Dunne ("afflict the comfortable and comfort the afflicted") and pointed to the risk that spin increasingly amplifies the voices of the powerful and threatens journalists' capacity to speak truth to power. It made me feel like I'd attended a revival meeting at the Church of Journalism.
Rosen's practical challenge and Nichols' call to faith focused my mind on the role that journalism education might play in reforming political reporting in Australia. Key targets for an overhaul of political journalism in the Australian setting are:
There has been only limited innovation in the sphere of community and industry-partnered journalism school projects around political journalism in Australia. The best of these was YouDecide2007 project, which sought to explore the role of social media and citizen journalism in partnership with the secondary Australian public broadcaster, the multilingual SBS. This early and very successful research-driven project did not, however, systematically involve journalism students, nor did it directly feed back into journalism training. In fact, most Australian journalism schools don't teach political journalism as a genre, and the training that does occur tends to simply model entrenched industry patterns.
Here's what I propose: A multi-partnered, citizen-activated journalism project based at the University of Canberra in the lead up to the next national election (which could happen swiftly unless a stable government can be established in the current cliff-hanger of a ballot!). The objective would be to take the focus off the agendas of the major parties and the Canberra Press Gallery and look beyond the walls of Parliament House to the experiences and views of the broader Canberra public.
Let's call this proposed project Barrukka, which means "talk" in an Aboriginal dialect. This name is in deference to the historically disenfranchised Indigenous Australians and it is a way of reflecting an underlying objective of connecting disempowered voices with the mainstream media and broader public.
Its four-fold purpose would be to:
Senior student journalists, with the appropriate training and experience, would be embedded within the wider region's individual electorates (which range from inner city through farmland) for one week, researching and reporting the main issues identified by community organizations, local media and candidates. Thereafter, those electorates would become their election beats and their new contacts their main sources for coverage.
The student journalists would also be tasked to recruit local leaders for community-based discussion groups. These groups would identify and explore key issues of concern and then feed those ideas into editorial processes, while group leaders would also upload content (audio, video, images, etc.) directly to the main website and via interconnected social media platforms.
Partnerships With Industry, New Media & GovernmentPartnerships would provide funding and support for the project. For example, UC's journalism program could partner with the country's respected and community-engaged, multiple-platform public broadcaster, the ABC.
A second potential partnership could be formed between UC and one of the emerging activist media groups invested in social change like Get-Up, which successfully extended voting enrollment rights during the 2010 poll through legal challenges.
A third partnership could be pursued between UC's journalism program and the Australian Electoral Commission, the statutory body which oversees the election process and the registration of voters. One of the roles of the project would be to educate Australians about electoral processes, promote democratic engagement and stimulate voter registration.
Embedded Hyper-Local ReportingEmbedding student journalists within individual electorates and requiring them to build relationships with both the candidates and the communities, through a combination of online and traditional reporting strategies, would encourage coverage of issues which may challenge both the major parties' strategic objectives and the Press Gallery's narrow editorial agenda.
The student reporters would be forbidden from covering press-release generated "news" in the interests of countering spin, and they would be required to include two face-to-face interviews from non-official sources in every story filed. Their brief would be to report in an explanatory, rather than inflammatory, manner.
They would be required to file content across a range of platforms including the project website, UC journalism school radio and TV programs, Twitter, blogs and Facebook pages associated with the project. In addition, they would be expected to tweet and blog about the processes of reporting in the interests of reflexive practice. And they would be tasked to produce one podcast during the campaign about the key issues and policies concerning the assigned electorate for showcasing on the ABC's website.
Community ForumsThe embedded student journalists would identify leaders for citizen-based deliberative forums to be held in each electorate, every week of the campaign. These forum leaders would be trained in basic technical and professional skills by the project. They would be tasked to collect and file content to the project website with group members commenting on key themes emerging from each forum. They would operate like self-reporting focus groups.
They would also be asked to identify one question they would like to put to each candidate in their electorate during community Q&A forums to be staged in the final week of the campaign.
These Q&A forums would be webcast and accommodate questions from the wider audience via Twitter. They would be moderated and reported on by the student journalists involved in the project, with the possibility of content also being fed to ABC.
Research Processes/OutcomesUC journalism academics, working with student research assistants from media studies and communication theory courses, would analyze the processes, outputs and impacts of the exercise and compare the coverage to the mainstream media's reporting of each electorate assigned. The results of this multi-faceted academic research (incorporating quantitative and qualitative methodologies) would then be published academically and in a range of popular, accessible media with a view to feeding outcomes back into the curriculum and future projects.
At this stage, Barrukka is just a simple on-paper-only attempt at enlivening and improving political journalism education in Australia. But I am about to return to the classroom after a long stint of maternity leave, with fresh eyes and renewed purpose -- and I will do my best to turn this idea into a reality. Meantime, watch on as Australian democracy undergoes renovation. You may be inspired too.
If you are interested in being involved as a partner or a sponsor in this proposed project, please email me.
Julie Posetti is an award winning journalist and journalism academic who lectures in radio and television reporting at the University of Canberra, Australia. She's been a national political correspondent, a regional news editor, a TV documentary reporter and presenter on radio and television with the Australian national broadcaster, the ABC. Her academic research centers on talk radio, public broadcasting, political reporting and broadcast coverage of Muslims post-9/11. She blogs at J-Scribe and you can follow her on Twitter.
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
Now that the celebrations and congratulations are in the past, the hard work of building Order in the Court 2.0 has begun.
The idea that received the endorsement of the Knight News Challenge is now being tested in the real world with formal meetings with officials from the Massachusetts court system. I'm happy to report that we have so far received overwhelming support and encouragement for this project.
Our first meeting took place at the Quincy District Court where we met with Judge Mark Coven, the first justice of the court, the clerk of the court, the state court's public information officer, the state court's chief information officer and the state's director of court operations.
Touring the Courthouse With Judge CovenJudge Coven set the tone of this meeting with his welcoming remarks and reinforced his enthusiasm for this project. He stressed its importance and how it was critical for the courts to have greater accessibility in order to build confidence in the judicial branch. He also made it clear that he wanted his courthouse to serve as a national model in determining the best practices for providing digital access to the public. After introductions, the judge provided us with a tour of the court.
After taking a few steps into the courthouse's lobby, the judge was approached by a young man who didn't look a day over 14 years old. He came to court that day to specifically thank the judge for his help in getting clean of drugs. It turns out the young man was in his late teens and had been in and out of court so many times that the judge knew him very well. He recently graduated from a drug treatment program the judge had sentenced him to in order to deal with a heroin addiction. It was easy to see the judge was touched by this man's special visit. Judge Coven took a father-like pride in the fact that he had offered this man a second chance.
Our tour continued through the busy courthouse with trips to the lock-up downstairs and meetings with court officers. I then spent the rest of the morning with the assistant court clerk who will be the day-to-day facilitator of this project. He too could not have been more enthusiastic. It was humbling to see that an idea that came out of the Knight News Challenge process was going to come to fruition and was going to have tangible support.
Transparency: Rewards and RisksSince that initial meeting at the courthouse there have been meetings with the chief information officer of the state courts, Craig Burlingame. Burlingame is one of the most highly respected people in his field. He had just returned from Australia where he was helping the national government improve its computer records processes. Burlingame is incredibly knowledgeable about the particular challenges of getting the court's data out to the public. He is aware of the rewards of transparency, but he is also helping me understand the risks.
Here's an example. One goal of Order in the Court 2.0 is to post the daily docket at Quincy District Court. The docket lists the names of each defendant and cases that are scheduled for the day. The docket is produced by the state's computer system, which is called MassCourts. The docket is sent to each court in a searchable PDF document. If Order in the Court 2.0 were to post the docket through its website (which is not yet under construction), data mining agencies would have easy access to the information it contains. This, understandably, is an issue for the court.
Burlingame explained that it could seriously impact victims of crimes coming forward if they thought it might affect future job prospects or housing, since landlords use these services. He acknowledged that the docket is a public document posted at the courthouse; but to ensure the public's safety he needs to come up with a way to provide the document in a non-searchable PDF, and to seek the input of the judge assigned to preserve the integrity of the court's digital records.
It was striking to hear how something that initially seemed simple could be so complicated and require further judicial review. It was a perfect example of how the lessons we learn from this project will make it easier for future efforts to build greater court transparency.
One final footnote to this post. During a phone call with Judge Coven to set up another meeting, he reminded me of our conversation in the lobby with the young man who had come to thank him. He told me that the man was back in custody, and his family had come forward to request that he be recommitted because he was back on heroin. You couldn't miss the sadness in the judge's voice.
Now that the celebrations and congratulations are in the past, the hard work of building Order in the Court 2.0 has begun.
The idea that received the endorsement of the Knight News Challenge is now being tested in the real world with formal meetings with officials from the Massachusetts court system. I'm happy to report that we have so far received overwhelming support and encouragement for this project.
Our first meeting took place at the Quincy District Court where we met with Judge Mark Coven, the first justice of the court, the clerk of the court, the state court's public information officer, the state court's chief information officer and the state's director of court operations.
Touring the Courthouse With Judge CovenJudge Coven set the tone of this meeting with his welcoming remarks and reinforced his enthusiasm for this project. He stressed its importance and how it was critical for the courts to have greater accessibility in order to build confidence in the judicial branch. He also made it clear that he wanted his courthouse to serve as a national model in determining the best practices for providing digital access to the public. After introductions, the judge provided us with a tour of the court.
After taking a few steps into the courthouse's lobby, the judge was approached by a young man who didn't look a day over 14 years old. He came to court that day to specifically thank the judge for his help in getting clean of drugs. It turns out the young man was in his late teens and had been in and out of court so many times that the judge knew him very well. He recently graduated from a drug treatment program the judge had sentenced him to in order to deal with a heroin addiction. It was easy to see the judge was touched by this man's special visit. Judge Coven took a father-like pride in the fact that he had offered this man a second chance.
Our tour continued through the busy courthouse with trips to the lock-up downstairs and meetings with court officers. I then spent the rest of the morning with the assistant court clerk who will be the day-to-day facilitator of this project. He too could not have been more enthusiastic. It was humbling to see that an idea that came out of the Knight News Challenge process was going to come to fruition and was going to have tangible support.
Transparency: Rewards and RisksSince that initial meeting at the courthouse there have been meetings with the chief information officer of the state courts, Craig Burlingame. Burlingame is one of the most highly respected people in his field. He had just returned from Australia where he was helping the national government improve its computer records processes. Burlingame is incredibly knowledgeable about the particular challenges of getting the court's data out to the public. He is aware of the rewards of transparency, but he is also helping me understand the risks.
Here's an example. One goal of Order in the Court 2.0 is to post the daily docket at Quincy District Court. The docket lists the names of each defendant and cases that are scheduled for the day. The docket is produced by the state's computer system, which is called MassCourts. The docket is sent to each court in a searchable PDF document. If Order in the Court 2.0 were to post the docket through its website (which is not yet under construction), data mining agencies would have easy access to the information it contains. This, understandably, is an issue for the court.
Burlingame explained that it could seriously impact victims of crimes coming forward if they thought it might affect future job prospects or housing, since landlords use these services. He acknowledged that the docket is a public document posted at the courthouse; but to ensure the public's safety he needs to come up with a way to provide the document in a non-searchable PDF, and to seek the input of the judge assigned to preserve the integrity of the court's digital records.
It was striking to hear how something that initially seemed simple could be so complicated and require further judicial review. It was a perfect example of how the lessons we learn from this project will make it easier for future efforts to build greater court transparency.
One final footnote to this post. During a phone call with Judge Coven to set up another meeting, he reminded me of our conversation in the lobby with the young man who had come to thank him. He told me that the man was back in custody, and his family had come forward to request that he be recommitted because he was back on heroin. You couldn't miss the sadness in the judge's voice.
Here is the BronxTalk debate between Sen. Pedro Espada’s Democratic challengers Gustavo Rivera and Daniel Padernacht. Thanks to the Bronx News Network for the link. Espada did not show for the debate and Rivera slammed him for it.
Nassau County District Attorney Kathleen Rice has changed her tune on seeking higher office if she were to complete her bid to become attorney general.
At the Citizens Union debate on July 21 I asked the candidates if they would pledge not to seek the governorship in their next two terms as attorney general, if they were elected. All of the candidates indicated that they would not run for governor except for Rice.
“I think that these kinds of pledges are all show. It is ridiculous to say to someone, ‘make a pledge now’ before you’ve even done the job youre running for,” she said at the time.
Today at a debate in Albany hosted by WAMC Rice had a different answer to the question. She said she does not have her “sights set on a higher office.”
“I just refused to engage in political gimmickry,” she said, apparently referring to my earlier question. She said she has “no other plans but to serve…as attorney general.”
Sen. Eric Schneiderman did not show for the debate. He and Rice did not attend debate the previous night in Rochester.
Looking back at the 2009 city elections, the city Campaign Finance Board is urging changes in laws governing how elections are paid for in the city. In particular, the board reiterates its call for the city to ban all campaign contributions by organizations. Although the board does not say so in so many words, this would forbid donations by labor unions, a move the City Council has rejected.
Overall the board, in its required report on last year’s campaigns, finds the city’s public financing of campaigns — and the rules about how those funds are provided — encouraged small donors and made the elections more competitive. It found many people opened their wallets to candidates who had never done so before and that most gave $175 or less. (Perhaps not coincidentally, the city only provides a full — six to one — match for the first $175 of a contribution made by a New Yorker.)
As indications of competitiveness, the report found in 37 of the 51 City Council districts, two or more candidates received public funds — up from 26 in 2005, the last City Council election year. And while only one incumbent was outspent by a challenger in 2005, last year seven challengers in the primary and five in the general election outspent the incumbent.
Primary Day last year saw five incumbents go down to defeat and a few more hang on only by the narrowest of threads. While that may not seem like much, it represented a sharp increase from 2005 when only one incumbent who sought re-election lost.
If the goal of campaign finance is to level the playing field and increase competitiveness, this could be seen as a success. But the board offers a number of recommendations for further changes.
The board notes in its report that is has long sought to ban all organizational contributions and that the city already forbids contributions by corporations, limited liability corporations and partnerships.
But some organizations can still give — and they do. In 2009, the report said, political committees (many affiliated with unions) and employee organizations donated more than $3.1million. On average, “organizations are able to make substantially larger contributions than individuals, which may represent attempts to gain influence,” the report says.
The report also raises concerns about so-called legal defense funds — money raised by candidates to help pay off Campaign Finance Board penalties. Earlier this year, Gotham Gazette’s Courtney Gross reported that at least three City Council members had such funds. In particular one — Annabel Palma – used money from labor unions to pay off fines arising from charges that her 2003 campaign had been too closely associated with a union..
In discussing such legal defense funds, the board report says, ” These contributions are yet another way for contributors to seek influence with a candidate. The board believes that all fundraising for the purpose of paying off debt arising from a political campaign should be fully disclosed, and should be subject to the same contribution limits and restrictions that apply during the election.”
The board also would like to see disclosure of so-called independent expenditures — money spent by a third party that, while it may help a particular candidate, was supposedly spent with that candidate’s involvement. Although the Supreme Court has ruled government cannot restrict such contributions, it has said it can require disclosure of them. The board also recommends making it more difficult for candidates running against very weak — often only token — opposition to get public funds.
While not surprisingly lauding the 20-year record of the Campaign Finance Program, the board does see difficult times ahead in an era of high spending, independently financed candidates and when, it notes, ” Courts have sought to tie the hands of campaign finance reformers across the nation.”
Here is a video of most of my presentation at the Networked Neighbourhoods event in London the other month. I start on the third minute. Unfortunately my FlipCam filled up so the rest of the even. Also see the blog recaps by Networked Neighbourhoods, and Kevin Harris. This was part of my UK trip in July.
Also, speaking of the UK, Networked Neighbourhoods is having an unconference on September 25th and CityCamp London is October 8-10. E-Democracy.org is a big supporter of CityCamp and host the ongoing online exchange. We invite those attending the London neighbourhoods online event to join their international peers on the similar Locals Online exchange.
Neighbors Online Presentation from E-Democracy.org on Vimeo.
Below are the slides from the Activate Conference which I adapted for the presentation above. Sorry about the abrupt end to the video. Want more? How about a 90 minute webinar reviewing the field? After I concluded with comments on our Inclusive Social Media efforts and Neighbors Online stats, the event went into discussion mode. It was a great event. Thank you Kevin and Hugh for making it happen.
Local Matters – Steven Clift's Activate Presentation View more presentations from Steven Clift.
For eight straight weeks, Lauper has had the #1 album on the Billboard charts but has flown under the radar. She is not again flying high on the popular music charts like she did in 1984. Her new album Memphis Blues has become a major hit on the Billboard Blues charts and has earned the respect of the blues community many of whom appear on the album, such as B.B. King, Johnny Lang, and Allen Toussaint. Taking the stage in a black slip, torn tights, high heels, and a white snakeskin coat with an eruption of lava red hair atop the ensemble, Lauper looked smashing as she thanked the audience for supporting the album."
(tags: music)
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
About this SeriesAfter the success last month with our Beyond Content Farms series, we decided to do another in-depth special series on MediaShift. This time the series will look at "Beyond J-School," chronicling how journalism education and training are changing, and how journalists need more than traditional j-school. They need multimedia skills, social media knowledge, community management chops, and must learn to collaborate with their audience. It's more than just learning the basics of journalism: They also need more background in business, entrepreneurship, technology and even programming. The entire series is linked below, and we'll be updating it throughout the next two weeks.
Check Out All the Posts> How to Teach Social Media in Journalism Schools by Alfred Hermida
> 5Across - Beyond J-School, a video roundtable show hosted by Mark Glaser
> Revamping J-Schools in Australia to Bring in Citizens Agenda by Julie Posetti
> How to Conquer Journalism Students' Fear of Technology by Jen Lee Reeves
> Business, Entrepreneurial Skills Come to Journalism School by Dorian Benkoil
> 4 Minute Roundup - Helping Journalism Students Get Tech Skills by Mark Glaser, with guest Jen Lee Reeves
> Spending the Summer in Journalist Law School by Nick Baumann
Coming soon:
Sept. 8: Dan Reimold: J-Students who Double as Online Entrepreneurs
Sept. 9: Craig Silverman: Programming Being Taught in J-Schools
Sept. 10: Davis Shaver: Innovations at New York City's J-Schools
What do you think about our series? How could it be improved? Are there other series you'd like to see MediaShift tackle in the coming months? We'd like to hear from you either in the comments below or via our Feedback form.
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
5Across is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
Just as traditional media has struggled with disruptive technology and the Internet, so too have the institutions that run journalism education. Most journalism schools and training programs are run by people whose careers were framed by print, broadcast and traditional PR, so how can students get the skills they need in the digital age? We convened a group of journalism educators, a trainer, a student and a J-school dropout to discuss how journalism education is shifting.
The discussion flowed from the changing curriculum to the student's mindset -- why do students still believe in the romance of a journalism career when there are so few jobs? How should educators teach new multimedia skills, as well as collaboration with other journalists and even the people formerly known as the audience? And finally, do students even need a journalism degree or can they learn it all themselves. We discuss this and a whole lot more on this spirited episode of 5Across, part of our two-week special on journalism education at MediaShift. Check it out!
5Across: Beyond J-School>>> Subscribe to 5Across video podcast <<<
>>> Subscribe to 5Across via iTunes <<<
Guest BiographiesAfter dropping out of journalism school in 1998, Lea Aschkenas wrote a story about her experiences for Salon. Her post-journalism school career includes a stint as a staff reporter, itinerant freelance writer, and author of the memoir, "Es Cuba: Life and Love on an Illegal Island" (Seal Press, 2006). She has also written for the Washington Post, Los Angeles Times, and San Francisco Chronicle. Currently, she works as a public librarian and teaches poetry-writing through the California Poets in the Schools program.
Kelly Goff is a senior in the journalism department at San Francisco State University, focusing on print and online journalism. She recently moved to San Francisco from Los Angeles, where she earned her associates in journalism from Pierce College. She is also an assistant events planner with the Journalism Association of Community Colleges.
Jon Funabiki is a professor of journalism at San Francisco State University and executive director of the Renaissance Journalism Center, which conducts projects to stimulate journalistic innovations that strengthen communities. Funabiki is the former deputy director of the Ford Foundation's Media, Arts & Culture Unit and was the founding director of San Francisco State University's Center for Integration and Improvement of Journalism. As a journalist with The San Diego Union, he specialized in U.S.-Asia political and economic affairs and reported from Japan, China, South Korea, the Philippines, Vietnam and other countries.
Lanita Pace-Hinton is the director of the Knight Digital Media Center, a
continuing education program based at the University of California, Berkeley Graduate School of Journalism. The Knight Digital Media Center offers free week-long workshops that provides journalists with hands-on training on multimedia storytelling and how to use web tools and social media. Lanita has served as director of career services
and industry outreach for the UC Berkeley journalism school. She advised students on skills development and how to prepare for their entry into the profession.
Full disclosure: The Knight Digital Media Center is a sponsor of PBS MediaShift.
Howard Rheingold is a prominent author, educator and speaker on technology and the Internet. He wrote best-sellers about virtual reality and virtual communities, and was the founding executive editor of HotWired. He also founded Electric Minds in the mid-'90s. Rheingold has taught as appointed lecturer at UC Berkeley and Stanford University and has spoken about the social, cultural, political and economic impacts of new technologies.
If you'd prefer to watch sections of the show rather than the entire show, I've broken them down by topic below.
Shifting the Curriculum The Student's Mindset The Good and Bad of Social Media Journalism School Necessary? Teaching Tech SkillsCredits
Mark Glaser, executive producer and host
Corbin Hiar, research assistant
Singeli Agnew, camera
Julie Caine, audio
Location: Vega Project & Kennerly Architecture office space in San Francisco
Special thanks to: PBS and the Knight Foundation
Music by AJ the DJ
*****
What do you think? Are you an educator or student with thoughts on how journalism should be taught? Do you think a degree in journalism is necessary to become a journalist? Share your thoughts in the comments below.
Mark Glaser is executive editor of MediaShift and Idea Lab. He also writes the bi-weekly OPA Intelligence Report email newsletter for the Online Publishers Association. He lives in San Francisco with his son Julian. You can follow him on Twitter @mediatwit.
5Across is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
We're pleased to announce that the Citizen Media Law Project at Harvard's Berkman Center for Internet & Society and the Center for Sustainable Journalism at Kennesaw State University are co‐hosting a conference on September 25, 2010 entitled "Media Law in the Digital Age: The Rules Have Changed, Have You?" in Atlanta, Georgia.
Designed for journalists, bloggers, and lawyers who work with media clients, the conference will be an opportunity to learn first‐hand the latest legal developments and to get your questions answered byexperts in the field.
The program will bring together legal practitioners, journalists, and academics to discuss the latest legal issues facing online media ventures. Topics will include: libel law, copyright law, newsgathering law, and advertising law, as well as the legal issues arising from news aggregation, managing online communities, and business law considerations for start‐up online media organizations. Small‐group workshops will focus on strategies for accessing government information and understanding legal terms in content licenses, freelancer contracts, and website terms of service and privacy policies.
If you need personalized legal assistance before or after the conference, contact the Online Media Legal Network, a legal referral network for independent online media administered by the Citizen Media Law Project at the Berkman Center.
Funding for the conference is being provided by the Harnisch Foundation, which has been a long‐time sponsor of the Center for Sustainable Journalism and recently provided a grant to the Berkman Center to support media law education.
Visit the conference website for more information on the conference agenda, registration and logistics.
Editors Note: This Inclusive Social Media update is from Julia Opoti (pictured on right), our Community Outreach and Information Leader focused on Cedar Riverside. In related news, we’ve been experimenting with Facebook advertising and now in addition to the 275 full forum members we now have close to 750 followers on Facebook (many younger residents).
When I first started as an outreach coordinator for e-democracy, I thought that my work was cut out for me. After all, I had been writing about the Cedar-Riverside community, particularly its large Somali population, for several years. It was not long before I realized that I would have to re-think my strategy. However, not all my efforts have been in vain. I will share here what I have found and over the next several months I will share how I navigate these challenges.
Over the last several months, I have met with community activists, health care advocates, university employees, students, and residents. I walked from store to store discovering a mall I did not know existed. I even attended neighborhood meetings, neighborhood safety meetings and community events. I spent time at the Brian Coyle Center where I got further acquainted with community organizers. Every Tuesday, I would buy my vegetables from the small farmers’ market These opportunities allowed me an almost-insider’s look into the community.
For the small business I quickly learned that many of the owners did not have an online presence neither did they have emails. In some instances, the store owners and their employees did not speak English making communication a challenge.
Still, I gathered emails where I could, but haven’t seen an increase in member’s posting new content or responding to forum topics. However, a quick glance at forum stats show that readership is steadily increasing. I also found that many of the community organizers are already registered on the forum, but only lurk. I sought to know why.
At an informal meeting with several Somali women I learned that the negative press and abrasive online comments on websites such as the Star Tribune newspaper have resulted in a complete distrust of non-Somali websites. One woman said that as a community organizer, her daily battles are constant, and she did not have the energy to constantly “defend her community.” While e-democracy forums are facilitated, and users are required to use their real names protecting members from such diatribe, these women are still hesitant to participate.
What about softer, cultural issues like explaining Ramadan, the Muslim holy month of fasting? Again, they spoke about online attack fatigue. As I look ahead to future postings and building trust it will be important to include topics that do not rile up controversy such as profiles of businesses and people in the community; and resources.
E-Democracy is a unique position. Unlike many organizations the forum doesn’t want anything from the community. Not in the literal sense anyway. Of course, for the vibrancy and the posterity of the forum, participation is key. A key factor is making sure that people understand the the forums diversity is only as rich as its member participation.
When Brian Noy posted on the forum about the low sales in the Brian Coyle Center’s farmers’ market, I met with him to see how he could best promote it. He was creative in his postings by featuring a weekly vegetarian recipe. However, the reality was that the people who needed to see it most were not accessing it. His best approach, it turned out, was speaking to community organizers housed at the Brian Coyle Center that I introduced him to that day who could in turn communicate to their different constituencies.
As I continue with my outreach efforts I am keen on developing strategies that would allow the community to trust this particular forum. For a community that is very oral with most information relayed through word of mouth and community gatherings; how does e-democracy fit in? For literate Somalis digital engagement is actually not an issue as there several popular forums (Hirraan, Somalia Online, Somali Life, SomaliNet) and social networking sites like Twitter and Facebook. However, how do we engage them in a wider issues forum like the e-democracy one? Considering digital inclusion, how does e-democracy make a case for communities with little or no access to the Internet?
PS. There are other communities of color, like immigrants of Oromo, Ethiopian, Eriterian, Korean and Mexican descent, in the Cedar Riverside Neighborhood that I will be profiling over the course of the month.
Kids at National Night Out at Riverside Plaza. E-Democracy.org recruited 15 new forum members that evening using paper sign-up sheets.
The following post comes to us from Sameer Bhuchar, who is helping Spot.Us from Austin.
It has been said a thousand times before: The landscape of the modern media is changing. With today's more complex, active Internet ecosystem, the accepted norms of journalism are constantly being rewritten or tossed out all together. The Internet has bypassed the once highly regarded norms of gatekeepers at a news desk, and it now seems to be challenging the long held model of objectivity in journalism.
If there is an underlying theme to Spot.Us it is the idea that we expect our community to tell us what is important in journalism,
rather than dictate it ourselves. With that in mind, several weeks ago,
thanks to a generous sponsorship from Clay Shirky,
we asked for your honest feedback about objectivity and journalism. We
let the 500 users who took the survey decide
where the sponsorship dollars should go. In other words, we handed over a
part of our budget to community members who let us figure out what the
ethos is around objectivity in journalism. Community-focused sponsorship for the win! (Try our newest CFS. Let us know about important story ideas in your region and fund a story on Spot.Us for free).
Survey Results
Is there a clear divide between those who support the traditional
idea of objectivity and those who take a different stance? Are there
exceptions to the standard? How should journalism work for you? Some
believe objectivity means reporting facts without bias, and that an
article must be balanced and include multiple points of view. To
many, objectivity in journalism is the most important standard of the
profession. It was once considered the glue of the business, the one aim
that let media consumers decide for themselves what was right and
wrong.
Increasingly, however, the idea of traditional objectivity is being challenged by this new, proactive age of media consumers. To those who challenge the ideal, it is an outdated standard that has crippled journalists from digging deep into stories.
Keep in mind the survey results are not scientific and, as the political leanings graph shows, there was perhaps a self-selecting audience (the Spot.Us community). Nonetheless, with 500 respondents there was a diverse set of answers.
First and foremost it is important to note that about 52 percent of the survey takers were female and 48 percent male.
Also, close to 60 percent of the respondents identified themselves as liberals,
with only 10.8 percent identifying as conservative. Close to 30 percent
said they were independents. This could be reflective of where Spot.Us'
traffic comes from (heavy in Los Angeles, San Francisco, Seattle and New York).
Responses to the question, "Is objectivity even possible?" show there are a large percentage of people with a changing idea about objectivity. Of the survey questions, perhaps this one and the responses associated with it were the most telling when it comes to attitudes towards objectivity. Only 13.5 percent (60 respondents) very clearly identified "objectivity" as being what journalism is all about.
This view point can best be explained through Spot.Us member Craig Gaines' extended response. "I define an objective piece as one that represents all viewpoints in a piece and allows readers to make up their minds about those viewpoints," Gaines said. "To do anything less is a disservice to, and disrespectful of, the reader."
A staggering 44.6 percent (199) people agreed with the answer, "Objectivity is possible but difficult. It separates wheat from chaff." In essence the answer implies that objectivity should be seen more as a quest for honest, factual reporting. Spot.Us member (and NewsTrust executive director) Fabrice Florin summed up this viewpoint well.
While objectivity is difficult to achieve, it is an important journalistic quality to strive for, particularly for factual news reporting, not for opinion pieces," Florin said. "For news reports, a neutral perspective helps present views from different sides without interjecting the author's personal opinions. Authors are welcome to post their own perspectives in their own opinion pieces, as long as they are clearly labeled as such. But journalists who want to serve society as neutral observers and referees should continue to report objectively on public issues they cover.
Of the respondents, 27.6 percent (123 people) chose the answer "transparency is the new objectivity," implying that it is the reporting of truth that is most important, rather than a detached account of a scene.
"I think that reporters ought to reveal their biases in each story as part of the narrative so as to partially disarm whatever criticism of bias they may receive," said member Paul Balcerak. "Doing so will provide a better service to the public and will create better journalism."
There were also 55 people who believed objectivity was impossible,
and 9 people went as far to answer that objectivity "is a crutch to prop
old media up."
This is all just the tip of the iceberg. Other questions sought to discover the community's view of how important objectivity is (always required, sometimes, never, etc.), and to help gauge the respondents' relationship to journalism (a professor or as an avid news reader, for example). We believe that in aggregate this survey provides unique insight into what people from the Spot.Us community want and expect from the media.
To drive the point home, we've included anecdotal responses from our insightful community members who gave us permission to publish their answers. (These were used to create the above Wordle.)
Perhaps what we can learn from all of this is that objectivity, while important as an ideal of fairness, should not be seen as a way of achieving "detached-ness," if you will. But heck, this blog post is by no means unbiased, so even that assumption may not be accurate, or apply to you personally. One thing the respondents did uniformly agree upon is that reporters should unabashedly seek truth. While pure objectivity may be impossible, being honest isn't.
Community Views
Below is a selection of comments from the wisest people we know -- our community. Here's what they had to say about objectivity:
"In journalism school I was very swayed by the 'Transparency IS the
new objectivity' school of thinking, and the notion that everyone has
bias and perspective, and so any attempt to avoid that is foolhardy.
From my insider perspective, my own biases and opinions seemed magnified
and huge. However, since I haven't been working as a journalist and
have been, instead, consuming local media (increasingly independent and
citizen/blog driven, as the local establishment journalism withers away)
I've longed for the ideal of objectivity while recognizing it might
never have been truly practiced. I've grown to strongly dislike the
strongly and biased opinionated citizen journalism I am now surrounded
by, because it so often willfully refuses to dig deeper and more broadly
and is so very proud of its 'perspective'. I am often left with a long
list of simple questions I think *I* would have asked just to get the
whole story." -- Saheli Datta
"I don't believe what we've traditionally defined as objectivity in the media is actually objectivity--it's more like perceived impartiality. I think that reporters ought to reveal their biases in each story as part of the narrative (writing in first-person would make the process a lot less awkward, by the way) so as to partially disarm whatever criticism of bias they may receive. Doing so will provide a better service to the public and will create better journalism." -- Paul Balcerak
"Objectivity was a marketing technique invented by the AP 100 + years ago. It's well suited for monopoly style newspaper production but shits the bed when media representation of similar events increases... Debunking objectivity as a concept is as easy as shooting ducks in duck hunt, but fact of the matter is that if *we didn't* believe in objectivity our lives would be intolerable.
"Therefore the question isn't about whether objectivity in journalism is possible, it's how does a person come to see media as objective? That's where things get interesting and where a lot is getting disrupted. The meaning of an event doesn't happen until it's represented and what we are seeing is an explosion in meaning at the sign of *any event*. See Stuart Hall, he's pre-Twitter but his points are just as valid." -- Cody Brown
"Transparency means more than understanding where the journalist's
bias lies; it means that the journalist or reporter does things like
crowdsource some questions, work in partnership with community
journalism initiatives already underway, blog about the progress on a
story and explain what the next steps are (unless it's a super-secret
undercover investigation), record interviews and give public access to
the full transcript as well as the audio file, etc. Transparency means
addressing reader concerns and input about pieces and continuing the
conversation after one story is published." -- Suzi Steffen
"A journalist's background certainly matters in how they interpret subjects, but the job is to look close, ask questions, and get the details right. More and more, unfortunately, it's also about checking out sources and making sure none of them are lying. With more and more resources dedicated to "spin" this part is important and often accounts for why a lot of people reject a good story as objective or biased - because they've been dished the spin in other platforms. But objectivity really is the name of the game." -- Lee van der Voo
"In most mainstream news reports I hear, including a good number on NPR, there's an annoying trend toward presenting one side and then the other, while completely evading the question of which side might be right! This is a perverted effect of the mania that journalism has for supposedly unbiased an objective reporting. Too often in the name of objectivity journalists avoid taking principled stands on anything; too often monied interests can distract the public's attention from their own dubious business practices by trotting out a voice of dissent rationalizing their stand -- which, of course, will get equal air-time." -- Anneke Toomey
"There is a saying somewhere: Objectivity is not possible, but fairness is. That is to say: are all sides, all points of view represented honestly and with the same weight? Ultimately, I'd say objectivity is a personal trait, fairness is a professional trait that pertains to our profession as journalists. Strive for fairness." -- Barbara Gref
"No journalist is truly objective, if that term is meant to mean someone who has no opinions about the subjects he or she covers. Subjectivity starts right from the point at which a journalist chooses a subject to cover and goes right on through to who is interviewed, what quotations are selected, how the headline is written, and on and on. But what makes journalism different from other practices with which it is sometimes confused, such as PR or politics, is that journalists are in the business of *independent* verification of fact." -- Robert McClure
"No one is truly unbiased or objective but that doesn't mean that a
good reporter doesn't look for the truth behind everyone's agenda.
Objectivity means not sitting on a story that would make someone look
bad just because you're invested in their success. I almost said
"Transparency is the new objectivity" only because it is the latest and
most fabulous word to throw around. Transparency only helps identify
lapses in objectivity, it doesn't replace it. As for transparency, it
certainly helps identify lapses in objectivity, but it doesn't replace
it." -- Amanda Hickman
"Objectivity often means portraying both sides of the story but without considering power & privilege, you can never get both sides of story. It would be like looking at African Americans & crime in inner cities without looking at the effects of institutional racism and how poverty/availability of drugs/housing blight/welfare policies etc contributes to crime. Journalism needs to put more emphasis on telling the stories of the underserved and marginalized and those most impacted the those who have power." -- Micky Duxbury
"No one is objective. The best we can do (instead of pretending to be
objective) is being transparent about our biases so readers are aware
and can judge our content as they feel is appropriate. That said, it
doesn't mean we should turn every article into a ranting, biased blog
post, or even take a side on an issue we're covering. We just need to
stop pretending true "Objectivism" exists." -- Lauren Rabaino
"While objectivity is difficult to achieve, it is an important journalistic quality to strive for, particularly for factual news reporting (not for opinion pieces). For news reports, a neutral perspective helps present views from different sides without interjecting the author's personal opinions. Authors are welcome to post their own perspectives in their own opinion pieces, as long as they are clearly labeled as such. But journalists who want to serve society as neutral observers and referees should continue to report objectively on public issues they cover." -- Fabrice Florin
"I find writing by people who disclose and discuss their
biases/backgrounds dramatically more compelling than sterile
I-refuse-to-take-sides-so-decide-for-yourself writing. I think it's
possible to explain and analyze both sides of a story and fulfill a
journalistic purpose without sitting on the fence." -- Katie Lohrenz
"Everyone has opinions, and we are all entitled to have them. Journalists are no different. I like it when a journalist tells me how he/she arrived at an opinion, and any part of his/her backstory that will help me to assess credibility. Transparency is certainly part of the picture. What isn't helpful is a journalist who simply reports the sound bite from one side and then gathers the sound bite from another side and calls it a story - without stopping to investigate whether the facts can back up either side." -- Laurie Pumper
"I don't think it is absolutely necessary to be objective, but if you aren't going to be objective, it is absolutely necessary to be honest about it." -- Luke Gies
"Objectivity should be the goal for journalism. Reporting all sides of the story without bias is ideal. Unfortunately we live in a very polarized climate. Shock value, knee jerk reactions and stubborn opinion rule the day. I really appreciate news sources that don't resort to playing to that audience." -- Marie Rafalko
"Basically, 'objectivity' in journalism began post WWII as a strategy to make news content more palatable to a broader advertiser base. That worked -- and it helped enable newspaper consolidation in many cities. But the strategy took on a life of its own -- and while it yielded some benefits, it's a fundamentally not credible premise. Journalism is created by people, and people are not objective. As media has become multidirectional, it's become ridiculous to try to ignore that reality. News organizations that choose a veneer of objectivity over the practice of transparency undermine their own credibility. The sad thing is, many news orgs cling to their veneer of objectivity because they think it builds credibility. They're eating their own dog food." -- Amy Gahran
"I chose my answer by eliminating the others. I know it's not always possible. It's really tough. But transparency is absolutely not an alternative to objectivity. Fox News is transparent. It's not good journalism. Saying transparency can replace objectivity basically says that journalism can be produced by interest groups, as long as they're honest about who they are. That's no good for anyone, except for the interest groups." -- Molly Samuel
"The U.S. journalism establishment has determined that they are
smarter than consumer sand therefore must talk down, water down,
simplify news stories. Their fear was that no one would read the paper.
Really.
"If all the facts were reported AND an effort was made to make media literacy an elementary school requirement we might have real journalism again in this country in a generation or so. Or promote and support online platforms that present facts and commentary separately. Then let traditional media fend for themselves." -- Todd O'Neill
"It's never possible, but always desirable. That is, complete objectivity is probably impossible, because we aren't always aware of our prejudices. But, it is what we should strive for, regardless. So, it is very important to attempt, but also to be aware that we may have blind spots, in order to avoid the arrogance of believing you are able to step completely out of your own biases." -- Rebecca Church
"To an extent, I agree with 'Transparency is the new objectivity,' but
I don't think it's sufficient. I think pursuing objectivity while being
transparent is crucial. Journalists should make every effort to escape
their biases, explore other perspectives, and challenge their
assumptions of what are and are not significant/authoritative voices,
but they shouldn't do so at the cost of reporting and storytelling.
However, they should acknowledge where they can where they are coming
from, what perspectives they might take into the discussion, and what
assumptions they are starting with so readers/audiences are able to make
an informed analysis of the journalist's credibility." -- Bill Lascher
"'Transparency is the new objectivity' is a fun riff, and it's close, but I think we (in the media business) grossly overstate the public's interest in our affiliations and conflicts." -- Ryan Sholin
"Science, going back to the Heisenberg principle in the 1920s has proven that observation has an effect on the thing observed. Also, you can play 'he said-she said' journalism, but one statement has to come before the other. Determining the order is the reporter or editor's subjective choice and determines the slant of the story." -- Kellia Ramares
"Objectivity is not rewarded by anyone, not the public and not the corporate new organizations. It's become like Don Quixote chasing windmills." -- Shari Brandhoy
"Objectivity is impossible. There is no such thing as a human or
institution without opinion. Therefore, it's best for us to know the
bias of the reporters. That said, a statement of bias doesn't give
license to lie or omit facts. Transparency is twofold:
• a statement of bias
• a commitment to releasing all information in an honest manner." -- Joey Baker
"Shirky has made me bias on the topic - journalist was a special class of citizen when you needed a press. Now every resident has a responsibility to be a journalist. Who is going to write about neighborhoods - when crime is not the topic? Newspapers and other media outlets have always done a poor job covering my home. So who does that responsibility fall to - someone with a stake in the future of that neighborhood. And while I want accuracy and independence, I want the reporter, journalist, or citizen to offer their educated take on what this all means for the future of the area." -- Eddie North-Hager
"The very definition of dialectic is pastiche. How can anyone be objective while still being informed? Transparency at least offers honesty and a path for the reader to follow." -- Clarisa Morales Roberts
"I define an objective piece as one that represents all viewpoints in a piece and allows readers to make up their minds about those viewpoints. To do anything less is a disservice to, and disrespectful of, the reader." -- Craig Gaines
"There is fairness but not objectivity. Everyone decides where to look, what facts to portray, how to frame what they're seeing. Even a pointed camera is not objective -- where the lens is pointed, how the zoom is set ... these all determine what's seen and how." -- Dorian Benkoil
"Debating object/subject is an endless philosophical waste of time. Facts, and trends, data, information, systems analysis all are much more relevant to discourse around solving the complex problems we face today and in the future." -- Stephen Antonaros
"I believe that objectivity is the single most dangerous goal journalism can work towards. It is impossible for a human being to produce a genuinely non-biased piece of writing, but it is simple for a writer to mimic the tone of authority that a member of society is educated to frame as truth. Journalism should strive for transparency - not as a new objectivity, but as a drastically different and more democratic concept of media's responsibility to present and portray information." -- Rebecca Glaser
"Objectivity is impossible, it's an illusion and a myth often used to maintain flat, two-dimensional reporting that implies there are simply "two sides." What's far more important is accuracy, vigorous inquiry and story dimension--looking for texture and layers of debate, and letting the facts tell the story; two 'sides' are not 'equal' if one is heavily fact-based and the other is just opinion." -- Christopher Cook
The following post comes to us from Sameer Bhuchar, who is helping Spot.Us from Austin.
It has been said a thousand times before: The landscape of the modern media is changing. With today's more complex, active Internet ecosystem, the accepted norms of journalism are constantly being rewritten or tossed out all together. The Internet has bypassed the once highly regarded norms of gatekeepers at a news desk, and it now seems to be challenging the long held model of objectivity in journalism.
If there is an underlying theme to Spot.Us it is the idea that we expect our community to tell us what is important in journalism,
rather than dictate it ourselves. With that in mind, several weeks ago,
thanks to a generous sponsorship from Clay Shirky,
we asked for your honest feedback about objectivity and journalism. We
let the 500 users who took the survey decide
where the sponsorship dollars should go. In other words, we handed over a
part of our budget to community members who let us figure out what the
ethos is around objectivity in journalism. Community-focused sponsorship for the win! (Try our newest CFS. Let us know about important story ideas in your region and fund a story on Spot.Us for free).
Survey Results
Is there a clear divide between those who support the traditional
idea of objectivity and those who take a different stance? Are there
exceptions to the standard? How should journalism work for you? Some
believe objectivity means reporting facts without bias, and that an
article must be balanced and include multiple points of view. To
many, objectivity in journalism is the most important standard of the
profession. It was once considered the glue of the business, the one aim
that let media consumers decide for themselves what was right and
wrong.
Increasingly, however, the idea of traditional objectivity is being challenged by this new, proactive age of media consumers. To those who challenge the ideal, it is an outdated standard that has crippled journalists from digging deep into stories.
Keep in mind the survey results are not scientific and, as the political leanings graph shows, there was perhaps a self-selecting audience (the Spot.Us community). Nonetheless, with 500 respondents there was a diverse set of answers.
First and foremost it is important to note that about 52 percent of the survey takers were female and 48 percent male.
Also, close to 60 percent of the respondents identified themselves as liberals,
with only 10.8 percent identifying as conservative. Close to 30 percent
said they were independents. This could be reflective of where Spot.Us'
traffic comes from (heavy in Los Angeles, San Francisco, Seattle and New York).
Responses to the question, "Is objectivity even possible?" show there are a large percentage of people with a changing idea about objectivity. Of the survey questions, perhaps this one and the responses associated with it were the most telling when it comes to attitudes towards objectivity. Only 13.5 percent (60 respondents) very clearly identified "objectivity" as being what journalism is all about.
This view point can best be explained through Spot.Us member Craig Gaines' extended response. "I define an objective piece as one that represents all viewpoints in a piece and allows readers to make up their minds about those viewpoints," Gaines said. "To do anything less is a disservice to, and disrespectful of, the reader."
A staggering 44.6 percent (199) people agreed with the answer, "Objectivity is possible but difficult. It separates wheat from chaff." In essence the answer implies that objectivity should be seen more as a quest for honest, factual reporting. Spot.Us member (and NewsTrust executive director) Fabrice Florin summed up this viewpoint well.
While objectivity is difficult to achieve, it is an important journalistic quality to strive for, particularly for factual news reporting, not for opinion pieces," Florin said. "For news reports, a neutral perspective helps present views from different sides without interjecting the author's personal opinions. Authors are welcome to post their own perspectives in their own opinion pieces, as long as they are clearly labeled as such. But journalists who want to serve society as neutral observers and referees should continue to report objectively on public issues they cover.
Of the respondents, 27.6 percent (123 people) chose the answer "transparency is the new objectivity," implying that it is the reporting of truth that is most important, rather than a detached account of a scene.
"I think that reporters ought to reveal their biases in each story as part of the narrative so as to partially disarm whatever criticism of bias they may receive," said member Paul Balcerak. "Doing so will provide a better service to the public and will create better journalism."
There were also 55 people who believed objectivity was impossible,
and 9 people went as far to answer that objectivity "is a crutch to prop
old media up."
This is all just the tip of the iceberg. Other questions sought to discover the community's view of how important objectivity is (always required, sometimes, never, etc.), and to help gauge the respondents' relationship to journalism (a professor or as an avid news reader, for example). We believe that in aggregate this survey provides unique insight into what people from the Spot.Us community want and expect from the media.
To drive the point home, we've included anecdotal responses from our insightful community members who gave us permission to publish their answers. (These were used to create the above Wordle.)
Perhaps what we can learn from all of this is that objectivity, while important as an ideal of fairness, should not be seen as a way of achieving "detached-ness," if you will. But heck, this blog post is by no means unbiased, so even that assumption may not be accurate, or apply to you personally. One thing the respondents did uniformly agree upon is that reporters should unabashedly seek truth. While pure objectivity may be impossible, being honest isn't.
Community Views
Below is a selection of comments from the wisest people we know -- our community. Here's what they had to say about objectivity:
"In journalism school I was very swayed by the 'Transparency IS the
new objectivity' school of thinking, and the notion that everyone has
bias and perspective, and so any attempt to avoid that is foolhardy.
From my insider perspective, my own biases and opinions seemed magnified
and huge. However, since I haven't been working as a journalist and
have been, instead, consuming local media (increasingly independent and
citizen/blog driven, as the local establishment journalism withers away)
I've longed for the ideal of objectivity while recognizing it might
never have been truly practiced. I've grown to strongly dislike the
strongly and biased opinionated citizen journalism I am now surrounded
by, because it so often willfully refuses to dig deeper and more broadly
and is so very proud of its 'perspective'. I am often left with a long
list of simple questions I think *I* would have asked just to get the
whole story." -- Saheli Datta
"I don't believe what we've traditionally defined as objectivity in the media is actually objectivity--it's more like perceived impartiality. I think that reporters ought to reveal their biases in each story as part of the narrative (writing in first-person would make the process a lot less awkward, by the way) so as to partially disarm whatever criticism of bias they may receive. Doing so will provide a better service to the public and will create better journalism." -- Paul Balcerak
"Objectivity was a marketing technique invented by the AP 100 + years ago. It's well suited for monopoly style newspaper production but shits the bed when media representation of similar events increases... Debunking objectivity as a concept is as easy as shooting ducks in duck hunt, but fact of the matter is that if *we didn't* believe in objectivity our lives would be intolerable.
"Therefore the question isn't about whether objectivity in journalism is possible, it's how does a person come to see media as objective? That's where things get interesting and where a lot is getting disrupted. The meaning of an event doesn't happen until it's represented and what we are seeing is an explosion in meaning at the sign of *any event*. See Stuart Hall, he's pre-Twitter but his points are just as valid." -- Cody Brown
"Transparency means more than understanding where the journalist's
bias lies; it means that the journalist or reporter does things like
crowdsource some questions, work in partnership with community
journalism initiatives already underway, blog about the progress on a
story and explain what the next steps are (unless it's a super-secret
undercover investigation), record interviews and give public access to
the full transcript as well as the audio file, etc. Transparency means
addressing reader concerns and input about pieces and continuing the
conversation after one story is published." -- Suzi Steffen
"A journalist's background certainly matters in how they interpret subjects, but the job is to look close, ask questions, and get the details right. More and more, unfortunately, it's also about checking out sources and making sure none of them are lying. With more and more resources dedicated to "spin" this part is important and often accounts for why a lot of people reject a good story as objective or biased - because they've been dished the spin in other platforms. But objectivity really is the name of the game." -- Lee van der Voo
"In most mainstream news reports I hear, including a good number on NPR, there's an annoying trend toward presenting one side and then the other, while completely evading the question of which side might be right! This is a perverted effect of the mania that journalism has for supposedly unbiased an objective reporting. Too often in the name of objectivity journalists avoid taking principled stands on anything; too often monied interests can distract the public's attention from their own dubious business practices by trotting out a voice of dissent rationalizing their stand -- which, of course, will get equal air-time." -- Anneke Toomey
"There is a saying somewhere: Objectivity is not possible, but fairness is. That is to say: are all sides, all points of view represented honestly and with the same weight? Ultimately, I'd say objectivity is a personal trait, fairness is a professional trait that pertains to our profession as journalists. Strive for fairness." -- Barbara Gref
"No journalist is truly objective, if that term is meant to mean someone who has no opinions about the subjects he or she covers. Subjectivity starts right from the point at which a journalist chooses a subject to cover and goes right on through to who is interviewed, what quotations are selected, how the headline is written, and on and on. But what makes journalism different from other practices with which it is sometimes confused, such as PR or politics, is that journalists are in the business of *independent* verification of fact." -- Robert McClure
"No one is truly unbiased or objective but that doesn't mean that a
good reporter doesn't look for the truth behind everyone's agenda.
Objectivity means not sitting on a story that would make someone look
bad just because you're invested in their success. I almost said
"Transparency is the new objectivity" only because it is the latest and
most fabulous word to throw around. Transparency only helps identify
lapses in objectivity, it doesn't replace it. As for transparency, it
certainly helps identify lapses in objectivity, but it doesn't replace
it." -- Amanda Hickman
"Objectivity often means portraying both sides of the story but without considering power & privilege, you can never get both sides of story. It would be like looking at African Americans & crime in inner cities without looking at the effects of institutional racism and how poverty/availability of drugs/housing blight/welfare policies etc contributes to crime. Journalism needs to put more emphasis on telling the stories of the underserved and marginalized and those most impacted the those who have power." -- Micky Duxbury
"No one is objective. The best we can do (instead of pretending to be
objective) is being transparent about our biases so readers are aware
and can judge our content as they feel is appropriate. That said, it
doesn't mean we should turn every article into a ranting, biased blog
post, or even take a side on an issue we're covering. We just need to
stop pretending true "Objectivism" exists." -- Lauren Rabaino
"While objectivity is difficult to achieve, it is an important journalistic quality to strive for, particularly for factual news reporting (not for opinion pieces). For news reports, a neutral perspective helps present views from different sides without interjecting the author's personal opinions. Authors are welcome to post their own perspectives in their own opinion pieces, as long as they are clearly labeled as such. But journalists who want to serve society as neutral observers and referees should continue to report objectively on public issues they cover." -- Fabrice Florin
"I find writing by people who disclose and discuss their
biases/backgrounds dramatically more compelling than sterile
I-refuse-to-take-sides-so-decide-for-yourself writing. I think it's
possible to explain and analyze both sides of a story and fulfill a
journalistic purpose without sitting on the fence." -- Katie Lohrenz
"Everyone has opinions, and we are all entitled to have them. Journalists are no different. I like it when a journalist tells me how he/she arrived at an opinion, and any part of his/her backstory that will help me to assess credibility. Transparency is certainly part of the picture. What isn't helpful is a journalist who simply reports the sound bite from one side and then gathers the sound bite from another side and calls it a story - without stopping to investigate whether the facts can back up either side." -- Laurie Pumper
"I don't think it is absolutely necessary to be objective, but if you aren't going to be objective, it is absolutely necessary to be honest about it." -- Luke Gies
"Objectivity should be the goal for journalism. Reporting all sides of the story without bias is ideal. Unfortunately we live in a very polarized climate. Shock value, knee jerk reactions and stubborn opinion rule the day. I really appreciate news sources that don't resort to playing to that audience." -- Marie Rafalko
"Basically, 'objectivity' in journalism began post WWII as a strategy to make news content more palatable to a broader advertiser base. That worked -- and it helped enable newspaper consolidation in many cities. But the strategy took on a life of its own -- and while it yielded some benefits, it's a fundamentally not credible premise. Journalism is created by people, and people are not objective. As media has become multidirectional, it's become ridiculous to try to ignore that reality. News organizations that choose a veneer of objectivity over the practice of transparency undermine their own credibility. The sad thing is, many news orgs cling to their veneer of objectivity because they think it builds credibility. They're eating their own dog food." -- Amy Gahran
"I chose my answer by eliminating the others. I know it's not always possible. It's really tough. But transparency is absolutely not an alternative to objectivity. Fox News is transparent. It's not good journalism. Saying transparency can replace objectivity basically says that journalism can be produced by interest groups, as long as they're honest about who they are. That's no good for anyone, except for the interest groups." -- Molly Samuel
"The U.S. journalism establishment has determined that they are
smarter than consumer sand therefore must talk down, water down,
simplify news stories. Their fear was that no one would read the paper.
Really.
"If all the facts were reported AND an effort was made to make media literacy an elementary school requirement we might have real journalism again in this country in a generation or so. Or promote and support online platforms that present facts and commentary separately. Then let traditional media fend for themselves." -- Todd O'Neill
"It's never possible, but always desirable. That is, complete objectivity is probably impossible, because we aren't always aware of our prejudices. But, it is what we should strive for, regardless. So, it is very important to attempt, but also to be aware that we may have blind spots, in order to avoid the arrogance of believing you are able to step completely out of your own biases." -- Rebecca Church
"To an extent, I agree with 'Transparency is the new objectivity,' but
I don't think it's sufficient. I think pursuing objectivity while being
transparent is crucial. Journalists should make every effort to escape
their biases, explore other perspectives, and challenge their
assumptions of what are and are not significant/authoritative voices,
but they shouldn't do so at the cost of reporting and storytelling.
However, they should acknowledge where they can where they are coming
from, what perspectives they might take into the discussion, and what
assumptions they are starting with so readers/audiences are able to make
an informed analysis of the journalist's credibility." -- Bill Lascher
"'Transparency is the new objectivity' is a fun riff, and it's close, but I think we (in the media business) grossly overstate the public's interest in our affiliations and conflicts." -- Ryan Sholin
"Science, going back to the Heisenberg principle in the 1920s has proven that observation has an effect on the thing observed. Also, you can play 'he said-she said' journalism, but one statement has to come before the other. Determining the order is the reporter or editor's subjective choice and determines the slant of the story." -- Kellia Ramares
"Objectivity is not rewarded by anyone, not the public and not the corporate new organizations. It's become like Don Quixote chasing windmills." -- Shari Brandhoy
"Objectivity is impossible. There is no such thing as a human or
institution without opinion. Therefore, it's best for us to know the
bias of the reporters. That said, a statement of bias doesn't give
license to lie or omit facts. Transparency is twofold:
• a statement of bias
• a commitment to releasing all information in an honest manner." -- Joey Baker
"Shirky has made me bias on the topic - journalist was a special class of citizen when you needed a press. Now every resident has a responsibility to be a journalist. Who is going to write about neighborhoods - when crime is not the topic? Newspapers and other media outlets have always done a poor job covering my home. So who does that responsibility fall to - someone with a stake in the future of that neighborhood. And while I want accuracy and independence, I want the reporter, journalist, or citizen to offer their educated take on what this all means for the future of the area." -- Eddie North-Hager
"The very definition of dialectic is pastiche. How can anyone be objective while still being informed? Transparency at least offers honesty and a path for the reader to follow." -- Clarisa Morales Roberts
"I define an objective piece as one that represents all viewpoints in a piece and allows readers to make up their minds about those viewpoints. To do anything less is a disservice to, and disrespectful of, the reader." -- Craig Gaines
"There is fairness but not objectivity. Everyone decides where to look, what facts to portray, how to frame what they're seeing. Even a pointed camera is not objective -- where the lens is pointed, how the zoom is set ... these all determine what's seen and how." -- Dorian Benkoil
"Debating object/subject is an endless philosophical waste of time. Facts, and trends, data, information, systems analysis all are much more relevant to discourse around solving the complex problems we face today and in the future." -- Stephen Antonaros
"I believe that objectivity is the single most dangerous goal journalism can work towards. It is impossible for a human being to produce a genuinely non-biased piece of writing, but it is simple for a writer to mimic the tone of authority that a member of society is educated to frame as truth. Journalism should strive for transparency - not as a new objectivity, but as a drastically different and more democratic concept of media's responsibility to present and portray information." -- Rebecca Glaser
"Objectivity is impossible, it's an illusion and a myth often used to maintain flat, two-dimensional reporting that implies there are simply "two sides." What's far more important is accuracy, vigorous inquiry and story dimension--looking for texture and layers of debate, and letting the facts tell the story; two 'sides' are not 'equal' if one is heavily fact-based and the other is just opinion." -- Christopher Cook
"OpenBlock is an open source software initiative to bring hyper-local news and data capabilities to news organizations of all sizes.
"OpenBlock builds upon the source code originally developed for EveryBlock.com, and is supported by the John S. and James L. Knight Foundation."
(tags: local hyperlocal news datacasting data+visualization development open-source)"Today, CMLP releases a white paper entitled "The Rise of the News Aggregator: Legal Implications and Best Practices" that attempts to answer that question, and to provide news aggregators with some "best practices" for making use of third-party content."
(tags: aggregation law news+biz content-rights analysis)The Verizon LTE network may go live in November, but the carrier has indicated the first LTE-capable smartphone won’t appear on the network until next year. Samsung has stated that MetroPCS will make the Samsung Craft phone available in September alongside the launch of the LTE network. The Craft is thought to be a smartphone with sliding QWERTY keyboard, and steps down to CDMA when LTE is not available.
(tags: carriers LTE network handsets)A few general practices for optimizing your site are:
* Keep your content brief
* Use brief, custom titles
* For mobile stats, check out MMetrics.com
* Mobile sites need to be as simple as possible to ensure compatibility among all mobile browser software."
Gustavo Rivera, the man challenging Sen. Pedro Espada for his senate seat, is steaming mad that Espada finked out on a BronxTalk debate that took place at 9 p.m. today.
Here is the statement from Rivera’s camp:
Gustavo Rivera, candidate for the 33rd Senate District issued the following statement on Pedro Espada’s failure to attend tonight’s Bronx Talk debate:
“In two short years, scandal-ridden Pedro Espada has betrayed his fellow Democrats, taken money from slumlords to block tenants’ rights laws, and stands accused of stealing millions from Bronx health clinics. He has even stooped to challenging constituents to fistfights rather than talk to them.
Our community has lots of questions for Espada, and tonight we were supposed to get some answers. But instead of directly addressing his own constituents, Espada has let us down again. Espada declared he would debate me anytime, anywhere. But when the chance came, Espada decided to cut and run.
Espada can run from tonight’s debate, but he can’t run from the people of the Northwest Bronx. On September 14th, we will have a chance to make change and elect a Senator who put our community first.”
As anyone who has been following the debate regarding the "future of journalism" knows, there have been a lot of ink (and bytes) spilled arguing over the role news aggregators are playing in the "decline" of traditional journalistic models. Rupert Murdoch has labeled the practice of news aggregation by entities like Google News "theft," and a professor from the Wharton Business School recently called on lawmakers to amend the copyright laws to prevent aggregators from posting any portion of news stories for a full 24 hours after their initial publication. Even the FTC has gotten in on the act, listing "Additional Intellectual Property Rights to Support Claims against News Aggregators" as the first policy proposal in the Staff Discussion Draft recently released in connection with its workshop series on "How Will Journalism Survive the Internet Age?" (To which Google had a thoughtful reply.)
But for all of the heated rhetoric blaming news aggregators for the decline of journalism, the fall of civilization and male pattern baldness, many are still left asking the question: are news aggregators violating current law?
Today, CMLP releases a white paper entitled "The Rise of the News Aggregator: Legal Implications and Best Practices" that attempts to answer that question by examining the hot news misappropriation and copyright infringement claims that are often asserted against aggregators, and to provide news aggregators with some "best practices" for making use of third-party content.
A hearty thanks goes out to the people that helped make this paper possible: Justin Silverman, for invaluable research assistance; David Ardia and Sam Bayard, for reading and critiquing numerous drafts; and the speakers from the "Saving Journalism from Itself? Hot News, Copyright Fair Use and News Aggregation" panel at our spring conference, for helping to frame and crystalize many of the issues.
You can download the white paper here.
As predicted, the special election to replace the late Thomas White on the City Council was called by Mayor Michael Bloomberg today for November 2.
Here is the release from the mayor’s office.
Mayor Michael R. Bloomberg today announced that a special non-partisan election will be held in the 28th Council District on November 2nd, the date of the regularly scheduled general election, to fill the vacancy created by the passing of Council Member Thomas White, Jr. Pursuant to the City Charter, the nomination of candidates in the election will be by independent nominating petition, rather than through a party primary.
The newly elected Council Member will serve until December 31, 2011. A second election to fill the remainder of the term will be held on Election Day in November 2011.
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
Editor's Note: This is the first in our special series at MediaShift, Beyond J-School where we will take an in-depth look at the state of journalism education and training in the digital age. Look out for more articles all this week and next.
Social media is such a new phenomenon that it is easy for someone to claim to be an expert in the subject. A search on Twitter throws up all sorts of people claiming to be social media gurus. But at journalism schools, professors are working out how to teach social media to ensure that graduating students are proficient, if not expert, in this new addition to the curriculum.
Students use social media in their daily lives, with Facebook an almost permanent fixture on the computer screen. Yet they tend not to think about social media as part of their professional toolkit as journalists.
If anything, anecdotal evidence suggests that students are resistant to adopting social media, seeing it as a personal activity, rather than as part of their work as a journalist. The pressure is on educators to demonstrate the professional value of social media.
The first step is working out what we mean by social media. After all, there has also been a social aspect to media, whether it was people discussing last night's TV in the office or clipping a newspaper article to send to a friend. But there is something new about services such as Facebook, Flickr and Twitter that let people connect, create, share and mash-up media.
European researchers Andreas Kaplan and Michael Haenlein define social media as "a group of Internet-based applications that build on the ideological and technological foundations of Web 2.0, and that allow the creation and exchange of user-generated content."
In other words, digital technologies that empower users to interact with each other, and participate and collaborate in the making of media, rather than just consuming media.
Clearly there is more to social media in the classroom than technology. Central to teaching social media is providing an understanding of how these digital tools affect the way students actually do journalism. The issue for many journalism schools is incorporating social media into an established and packed curriculum, within an academic environment where the pace of change is slow.
Lessons in best practicesThe question of how to teach social media in a way that enhances journalism reverberated at a meeting of hundreds of journalism educators from across North America. The annual conference of the Association for Education in Journalism and Mass Communication (AEJMC) in Denver provided a platform to discuss ideas on social media in the classroom. In a sign of the growing recognition of social media, the AEJMC even organized a competition for educators to share some of their best practices for incorporating social media into the classroom. (Read MediaShift's previous coverage of the AEJMC conference here.)

One idea mentioned by several speakers at the AEJMC conference was the value of incorporating social media into beat reporting. There are various ways that this can be done. Students can use Twitter to monitor the community chatter on issues in their beats through hashtags. They can also identify and follow key people connected to their beat.
But students also need to understand how to assess the stream of information on social media. Real-time services such as Twitter have established themselves as primary sources for breaking news, so it is important to teach students to critically measure and check the validity of information.
Social media is one way of introducing students to the notion of journalism as a conversation. The key lesson here is that these tools are not just another channel to distribute the finished story. Social media can help journalists reach out to audiences, seeking ideas for stories and fresh perspectives on stories they are working on.
One of the challenges here is teaching the different norms and practices on different social media services. For example, just posting a message seeking information is frowned upon. Instead, students are encouraged to be active on social media, showing they are contributing to the conversation rather than just taking.
Reputation ManagementSocial media blurs the line between the personal and the professional, so another important lesson is how to build and manage your online identity. Serena Carpenter at the Cronkite School at Arizona State University has students use Google themselves to research their online identity. She has found students are encouraged to adopt social media when they see themselves appear high up on Google.
In a variation of this, I have students Google each other to find out something they didn't know about their peer. The aim of the exercise is to make students aware of how future employers might see them.
The next stage is teaching students how to manage their reputation and establish their credibility. Prof. Carpenter has students complete their bio on numerous sites such as LinkedIn and Google Profile using the same photo, credentials and web links.
Social media has also been used for student-centered learning, for example, to educate students about the strengths and weaknesses of online collaboration. Bob Britten of West Virginia University used Google Maps for students to work together to map retirement homes in the area.
Rather than lecture students on the credibility of Wikipedia, Gary Ritzenthaler, a PhD student at the University of Florida, created a wiki for students to collaborate on study notes for an upcoming test. By participating, the students learned about collaborative writing but also became aware of questions about the credibility of content produced by others.
Thinking About Social MediaPracticing social media is not enough in an academic environment. There has to be a place for student reflection on what they have learned, explaining their understanding of social media. Students should have set out their goals for the use of social media and demonstrate they can assess the most appropriate platforms and services.
Teaching social media is more than showing students the mechanics of Twitter. Rather, they should learn how to build a network of relevant followers and how to interact with them to be a better journalist.
In the classroom, we need to stress that social media technologies do not just offer journalists new ways of doing old things. They offer the potential to explore new ways of telling stories, of collaborating and connecting with audiences, of rethinking how we do journalism.
Photo of AEJMC panel by Hunter Stevens via AEJMC News
Alfred Hermida is an online news pioneer and journalism educator. He is an assistant professor at the Graduate School of Journalism, the University of British Columbia, where he leads the integrated journalism program. He was a founding news editor of the BBC News website. He blogs at Reportr.net.
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
The devastating floods in Pakistan have been covered by trained reporters and mainstream media outlets around the world. Citizens, often on the front lines of the flood, have also been contributing thousands of reports though mobile phones, in part enabled by the citizen journalism service SeenReport.com.
SeenReport (a name derived from "see 'n report") is a citizen journalism service through which users can submit photos, videos, and text accounts of news as it is happening via SMS, MMS, or email. SeenReport won a 2010 mBillionth award, a first-ever contest which recognizes mobile content in South Asia. (This YouTube video explains more about the service.)
The SeenReport platform is designed to augment stories on online news sites. As a result, it has been purchased and customized by other media organizations in Pakistan, which helps to both promote citizen journalism in the country and to create a revenue stream for SeenReport.
MobileActive.org talked with Sharjeel Qureshi, a founder of the service, to learn more about it.
How SeenReport WorksA citizen reporter captures an event on a mobile phone and sends the content to SeenReport. There is no manual intervention at this stage -- the content is automatically published on the SeenReport website to better ensure real-time reports which augment larger ongoing events. Further, citizen reporters can register personal information on the site after submitting material.
The system accepts content via SMS, MMS, and email. If images or photos are sent, some basic text is required as far as description and location. The SeenReport platform is intelligent enough to detect this text and suggest related content and news stories. So, if several citizen reporters are submitting reports from the same event on their mobiles -- the floods, for instance -- the system will make a single thread from the incoming reports.
Some users create detailed online profiles. One freelance journalist, for example, includes his picture, email address, phone number, professional membership affiliation, and has established a subdomain on the SeenReport site with tabs for all of his uploaded content. Qureshi refers to it as a version of LinkedIn for freelance journalists. Others can post anonymously if they choose and are not required to create complete profiles.
The service has been integrated with social network sites so that when stories are published on the website, they are automatically posted on Twitter and Facebook for SeenReport. If a citizen journalist registers personal social media accounts, their reports will be automatically posted in those locations, too.
In general, mobile citizen reports open the door to spam, offensive content, and potentially non-newsworthy posts. SeenReport deals with this through a self-policing or "social censoring" system. Whenever content is posted, readers can comment on it, rate it, and flag it if they find it offensive. SeenReport administrators then remove the flagged content. This topic has been an ongoing discussion for the group behind SeenReport: the idea of how news stories are authenticated, how best to integrate citizen journalism into mainstream media, and what is good journalism.
A Strong Initial BoostQureshi and his team began working on the SeenReport platform in 2007, at a time when there was a media blackout in Pakistan. Heavy censorship was imposed on media organizations. The Internet was the only free medium of information, Qureshi said. During this time, the mobile market in Pakistan had proliferated and "we thought it would be a great idea to empower people to report news right from the cell phone and broadcast to the world in real-time," he said.
When the site was launched in April 2008, it came on the heels of Pakistan's Long March, the social unrest following firings of the judiciary. During this time, media coverage was heavily censored. SeenReport, Qureshi said, provided an alternative medium to cover the scale of the event and enable citizens at home to witness the historical moment.
SeenReport allows every mobile user in the crowd to become a reporter. In terms of the Long March, SMS reports provided minute-by-minute and mile-by-mile updates from eyewitnesses. The role of SeenReport in the march was a boost to the fledgling service and was covered by many international news outlets, including Global Voices, the BBC, and CIO Pakistan.
More Than a Single People Powered News SiteThe SeenReport software, which is cloud-based open source technology, was created in-house by a small team of engineers. SeenReport also sells this software-as-a-service to other media organizations interested in developing their own citizen journalism initiatives. This helps to generate income: The monthly recurring license fee model for adopters is the most significant source of revenue for the "modestly funded start-up," Qureshi said.
SeenReport was designed in such a way that it can be adapted and customized by other users. Several news and media sites have purchased the platform, including Samaa, GeoDost, Aaj, and PlayTv. The first three use the technology for citizen journalism purposes while PlayTv, an entertainment and music channel for youth in Pakistan, uses it to engage young viewers through mobile interaction.
Because organizations have their own policies for driving citizen journalism, adopters can customize the functionality and tweak the editorial control. Some sites, for example, require a thorough review of content before it is published, unlike SeenReport's system of instant posts and social censorship.
By providing the software to others, SeenReport contributes to citizen journalism in Pakistan. Across the spectrum of organizations using the platform, there have been over 10,000 news reports relating to the floods. GeoDost, for example, has established a unique section on the main page for natural disasters and an initial flood portal. More than 500,000 citizen reports have been submitted by all users across all organizations, Qureshi said, which gives "an idea of how strong citizen journalism is in Pakistan."
The devastating floods in Pakistan have been covered by trained reporters and mainstream media outlets around the world. Citizens, often on the front lines of the flood, have also been contributing thousands of reports though mobile phones, in part enabled by the citizen journalism service SeenReport.com.
SeenReport (a name derived from "see 'n report") is a citizen journalism service through which users can submit photos, videos, and text accounts of news as it is happening via SMS, MMS, or email. SeenReport won a 2010 mBillionth award, a first-ever contest which recognizes mobile content in South Asia. (This YouTube video explains more about the service.)
The SeenReport platform is designed to augment stories on online news sites. As a result, it has been purchased and customized by other media organizations in Pakistan, which helps to both promote citizen journalism in the country and to create a revenue stream for SeenReport.
MobileActive.org talked with Sharjeel Qureshi, a founder of the service, to learn more about it.
How SeenReport WorksA citizen reporter captures an event on a mobile phone and sends the content to SeenReport. There is no manual intervention at this stage -- the content is automatically published on the SeenReport website to better ensure real-time reports which augment larger ongoing events. Further, citizen reporters can register personal information on the site after submitting material.
The system accepts content via SMS, MMS, and email. If images or photos are sent, some basic text is required as far as description and location. The SeenReport platform is intelligent enough to detect this text and suggest related content and news stories. So, if several citizen reporters are submitting reports from the same event on their mobiles -- the floods, for instance -- the system will make a single thread from the incoming reports.
Some users create detailed online profiles. One freelance journalist, for example, includes his picture, email address, phone number, professional membership affiliation, and has established a subdomain on the SeenReport site with tabs for all of his uploaded content. Qureshi refers to it as a version of LinkedIn for freelance journalists. Others can post anonymously if they choose and are not required to create complete profiles.
The service has been integrated with social network sites so that when stories are published on the website, they are automatically posted on Twitter and Facebook for SeenReport. If a citizen journalist registers personal social media accounts, their reports will be automatically posted in those locations, too.
In general, mobile citizen reports open the door to spam, offensive content, and potentially non-newsworthy posts. SeenReport deals with this through a self-policing or "social censoring" system. Whenever content is posted, readers can comment on it, rate it, and flag it if they find it offensive. SeenReport administrators then remove the flagged content. This topic has been an ongoing discussion for the group behind SeenReport: the idea of how news stories are authenticated, how best to integrate citizen journalism into mainstream media, and what is good journalism.
A Strong Initial BoostQureshi and his team began working on the SeenReport platform in 2007, at a time when there was a media blackout in Pakistan. Heavy censorship was imposed on media organizations. The Internet was the only free medium of information, Qureshi said. During this time, the mobile market in Pakistan had proliferated and "we thought it would be a great idea to empower people to report news right from the cell phone and broadcast to the world in real-time," he said.
When the site was launched in April 2008, it came on the heels of Pakistan's Long March, the social unrest following firings of the judiciary. During this time, media coverage was heavily censored. SeenReport, Qureshi said, provided an alternative medium to cover the scale of the event and enable citizens at home to witness the historical moment.
SeenReport allows every mobile user in the crowd to become a reporter. In terms of the Long March, SMS reports provided minute-by-minute and mile-by-mile updates from eyewitnesses. The role of SeenReport in the march was a boost to the fledgling service and was covered by many international news outlets, including Global Voices, the BBC, and CIO Pakistan.
More Than a Single People Powered News SiteThe SeenReport software, which is cloud-based open source technology, was created in-house by a small team of engineers. SeenReport also sells this software-as-a-service to other media organizations interested in developing their own citizen journalism initiatives. This helps to generate income: The monthly recurring license fee model for adopters is the most significant source of revenue for the "modestly funded start-up," Qureshi said.
SeenReport was designed in such a way that it can be adapted and customized by other users. Several news and media sites have purchased the platform, including Samaa, GeoDost, Aaj, and PlayTv. The first three use the technology for citizen journalism purposes while PlayTv, an entertainment and music channel for youth in Pakistan, uses it to engage young viewers through mobile interaction.
Because organizations have their own policies for driving citizen journalism, adopters can customize the functionality and tweak the editorial control. Some sites, for example, require a thorough review of content before it is published, unlike SeenReport's system of instant posts and social censorship.
By providing the software to others, SeenReport contributes to citizen journalism in Pakistan. Across the spectrum of organizations using the platform, there have been over 10,000 news reports relating to the floods. GeoDost, for example, has established a unique section on the main page for natural disasters and an initial flood portal. More than 500,000 citizen reports have been submitted by all users across all organizations, Qureshi said, which gives "an idea of how strong citizen journalism is in Pakistan."
Candidate Lynn Nunes says he is sticking with his race for State Senate in district 10, despite the fact a seat he narrowly lost last year opened up in the council.
Nunes lost to the late Thomas White last fall by just four votes. White died last week after a long battle with cancer. No special election has been called yet to fill the seat, but observers say one could be held as soon as November 2.

We caught up with Nunes today to see if his plans have changed.
“We’re not focusing on losing,” Nunes said. “We’re gonna win. There is no need to worry about a plan b.”
For more on the race, go here.
Why Keynote MITE?
– On demand testing with no phones, contracts or SIMs to manage
– See the actual source code behind the scenes
– Record once, play back across multiple device profiles
(tags: mobile development tools)Your recipient(s) will receive notices when you leave and an ETA, based on your GPS location, and then up to three additional status messages may be sent based on your preferences. OnMyWay does not share your specific location in the notifications."
(tags: maps location mobile)"In particular, additional data could help assess the competitiveness of small and regional carriers, as well as shed light on the impact of switching costs for consumers. FCC should assess whether expanding original data collection of wireless industry inputs and outputs–such as prices, special access rates, capital expenditures, and equipment costs–would help the Commission better satisfy its requirement to review competitive market conditions with respect to commercial mobile services. FCC took no position on GAO's recommendation, but provided technical changes to this report that were incorporated as appropriate."
(tags: research mobile carriers competition business)
Wow. If You Think Quitting Booze Freaks People Out, Wait ‘Til You Quit Twitter.
Very interesting insights from TechCrunch’s Paul Carr.
I think there is much to be said for periodically cutting back on (or eliminating) anything that feels absolutely essential or habitual to you, to gauge how much you really need it.
In the last year I asked myself, “Do I need a house?” Nope. I’d like to have a house again, but I can be happy without one.
Several years ago I wondered, “Do I need a car?” Nope — and I’m much happier without one. Same with printed books: “Do I need several crammed bookcases around to reassure me that I’m smart or that I won’t get bored?” Again, no — I’m far happier with my Kindle and with being able to make better use of limited space.
I doubt that I’d ever entirely quit using social media because in my case it has vastly improved my life in many ways. But in the last couple of months I’ve cut back on it quite a lot — some days I post a lot, but others I don’t post at all (and a post-free day NEVER used to happen to me). I feel less compulsive about it.
However, I have definitely increased my use of two kinds of social media tools in recent months: social bookmarking tools and Facebook…
I’m always finding stuff that’s interesting or useful, and I like to be able to find it again in ways that make sense to me. Also, I believe that public curation is one of the most lasting values of all kinds of internet-based media — it not only makes stuff findable, it makes particularly good or relevant stuff findable.
This is why I’ve used Delicious for many years to save relevant links — it’s not the most usable or functional social bookmarking tool, but it syndicates nicely to WordPress and thus gives me a way to realize visibility benefits on this blog from my social bookmarking efforts. For me, that’s killing many birds with one stone simply by capitalizing on my penchant for wanting to keep interesting stuff.
But lately, since I’m engaged in some special research projects and a great deal of regular writing/editing/training for clients such as CNN.com, the Knight Digital Media Center, the Society of Environmental Journalists, eMeter and OaklandLocal, I also want to track useful stuff for these projects that may represent only a highly temporary interest and doesn’t necessarily need to be syndicated to Contentious.com.
For temporary project-related links, I’ve resumed using Diigo — which I used assiduously several years ago as my main bookmarking tool when it was Furl then stopped using entirely, then resumed a few months ago. I had been using the Firefox plugin Zotero to save research-related links, but I guess I saved too much stuff in it and it started crashing Firefox so I stopped using it.
I like Diigo for project-related research because I can choose to make it public and shareable — or keep some projects or items private. I generally keep my lists public unless there’s a specific reason to make them private, since I believe in the value of sharing. Also, I use the Diggo groups feature to collaborate with people on projects.
…And regarding Facebook — despite its privacy challenges, I’ve actually been using it more in the last year. But I use it mainly for personal stuff (connecting with friends, sharing info about me and my life). I monitor my privacy settings there pretty closely. I’ve also been going back and systematically removing Facebook “friends” who I don’t actually know personally. I create groups of my friends there so I can check in separately on my closest friends, my Boulder friends, my Bay Area friends, my family, colleagues who also are friends, etc. So for me, Facebook has become a particularly good channel for maintaining personal connections.
I still use Twitter, and I mix it up between personal and professional stuff there. I like it, it benefits me, I see no reason to leave — but I’ve channeled some of that energy elsewhere. Twitter is not a good archiving mechanism, so if I find something I really want to save I’ll often put it in Diigo or Delicious. If I also tweet it, I’ll clarify what other people might find interesting about it; whereas for Delicious and Diigo, some of my notes and categories might really only make sense to me.
I’ve been writing fewer blog posts of my own (like this) mainly because I use Delicious to post interesting stuff here. Not everyone likes that format, but it works well enough for my purposes here. I’ve been doing so much writing for clients and other projects that I frankly rarely have the energy for writing for my own blog.
My remaining personal energy for writing tends to go into my personal journal, which is on paper. Really. It’s the only paper left in my life that I really enjoy handling.
…All of this is the long way of saying I applaud Carr’s choice to leave social media, since it works for him. Almost everything in life — and especially in media — is, in fact, optional. It’s always good to challenge assumptions and explore options, whether additive, subtractive, or shifting. And I challenge anyone who feels compulsive about social media to at least take a vacation and then see what you really need and want. Life is too short to stay stuck in any rut or take anything for granted.
The “Exploring Taboos” project conducted by the Nazra team has finally started with workshops attended by five people: two females and three males. Fatma Emam, one of the project's coordinators, said all attendees were in their mid-20s. She continued saying that the first day the training focused on video journalism, and techniques of producing visual content; the second day was about sexuality theory and its manifestations in the Egyptian society, and the third day was about social media and how to use it to discuss these issues.
Fatma showed us some of the posts by the attendees and added that this is just the start - as the projects organizers are waiting for more articles to arrive.
The first output of the workshop was a blog post written in English by “Rebel” titled “Sexuality education woes in Egypt“. The post starts by explaining why sexuality education became a need in the Egyptian society.
The talk about sexuality hardly ever surfaces in Egypt. Even when an article or a speech is given by an enlightened intellectual, waves of rejection and censure usually follow. Discussing sexuality usually stirs accusations of spreading vice and encouraging promiscuity. Consequently, the debate on sexuality education here is starkly lacking and flawed, just like the process of sex education itself.
[…]
Public education ignores sexuality information, except for a class on human reproduction during preparatory school and some skewed information on sexually transmitted infections. A lot of young people remember that awkward science class where the teacher was too embarrassed to effectively convey useful lessons on sexuality, or skipped the class altogether.
He then explains the role of the civil society in such process saying:
Civil society organizations have recently recognized the importance of delivering sexuality education programs to young people.
[…]
Reality is unfortunately far from this. Instead of providing a positive approach to sexuality, it is often portrayed as an evil desire that needs to be controlled. Instead of promoting tolerance and understanding, it’s not uncommon to find Sex Ed programs that foster negative attitudes towards sexuality and gender.
He ends his post by further explaining why opening such talks are important.
Sexuality is closely associated with people’s happiness and productivity. Providing comprehensive information regarding sexuality is a goal that must be achieved equally and effectively for a better nation.
Another output of the first workshop was an Arabic blog post written by “Just a human” titled “Men also Cry.” Fatma said that she's happy with this post as it is so bold that it comes from a male who questions the typical gender roles assigned for men, and even raising the homosexuality dilemma in a very candid way. She's also glad it is in Arabic to break the fear of the social stigma.
The post starts with these words:
منذ صغرى و انا اعانى من مشكلة حقيقية مع كلمة “ذكر” و التى تتطور مع تقدمك فى العمر لتحل محلها كلمة “رجل”..لا اتصور انى فى يوم من الايام فهمتها او استوعبت المعايير الحقيقية لها .و لا اتذكر انى فى يوم من الايام كنت فى حالة وئام مع المجتمع الذى اعيش بين افراده شاذا و شاردا عنهم لا لشىء الا لانى لا احترم ذكوريته.Since my childhood and I have a real problem with the word “male”, which was then replaced by the word “man” as I got older. I don't imagine that I have ever understood this word, or the standards it complies. I don't remember a day I've been in harmony with the society I have been living with its members with feeling of weirdness, for nothing except that I don't respect its masculinity.
The post sheds light on various aspects of how “Just human” feels this strangeness in the society, where the climax starts when he talks about crying in an Eastern society:
تربيت منذ الصغر على ان الرجل ابدا لا يبكى ..و انه اذا بكى سقط عنه شرف الرجولة و حينها يتم وضعه فى مرتبة اقل حتى من تلك التى تحتلها “النسوان ” و عذرا لاستخدامى تلك اللفظة ولكن مجتمعى يفضلها لانها تشعره بنشوة جنسية غريبة .Ever since I was a child, I was raised to believe that men never cry. And if a man cried, then he turns into a “woman” - losing the honor of being a man. The strange thing is that I have the ability to cry. I cried many time. I cried when Jack died in Titanic. I cried when Hani Salaa died in Enta Omry (Egyptian film). And I cried when Jack Twist died in Brokeback Mountain.
I also cried when my friend died few years ago. Yes, I committed this crime of crying - and I felt tears flowing from my eyes onto my face, and then my clothes. I touched it, and saw through it my humanity without fear or shame.
He then tries to define masculinity the way he relates to, from his own perspective, and according to his experience.
الحقيقة هى انى فشلت فى ايجاد تعريف مناسب للرجولة يتجاوز التصنيف البيولوجى الخاص بالكروموسومات و الذى لا يستهوينى باى حال من الاحوال ..و الحقيقة ايضا هى ان ايجاد تعريف لمعنى الرجولة لم يعد يشغلنى على اى من الاصعدة ..لانى اعرف ان اى تعريف قد اصل اليه سيظل عاجزا عن ايجاد نقطة يستطيع التقابل فيها مع تعريف المجتمع للرجولة ..و لعل هذا ما يفسر تفضيلى لان اطلق على نفسى لقب “انسان” ..اجده اكثر حميمية وقربا لقلبى ..فهو فى النهاية يحمينى من شوائب تعكر صفو انتمائى لهذا اللقب ..لذا لا يشغلنى حاليا سوى ان اكون مجرد انسان.The truth is that I failed to find a proper definition for masculinity other than the biological classification, which I don't like in anyway. And the truth is also that finding a definition for the meaning of masculinity became of no concern any longer. Because I know that at any point, the definition I will reach will be incapable of concordance with the society's definition. And maybe that's why I prefer the title “Human being”. I find it more intimate and closer to my heart - for it is in the end protects me from anything that disturbs my belonging to this title. Therefore, nothing concerns me now except how to be just a human being.
"There are a few places in the United States that sell SIM cards without a phone. I would check a few wireless stores when you get to Delaware and see if they have them. Best luck in third-party cellular stores not operated by a carrier.
(tags: mobile access carriers problems)
"When BNO sold control of it's popular Twitter account to MSNBC, the difference was immediately and for serious news-hounds, disappointing. It felt less personal, there was no MSNBC branding on the Twitter account, but a substantial number of the links posted went to that company's site. It was still pretty cool, but not nearly as cool as the independent organization that it had been before."
(tags: News-biz apps iphone social+media business deals)The payout, approved by the City Council on Friday, settles a federal lawsuit the seven filed after they were arrested and jailed for two days for dressing up like zombies in downtown Minneapolis on July 22, 2006, to protest "mindless" consumerism.
When arrested at the intersection of Hennepin Avenue and 6th Street N., most of them had thick white powder and fake blood on their faces and dark makeup around their eyes. They were walking in a stiff, lurching fashion and carrying four bags of sound equipment to amplify music from an iPod when they were arrested by police who said they were carrying equipment that simulated "weapons of mass destruction."
(tags: zombies law rights)"Why not streamline the process?
Correcting an error of this magnitude shouldn't require days of deliberation, the valuable time of a deputy managing editor, or concern over distinctions between "correction" and "clarification" that are meaningless to the public. It ought to be a simple matter to go in and fix the error on the website, as bloggers routinely do."
(tags: newspapers processes corrections problems geography)"Importantly, chinaSMACK filters and translates not just Chinese internet content, but also the comments on that content."
(tags: china culture video language social+media bridging entertainment fun)Between April 2009 and May 2010, social networking use among internet users ages 50-64 grew by 88%–from 25% to 47%.
During the same period, use among those ages 65 and older grew 100%–from 13% to 26%.
By comparison, social networking use among users ages 18-29 grew by 13%—from 76% to 86%.
“Young adults continue to be the heaviest users of social media, but their growth pales in comparison with recent gains made by older users,” explains Mary Madden, Senior Research Specialist and author of the report. “Email is still the primary way that older users maintain contact with friends, families and colleagues, but many older users now rely on social network platforms to help manage their daily communications.”
One in five (20%) online adults ages 50-64 say they use social networking sites on a typical day, up from 10% one year ago.
(tags: generations demographics social+media trends research)
An IndiaUnheard video by our correspondent from Chandel district of Manipur has inspired a local organization Burning Voices to donate lifesaving medicines for over 500 people in a remote village who were in dire need of healthcare . The correpsonent of the video - Daniel Mate – is a local tribal youth who says the video has changed his own life as well.
The impact story comes at a time when community media is just starting to gain ground in India because mainstream media is widely seen as obsessed with TRP ratings and advertisement revenues. But when met with these facts, the media players hit back with ‘will such media work?’
Well this story presents the proof that it does.
This video was shown on IndiaUnehard website on 24th May. As a fellow community member, Daniel had been witnessing the plight of the villagers of Bongli – the village with no healthcare – for years. He was pained to see the poor villagers being forced to use herbs and faith healing to take care of their sick and even the dying. To reach the nearest public health centre they would have to trek a distance of 10 km through dense forest and hills.
Within a week of the publication of the video, IndiaUnheard team was contacted by Devakishor Soraisam – a member of a Human Rights organization called the Burning Voices. They were deeply moved by video and would like to reach out the villagers, they said. Would IndiaUnheard help them?
When told of this, Daniel was overjoyed. In mid-June Daniel met the Ronid and Devakishor – representatives of Burning Voices who had brought with them a carload of medicines for villagers of Bongli. It was a moving sight when Daniel went to the village with the donors and distributed these medicines in the village, as well as other neighbouring villages that needed it.
Says Daniel, “I joined IndiaUnheard because we had no media telling out stories and covering our issue. So IndiaUnheard was a platform where I could share our stories. But now, it has become the forum where we can make changes. I have just turned from a story teller to a change maker. It feels great!”
The video, thus has created 3-fold impacts.
1. It made possible for over 500 people access healthcare in more than one village which had no hospital, no medicine whatsoever.
2. The video inspired locals take action to find solution to local problems
3. The video has, deepened faith of the correspondent and the whole community into the power of community produced media.
The skeptics of people-powered media can take a re-look at their own thoughts.
Meanwhile, community reporters like Daniel should take a bow.
Group Picked for Living Wage Study Called Biased
(Bronx News Network)
Claim that America has Killed More than Islam is Fact
(The American Conservative)
Mosques Curb Domestic Radicalization
(The American Prospect)
Closest Senior Center May be a Mile Away
(IBO Web Blog)
Cartoonist’s Take on Legislators’ Office Spending
(Matt Davies)
Tennis Courts to Get Carbon Neutral Composting Toilets
(Inhabitat)
Reimagining “Towers in the Park”
(Urban Omnibus)
No Reason to Wait on Paid Sick Leave
(DMI Blog)
Men Die Younger than Women
(Health Department)
Albany’s 2010 Transportation Wrap Up
(Tri-State Transportation Campaign)
A Return of the Full Face Ballot Requirement?
(ReformNY)
Correction: No State Records on Bike-on-Pedestrian Injuries
(Streetsblog)
4MR is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
In this week's 4MR podcast I look at the recently launched free phone service from Google through Gmail. Undercutting Skype and other VoIP services (not to mention landlines), Google is letting people call from their computer to anywhere in the U.S. or Canada for free, and charging low international rates. What's in it for Google? I spoke to tech pundit and Computerworld contributor Mitch Wagner to learn more.
Check it out:
>>> Subscribe to 4MR <<<
>>> Subscribe to 4MR via iTunes <<<
Listen to my entire interview with Mitch Wagner:
Background music is "What the World Needs" by the The Ukelele Hipster Kings via PodSafe Music Network.
Here are some links to related sites and stories mentioned in the podcast:
Call Phones from Gmail at Google
Six Things Google's Free Phone Service Can't Do at NY Times
Gmail call feature a ringing success, a million times over at Christian Science Monitor
How to make calls using Gmail at CNET
Google reportedly adding voice calling to Gmail at Computerworld
Gmail Voice Is About Future Search, Not Free Calls at Gizmodo
Gmail's now in the phone biz. Trouble for carriers down the road? at Sprint Connection blog
Google continues the assault on the price of a phone call at Washington Post
Google adds free phone calls to Gmail, wow at Seattle Times
Google Voice phone booths Dr. Who might love at News.com
Google introduces Gmail-linked phone service at SF Chronicle
Also, be sure to vote in our poll about what you think the future of the landline will be:
What's the future of the landline telephone?Market Research
Mark Glaser is executive editor of MediaShift and Idea Lab. He also writes the bi-weekly OPA Intelligence Report email newsletter for the Online Publishers Association. He lives in San Francisco with his son Julian. You can follow him on Twitter @mediatwit.
4MR is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
We’ve created a new section on our site with links to all of the print materials we are generating in our Inclusive Social Media effort promoting neighbor Issues Forum for all.
Here is the text of that page as of today.
Gustavo Rivera, the man who is challenging Sen. Pedro Espada for his Bronx senate seat, has been racking up the endorsements as of late. The most recent come from City Comptroller John Liu and Public Advocate Bill de Blasio.
“Gustavo Rivera and I share the belief in equal opportunities and access to good schools, quality health care, and affordable housing,” said Liu. “Gustavo is a true champion of working families and will fight every day to put the people of the Northwest Bronx first.”
“It’s no secret that we need real change in Albany and I believe Gustavo Rivera is the kind of reformer New Yorkers need fighting for them,” said de Blasio. “He will be a strong voice for issues New Yorkers care about including tenants’ rights and for housing that is safe, secure and affordable. I am proud to endorse Gustavo’s candidacy for the State Senate.”
Rivera was also recently endorsed by former Mayor Ed Koch and Sen. Eric Schneiderman.
Espada has been endorsed by his close pal Sen. Ruben Diaz and a group of Hispanic ministers.
Here is the statement from Council Speaker Christine Quinn regarding the death of Tom White: 
My deepest sympathies go out to the family of Council Member Tom White; his mother Marie White, his children: Bryan D. White, Lucile Precious Middleton, daughter-in-law Seleste White and grandchildren Lamar White and Jacob. Tom spent most his life serving the people of Southeast Queens, working to support communities that faced great challenges. As chair of our Economic Development Committee he fought for programs that helped many of these neighborhoods on the path to recovery.
He searched for ways to break the cycle of poverty and violence. He fought for job training and placement programs, and investments in long term economic growth. He had a particular soft spot for women and minority business owners, pushing for additional resources to help them stay afloat and create good jobs for their neighbors.
Throughout a government career that spanned two decades, he balanced his work on the City Council with public service of another variety. As Executive Director of one of the largest substance abuse programs in the state, he cared for New Yorkers who have often been marginalized, forgotten, and incarcerated from an early age. He gave them hope, a shot at redemption, and a chance to build a better life.
Though Tom has left us, he remains present in the lives he touched and the impact he made on the face of our city. The thousands of New Yorkers he helped shepherd away from the jaws of addiction; the small business owner given a chance to build her own American dream here in the five boroughs; the working family that can now afford to stay in the home they built; the child who will grow up with cleaner air and safer streets.
The New Yorkers whose lives have been made better, in ways both large and small, thanks to the laws Tom sponsored and the causes he championed. It is through them that Tom White will truly be memorialized.
And from Mayor Michael Bloomberg:
My friend Council Member Tom White lost a long battle with cancer today, and on behalf of all New Yorkers, I want to express my condolences. Born and raised in Queens, Tom spent over 30 years trying to improve his Southeast Queens community, and not just through his work with the City Council. He was the executive director of J-CAP, which serves Queens with a recognized alcohol and substance abuse treatment program. He served as Chair of the Councils economic development committee, and because of his efforts, we were able to create programs that range from providing loans to help small businesses stay afloat and grow to helping New Yorkers avoid foreclosures. Toms legacy will live on in the results of his work, and my thoughts and prayers are with his family and loved ones.
The Federal Trade Commission has reached a second settlement with a marketer over apparent violations of the Commission's rules requiring disclosure of compensated endorsements, particularly on blogs and social media, as well as other contexts in which the compensation (which may include free samples or discounts) is not "reasonably expected by the audience."
Back in April, the Commission sent a letter to Ann Taylor LOFT raising concerns about a promotion the clothing company ran for bloggers and warning the company not to undertake any similar campaigns. The Commision declined to undertake any enforcement action in that case because it was the firm's first apparent violation, only a very small number of bloggers posted content as a result of the promotion, and the company adopted a written policy in February 2010 stating that it would not issue any gifts to bloggers without first telling the bloggers that the gift must be disclosed.
Now, the Commission has reached a settlement with Reverb Communications, a public relations firm, which the FTC alleged had employees and interns post positive reviews on Apple's iTunes store for games produced by Reverb clients. According to the FTC complaint,
From approximately November 2008 through May 2009, Reverb employees, including [Reverb owner] Tracie Snitker, and company managers, posted [positive] public reviews about Reverb’s clients’ gaming applications in the iTunes store. These reviews were posted using account names that would give the readers of these reviews the impression they had been submitted by disinterested consumers.
In the Matter of Reverb Communications, Inc., No. 092 3199 (FTC 2010), complaint at 2.
While Reverb did not admit any wrongdoing, under the settlement the company agreed to remove within seven days any previously posted endorsements that misrepresent the authors as independent users or ordinary consumers, and that fail to disclose a connection between Reverb and the game developers. The settlement also bars such misrepresentations in any future comments. (FTC analysis of settlement here.)
The five-member Commission unanimously gave preliminary approval to the settlement, and will take a final vote after a 30-day public comment period.
While I've questioned the disparate application of the FTC rules to new and traditional media, enforcement of the rules to remedy the apparent "astroturfing" in this case is a good use of the FTC's power to ensure that customer endorsements are just that: honest opinions of actual customers.
We are all overwhelmed by too much information. Either we feel burdened by thousands of unread emails, articles, and blog posts, or we generally feel out of the information loop, as if others have secret access to content that we’re not privy to. If we don’t develop systems to manage how we discover, make sense of, and use the information around us then either we begin to feel anxious or so overwhelmed that the information itself begins to lose its value.
We start freaking out.
This post is a detailed overview of how I personally manage media content in my life. (I won’t include how I manage other types of information like financial and contact information — that’s a whole other story.) I should emphasize that there is no single media management system that will work for everyone. Everyone has different types and amounts of information to process. Because of my job and my own interests I probably consume much more media than others, and so have developed a fairly intricate system that, though extremely automated, still requires more daily attention than most are probably willing to invest.
Finding and Consuming MediaThere are three main factors that influenced how I designed this system:
Before I even get out of bed I reach for my iPad and start up my NPR app. As I listen to the five-minute morning news roundup, I look through all of the latest NPR stories and make a personalized 30-minute playlist of the four – six stories that interest me the most. I listen to this playlist as I shower and make breakfast. With my toast and coffee in hand I walk the ten feet to my home office (now green at the request of Tricia).
Every morning I spend about an hour to 90 minutes scanning various sources of media to get a general feel for the day’s news. During this time I never read anything longer than three paragraphs. First I read through my email and click on all the links to articles that people have recommended to me. If these articles are less than three paragraphs then I read them right away. If they are longer, and I determine that they are worth my time, then I save them to Instapaper to read later on my iPad or iPhone.
After email I look through my three Twitter accounts (@oso, @civicinfolatam, @infocivi) to see what articles my contacts have been recommending. Very few of the Twitter users I follow write about what they ate for lunch; rather the service is much more like a list of cleverly worded headlines written by individuals I trust. Each of those headlines then links to the main article. I probably read about 3% of the articles that my Twitter contacts link to. Still, I find it valuable to know what they find valuable on a daily basis. Of those articles I do read, if they are less than three paragraphs then I will read them right away; if they are longer then I save them to Instapaper to read later in the day. I use Nambu to read through my Twitter accounts on my laptop, the official Twitter app for my iPhone, and Twitterific for my iPad.
Next I read through the feeds in my RSS reader. I use Google Reader to store all of the most recent articles from the 307 feeds I am subscribed to. While all of the information is stored in Google Reader, I use NetNewsWire for my laptop, iPhone, and iPad so that I can continue to read the articles even when I’m not connected to the internet (which is often when I am traveling). Every morning there are an average of 600 – 800 new pieces of content waiting for me. As you can imagine I skim quickly through all of the headlines, but only read a small minority of the articles and blog posts. From a total of 800 new articles every day in my RSS reader I probably read around 15 short articles (less than three paragraphs) and two long articles on average.
In addition to long articles and blog posts that I save to Instapaper, I also often come across PDF reports and short video clips that I want to watch later. PDF reports I save to my Dropbox folder, which I can access automatically via my iPhone, iPad, and both of my computers. While the Dropbox applications allow you to read PDFs directly inside the apps, I prefer using GoodReader which has more functionality and connects automatically to your Dropbox and Google Docs accounts (in addition to other services). If I discover a 5 – 10 minute YouTube clip that I want to watch later, I drag the link to Evom which automatically downloads and adds the video to iTunes, which then syncs to both my iPhone and iPad.
The podcasts I listen to on a regular basis.
Lastly I open up iTunes where I am subscribed to around 25 different audio and video podcasts. Currently iTunes tell me that I have 75 episodes waiting for my attention, and that it will take me 1.4 days to listen to everything. I try to download podcasts selectively so that I realistically can listen to everything I download, but often I am only able to catch up when I take a long flight or road trip.
Deep ReadingInstapaper allows me to read long articles on any device with an interface that doesn’t tire my eyes. It removes all advertisements and unnecessary text from the articles.
After my morning routine of info-snacking I usually have around two to three hours of media content to consume throughout the rest of the day. I tend to do this in hour-long blocks. I listen to around 90 minutes of podcasts and audio books during my afternoon run and my time in the gym. I read for about 60 minutes on a bench in the park. Then I’ll read for another thirty minutes when I’m at home on my couch and before I go to bed. Often times I watch a documentary movie while I eat dinner.
I read e-books on my iPad, and occasionally on my iPhone. I use both the Kindle and iBook apps to read various books (though I prefer iBooks). Both applications synchronize what page I am on and my bookmarks so that if I finish off at page 113 on my iPad it will automatically start me at 113 on my iPhone as well.
Admittedly, I tend to info snack a couple more times throughout the day, though I am trying to spend more time reading deeply and less time info-snacking. I use Twitter, FlipBoard, NetNewsWire, and Google FastFlip to info-snack throughout the day, mostly from my iPhone and iPad.
Flipboard for the iPad feels just like a traditional magazine, but it’s content comes from recommended links by my Facebook and Twitter contacts. I can send longer articles to Instapaper directly from within the app.
Processing and Sharing MediaEverything so far relates to how I organize and consume media. But there is a more important guiding question: Why the hell am I reading/watching/listening to this? In part it is to become a better person: more informed, worldly, empathetic. But I am also aware of my place in the information ecology, and my role in spreading information across different communities. With each piece of content I consume, there are nine possible outputs:
That may seem like a ridiculous number of outputs and a lot of work, but it literally takes me about 10 seconds to share information via email/Twitter/Delicious/Facebook/Tumblr, and I hardly ever spend more than an hour a day writing blog posts.
Stepping Away From it AllAt this point you probably thing that I do nothing more with my life than submerge myself with media. While it’s true that I probably spend more time consuming media than most, I never spend anytime watching advertisements and I don’t play video games. Still, I’m increasingly aware of the need to step away from media completely. @shirafu recently pointed me to the NY Times article “Digital Devices Deprive Brain of Needed Downtime,” which really struck a chord with me. If we don’t step away from media we fail to engage with it meaningfully. At least once a day I try to spend time simply staring at the ceiling and/or going for a walk around my neighborhood. I am trying to spend more weekends out in the mountains away from connectivity. Cooking dinner has also been a recent source of calm for me.
Some Content GemsHere is a list of some of my favorite sources of content (not all are legal):
I rarely watch television, but when I do, this is how. (Again, I never watch advertisements.)
ColophonIn traditional print publishing a colophon is a brief description of the printing and publication of the book. Early bloggers like John Gruber re-appropriated the term to describe a list of tools used to produce digital media. Below is a list of all the applications and services I have mentioned above.
Please feel free to leave a comment below to explain how you manage the river of media.
Of this we can be certain: There is no such thing as the intersection of Mozart Place and 16th Street NW. These two Washington, D.C, thoroughfares in the Adams-Morgan area parallel each other.
So when people who knew the neighborhood read the Washington Post's "Crime Scene" post on Aug. 12 about a homicide in the area, and saw a reference to such a location as the place where the victim was found, they knew something was wrong. In fact, the first three commenters on the story pointed out the mistake.
What happened next was that the Post quickly corrected the goof, noted the fix and moved on. Right?
If only. In fact, the error remains in the online version of the story as I write this, two weeks later. The comments pointing out the mistake sit at the end of the post, without any response or acknowledgment from the Post.
Bug ReportChris Amico filed a bug about the error at MediaBugs, and we decided to handle it. (Right now we're still primarily serving the San Francisco Bay Area.) We contacted the Post. Two emails and five days later, we got a response from Post deputy managing editor Milton Coleman.
Coleman said the paper planned to "set the record straight." He also pointed out that since the reference to the non-existent intersection was made in a passage attributed to a police spokesman, technically the Post hadn't actually made a mistake, and therefore the Post would publish a clarification, not a correction.
Four days after that, on Sat., Aug. 21, more than a week after the original mistake, the Post did publish a correction. Good luck finding it on the Post website, though. The paper does have a dedicated online corrections page, which is linked from the News menu in the top navigation bar. Yet the Mozart Place correction notice doesn't show up on this listing. Meanwhile, there's also a link to "corrections" in the footer of the Post website, but right now that link points -- inexplicably and uselessly -- to the corrections page for a single day two weeks ago.
So there is some correction confusion at the paper, and it's not easy to find the Mozart Place correction notice. Which wouldn't matter if the Post had bothered to correct the online version of the article (with a link to the correction notice). That, for whatever reason, has not happened yet.
Online FirstIs this a really minor error? You bet -- although it does matter to the people who posted comments about it at the Post site and who filed a report at MediaBugs. Don't the editors of the Washington Post have more important stuff to worry about? Undoubtedly. That's my point.
This isn't a complex or politically charged issue requiring legal consultations or editorial huddles. It's a simple matter of fact that's verifiable in half a minute. The more that a news organization like the Post publishes brief, quick-hit items online, the more of this kind of error it's likely to make. Why not streamline the process? The Post calls the Crime Scene report a blog; why can't it function more like one?
Correcting an error of this magnitude shouldn't require days of deliberation, the valuable time of a deputy managing editor, or concern over distinctions between "correction" and "clarification" that are meaningless to the public. It ought to be a simple matter to go in and fix the error on the website, as bloggers routinely do. And if the web editors want to keep this process accountable and transparent, as they should, all they have to do is make revisions to published content accessible. It can be done!
Web corrections ought to happen first; let print catch up. Instead, too often the leisurely gait of the print operation seems to hamstring the website from taking care of things.
When I discuss these ideas with newspaper managers, they usually agree in principle but then point to technical barriers. "Our content management system is so old and clunky," they say. "We just can't do it."
That excuse might have been credible 15, 10, even 5 years ago. But it's time to stop giving news organizations a pass on this account. They've had years to get their technological act together, to think about how to coordinate print and online in general and specifically in the corrections process. If they can't do it today, it's little wonder readers think that accuracy just isn't their priority.
UPDATE August 27: At some point shortly after this post was published (or, conceivably, shortly before), the Washington Post edited the news item in question to remove the reference to the non-existent intersection. There's no mention or record of the change on the page. (Although there is a reference to the item being "updated," this notice has been on the page for roughly two weeks already.)
Of this we can be certain: There is no such thing as the intersection of Mozart Place and 16th Street NW. These two Washington, D.C, thoroughfares in the Adams-Morgan area parallel each other.
So when people who knew the neighborhood read the Washington Post's "Crime Scene" post on Aug. 12 about a homicide in the area, and saw a reference to such a location as the place where the victim was found, they knew something was wrong. In fact, the first three commenters on the story pointed out the mistake.
What happened next was that the Post quickly corrected the goof, noted the fix and moved on. Right?
If only. In fact, the error remains in the online version of the story as I write this, two weeks later. The comments pointing out the mistake sit at the end of the post, without any response or acknowledgment from the Post.
Bug ReportChris Amico filed a bug about the error at MediaBugs, and we decided to handle it. (Right now we're still primarily serving the San Francisco Bay Area.) We contacted the Post. Two emails and five days later, we got a response from Post deputy managing editor Milton Coleman.
Coleman said the paper planned to "set the record straight." He also pointed out that since the reference to the non-existent intersection was made in a passage attributed to a police spokesman, technically the Post hadn't actually made a mistake, and therefore the Post would publish a clarification, not a correction.
Four days after that, on Sat., Aug. 21, more than a week after the original mistake, the Post did publish a correction. Good luck finding it on the Post website, though. The paper does have a dedicated online corrections page, which is linked from the News menu in the top navigation bar. Yet the Mozart Place correction notice doesn't show up on this listing. Meanwhile, there's also a link to "corrections" in the footer of the Post website, but right now that link points -- inexplicably and uselessly -- to the corrections page for a single day two weeks ago.
So there is some correction confusion at the paper, and it's not easy to find the Mozart Place correction notice. Which wouldn't matter if the Post had bothered to correct the online version of the article (with a link to the correction notice). That, for whatever reason, has not happened yet.
Online FirstIs this a really minor error? You bet -- although it does matter to the people who posted comments about it at the Post site and who filed a report at MediaBugs. Don't the editors of the Washington Post have more important stuff to worry about? Undoubtedly. That's my point.
This isn't a complex or politically charged issue requiring legal consultations or editorial huddles. It's a simple matter of fact that's verifiable in half a minute. The more that a news organization like the Post publishes brief, quick-hit items online, the more of this kind of error it's likely to make. Why not streamline the process? The Post calls the Crime Scene report a blog; why can't it function more like one?
Correcting an error of this magnitude shouldn't require days of deliberation, the valuable time of a deputy managing editor, or concern over distinctions between "correction" and "clarification" that are meaningless to the public. It ought to be a simple matter to go in and fix the error on the website, as bloggers routinely do. And if the web editors want to keep this process accountable and transparent, as they should, all they have to do is make revisions to published content accessible. It can be done!
Web corrections ought to happen first; let print catch up. Instead, too often the leisurely gait of the print operation seems to hamstring the website from taking care of things.
When I discuss these ideas with newspaper managers, they usually agree in principle but then point to technical barriers. "Our content management system is so old and clunky," they say. "We just can't do it."
That excuse might have been credible 15, 10, even 5 years ago. But it's time to stop giving news organizations a pass on this account. They've had years to get their technological act together, to think about how to coordinate print and online in general and specifically in the corrections process. If they can't do it today, it's little wonder readers think that accuracy just isn't their priority.
UPDATE August 27: At some point shortly after this post was published (or, conceivably, shortly before), the Washington Post edited the news item in question to remove the reference to the non-existent intersection. There's no mention or record of the change on the page. (Although there is a reference to the item being "updated," this notice has been on the page for roughly two weeks already.)
While this market continues to heat up, it seems that both Chomp.com and Appolicious have distinct differences. The most obvious difference is that Appolicious has Yahoo’s marketing behind it, with the company having done a deal in April with the search giant that now has visitors to a number of Yahoo! properties seeing Appolicious content.
(tags: mobile apps search+engines)
Gotham Gazette’s Alana Horowitz filed this from Brooklyn:
As Sen. Eric Schneiderman added another name — Manhattan Borough President Scott Stringer — to his rapidly growing list of endorsements for attorney general, fellow candidate Sean Coffey announced a few of his own.
Assemblyman Karim Camara and several members of the Brooklyn clergy convened at Brooklyn Borough Hall to show their support for the formal naval officer. Rep. Ed Towns, who endorsed Coffey earlier this month, also attended the event.
“He’s a man who comes in with a mind of reform,” said Camara, who stressed Coffey’s record as a litigator and a federal prosecutor. Coffey’s role in winning a $6 billion securities suit against WorldCom once earned him the nickname “Wall Street’s New Nemesis.”
Additional praise for Coffey included his commitment to creating affordable housing and fighting housing fraud.
“Sean Coffey knows the problems and pain that the people of Brooklyn are feeling and he has a plan to help relieve it,” said the Rev. Clinton Miller of the Brown Memorial Baptist Church.
Coffey also introduced his “Fair and Affordable Housing Reform Agenda,” which includes crackdowns on predatory lending and housing discrimination.
“My plan today will stop these scams dead in their tracks and give Brooklyn residents the opportunities for economic growth that they deserve,” he said in a statement.
Coffey has also received endorsements from Councilwoman Diana Reyna, Rep. Nydia Velazquez and U.S. Senator (and former SNL cast member) Al Franken. He will face Schneiderman, Kathleen Rice, Richard Brodsky and Eric Dinallo in the September 14th Democratic primary.
After the announcements, I caught up with the attorney general hopeful, who told me his campaign is “surging where it matters,” especially among likely Democratic voters.
“They want their government to be something that works again,” he said.
Assemblyman Richard Brodsky, candidate for attorney general, has released an environmental plan. Here are the highlights from his office:
“Polluter Pays
Simply stated, the states laws should be enforced to assure that
taxpayers do not bear the burden of cleaning up corporate pollution,
citizens do not bear economic burden and the public does not bear the
health and safety burdens caused by such pollution. As a result, the
Brodsky plan proposes three main ways that polluters can be held
accountable by actions taken directly by the Attorney General:
Reforming the Oil Spill Fund and Empowering the DEC: The State Oil
Spill Fund was created to collect fines and penalties from polluters
that will enable the state to clean orphaned pollution sites without
the taxpayers being forced to foot the bill. Only the most vigorous
enforcement of the law will yield sufficient money to clean up these
sites, thereby protecting taxpayers. Richard will use the powers of
the Attorney Generals office to partner with the DEC to collect these
fines in earnest and ensure that the public is protected.
Citizen Suits: The Polluter Pays principal can also be asserted by
private citizens who seek to enforce state law when the state does
not. As Attorney General, Brodsky will re-introduce his Citizen
Suits legislation (A.4272) as a program bill legislation. This
legislation would provide private citizens with the right to seek
enforcement through the courts in instances involving violations of
those provisions of the ECL relating to protection of waters, water
supply, water power, drainage, solid and hazardous waste, freshwater
and tidal wetlands, pesticides and hazardous substances bulk storage.
Protecting Our Aquifers, Cleaning up Toxic Waste: There must be far
stronger and more efficient regulatory enforcement of the efficient
disposal of the waste products that were created my Manufactured Gas
Plants (MGPS)- which is a glaringly huge issue facing Long Island.
Currently, a NYS DEC consent order lists 23 sites on Long Island where
waste products containing numerous toxic and carcinogenic compounds
were recklessly dumped by MGPS over a 100-year period. Richard will
investigate, and if necessary, prosecute utility companies who are not
making the best possible effort to remediate this problem quickly and
effectively.
Brodsky said: As Attorney General, I will set a national standard for
the effective enforcement of environmental laws. Today, there are a
myriad of environmental laws currently in place that could go a long
way to holding polluters accountable, but are not adequately enforced.
Also, there are issues that need to be addressed that will need new,
aggressive statuary changes and I will lead the fight to implement
them.
A Constitutional Right to Clean and Safe Environment
Assemblyman Brodsky has led a national effort to enshrine in the
United States Constitution the right to a clean and safe environment.
This initiative, when first proposed in 1996, was supported by
legislative bodies in 5 states. He proposes that the New York State
Constitution be amended to contain the same right.
Brodsky said: The New York State Constitution has long been a vehicle
for principles that help new Yorkers live better, safer and happier
lives. There is no more basic right then the right to breathe clean
air, drink clean water and be safe from toxic pollution in our
communities.
Environmental Enforcement Initiatives:
Environmental Enforcement by the Attorney General is key to promoting
public health changes and improvements. Some of the key issues that
Richard will confront head-on upon taking office are as follows:
Fracking: The statewide debate about fracking has highlighted
potential long-term danger to drinking water in our state. While the
legislature continues to debate a moratorium on fracking, and while
DEC continues the regulatory process. The Attorney General has
particular responsibilities, which must be exercised. As Attorney
General, Richard will use existing powers to appoint a Watershed
Inspector General (WIG) who is thoroughly versed on this issue.
Richard will use the office of the WIG to make certain that New York
City’s drinking water is never compromised. The WIG needs to be a
central part of the statewide debate and to lead efforts to protect
water quality, as the direct employer of the WIG, Attorney General
Brodsky will make sure this happens.
Environmental Justice: For too long, there has been an inequitable
pattern in the siting of environmental facilities in minority and
economically distressed communities, which have borne a
disproportionate and inequitable share of such facilities. Brodsky
will continue to support his long-standing legislative initiative
(A.4245) that would require the state to factor in disproportionate or
inequitable burdens on minority communities or economically distressed
areas under the State Environmental Quality Review Act (SEQRA).
Richard will launch investigations into incidences where this practice
is being alleged, and require the issuance of all Environmental Impact
Statements to take into consideration these issues, and also use the
Department of Healths Cancer Incidence Mapping System that Richard
created this year (A.199) to determine if the siting of environmental
facilities is linked to cancer incidences.
Environmental enforcement on Special Taxing Districts: All across New
York, local governments have created Special Taxing Districts which
have particular responsibilities to levy and collect taxes. In many
cases, such districts provide water and wastewater management services
and have often acted in ways that damage the environment-notably
because they are often unregulated by state and federal statutes, or
chose to disobey them. As Attorney General, Brodsky will not permit
this to continue, and will apply state laws in ways that they are not
currently being applied even as we seek federal reforms.
Brodsky said: New Yorks various state agencies, public utilities and
local governments need to all work together to protect our environment
and public health. As Attorney General, I will enact sweeping reforms
and enforcement provisions that will enable us to jointly reach this
goal.”
Next week will be decisive for BlackBerry corporate users. BlackBerry maker Research In Motion (RIM) could provide a solution to help security agencies in India access corporate email by obtaining encrypted data in readable formats. If RIM does not offer a solution before the end of the month, India has warned that it will block BlackBerry Messenger service in the country for corporate users.
BlackBerry phones encrypt their services better than most smartphones do, and this has been one of the selling points for BlackBerry as a device for corporate users. RIM has to this point refused to provide access codes that would allow governments to monitor the content of encrypted messages. Should RIM provide the Indian government with access to the data, it would not only hurt freedom of expression -- it would likely also hurt the BlackBerry's reputation as the business device of choice.
About More Than The BlackBerryThe Indian government isn't the only seeking access to BlackBerry data. The United Arab Emirates and Saudi Arabia claim that BlackBerry's services break their laws and threaten national security. The UAE's Telecommunication Regulatory Authority announced that it will suspend BlackBerry's instant messaging, email, web browsing and roaming services starting October 11. Saudi Arabia, meanwhile, is still allowing BlackBerry's instant messaging service to operate. Saudi authorities had planned to suspend it on August 6, but they only ended up blocking the service for a few hours. The company and government continue to work toward a compromise.
Reporters Without Borders is worried about the BlackBerry issue because the "national security" argument is just a pretext for these countries to take steps to restrict access to new technology and to tools that help with freedom of expression. In the UAE, some BlackBerry users were arrested for using BlackBerry Messenger to try to organize a protest against increased gas prices.
What really bothers these countries is their inability to monitor the communication flowing via BlackBerry's services. Indonesia, Egypt, Lebanon, Algeria and Kuwait have also voiced concern about BlackBerry's encrypted services, and it's no coincidence that some of these countries are home to a wide range of censorship measures. In Indonesia, for example, the government requires ISPs to filter out porn -- without providing them a specific list of offending sites. The inevitable result is that the ISPs cause collateral damage by blocking other websites with no direct link to pornography. This is also the case in Saudi Arabia. Filtering also slows down connection speeds throughout the country. Aside from censorship, these countries are also known for monitoring the communications and web usage of citizens.
It's therefore natural to question whether the requests for BlackBerry to offer access to its services are truly meant to fight terrorism, or if it's about finding another way to monitor the communications of citizens?
U.S. PerspectiveThese countries would do well to learn from an example in the United States. In 2003, the Department of Justice drafted legislation that would have lengthened prison sentences for people who used encryption in the commission of a crime. Defenders of encryption said it would do little to help catch terrorists, and would instead hamper the work of activists. The legislation never passed -- even though the fight against terrorism was a top priority of the government.
RIM's BlackBerry encryption isn't alone in being targeted. India plans on asking Google and Skype for similar access, which means this issue is about more than just one company's device. It's about the future of private communications in countries prone to censorship and other abuses.
Clothilde Le Coz has been working for Reporters Without Borders in Paris since 2007. She is now the Washington director for this organization, helping to promote press freedom and free speech around the world. In Paris, she was in charge of the Internet Freedom desk and worked especially on China, Iran, Egypt and Thailand. During the time she spent in Paris, she was also updating the "Handbook for Bloggers and Cyberdissidents," published in 2005. Her role is now to get the message out for readers and politicians to be aware of the constant threat journalists are submitted to in many countries.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
Here at NowSpots we're developing a new advertising platform that will let local publishers sell and publish real-time ads on their sites. In my last post here on MediaShift Idea Lab, I explained why real-time ads are a better business model for hyper-local bloggers and local publishers than AdSense or existing display ad solutions.
Since winning a 2010 Knight News Challenge award to kickstart development of our new platform, we've been busy meeting with publishers to learn more about their needs and problems. We've also been busy reading up on what's happening in the hyper-local publishing space. This week I'm going to share with you 10 sites I read on a regular basis for news, commentary, and context about business models for hyper-local bloggers and local publishers. At the end of the post are links to subscribe to them through RSS or to follow them on Twitter.
Top Ten1. MediaGazer
MediaGazer is a semi-automated aggregator for media news. It's a dead-simple, one-page site that lists the day's top media headlines from around the web alongside links to related coverage. What's great about MediaGazer is that their algorithm makes sure they get just about everything interesting each day, while their editorial touch makes sure the front page is always interesting. Not every story on MediaGazer pertains to the local news game, but anything good that does will be there.
The Nieman Journalism Lab is a blog covering journalism's efforts to figure out its future. Moreso than any other blog on the web, they are squarely focused on introducing new examples of "the new news" and figuring out what they might lead to. My only complaint is that I wish they'd post more. Just about everything they run is in my wheelhouse as a news startup guy.
3. Lost Remote
Lost Remote is focused on "hyper-local news, neighborhood blogs, and local journalism startups." Originally started by MSNBC.com's Cory Bergman, it is now edited by Steve Safran. Anything interesting that happens in the local news space that could impact hyper-local bloggers shows up here. Lost Remote is the TechCrunch of hyper-local bloggers. A must read.
4. Local Onliner
Peter Krasilovsky's Local Onliner blog is a repository of analysis pieces on the future of local online publishing that he writes for the Kelsey Group blog. As a vice president at BIA/Kelsey, where he works on local online commerce, Krasilovsky's perspective on hyper-local news, geo-targeted advertising and the like is worth a look for anyone who wants to understand the business behind local publishing.
5. Mashable's local section
Uber-blog Mashable devotes a post or two each month to the local space, and its coverage is picking up with the rise of group-buying sites such as Groupon and location-based social networks such as Foursquare and GoWalla. I filter down to just posts tagged "local" to sidestep the never-ending onslaught of headlines about Twitter.
Local SEO is a sharp blog from Andrew Shotland, an SEO consultant who specializes in local. Every hyper-local blogger needs to be aware of how findable their content is through search. Shotland's blog offers detailed rundowns of topics such as why sites like Yelp do so well in search that can help you better connect with readers through local search.
Matt McGee's Hyperlocal Blogger pulls together the latest news coverage of the hyper-local blogging space and publishes regular commentary on issues affecting neighborhood bloggers. For instance, McGee recently responded to the news that the city of Philadelphia is requiring city bloggers to buy a Business Privilege License for $300.
8. Chicago Art Magazine Transparency Pages
A bit of a hidden gem, this series of blog posts by Chicago Art Magazine's Kathryn Born covers a seven month period in late 2009 during which she launched a collection of websites focused on the Chicago art scene. In these posts, which carry a bit of a confessional tone, she discusses how hard it is to sell ads to local galleries, and her philosophy on creating quick content for the web. They're a great recounting of the trials and tribulations of starting a hyper-local web publication, and every hyper-local blogger should read them.
The blog you're reading right now has been a favorite of mine ever since I started Windy Citizen in 2008. I love the site for its great think-pieces about the future of news and updates from Knight News Challenge winners. We're excited to have a spot of our own now, and we still drop by regularly to see what's new. For hyper-local bloggers interested in new ideas about the space, this should be a regular stop.
10. eMedia Vitals
eMedia Vitals has an old-school name and takes an old-school approach to covering tactics and strategies for growing your digital business. Editor (and co-founder of TechicallyPhilly.com) Sean Blanda turned me onto the site at SXSW last year and I've since found their analysis to be relevant to people working in the local news space.
OPML File and Twitter ListThese are the sites I'm reading on a regular basis to keep up with what's happening in the hyper-local space. I'm sure you may have a few favorites of your own that I omitted. If so, feel free to share them with me in the comments below or via Twitter (I'm @bradflora).
I've created an OPML file that you can import to add the feeds for all these sites to Google Reader. You can find it here.
And if you prefer reading your news through Twitter, I've created a list over on the NowSpots Twitter account that you can follow to add these folks to your Twitter feed. You can find it here.
Happy reading!
Here at NowSpots we're developing a new advertising platform that will let local publishers sell and publish real-time ads on their sites. In my last post here on MediaShift Idea Lab, I explained why real-time ads are a better business model for hyper-local bloggers and local publishers than AdSense or existing display ad solutions.
Since winning a 2010 Knight News Challenge award to kickstart development of our new platform, we've been busy meeting with publishers to learn more about their needs and problems. We've also been busy reading up on what's happening in the hyper-local publishing space. This week I'm going to share with you 10 sites I read on a regular basis for news, commentary, and context about business models for hyper-local bloggers and local publishers. At the end of the post are links to subscribe to them through RSS or to follow them on Twitter.
Top Ten1. MediaGazer
MediaGazer is a semi-automated aggregator for media news. It's a dead-simple, one-page site that lists the day's top media headlines from around the web alongside links to related coverage. What's great about MediaGazer is that their algorithm makes sure they get just about everything interesting each day, while their editorial touch makes sure the front page is always interesting. Not every story on MediaGazer pertains to the local news game, but anything good that does will be there.
The Nieman Journalism Lab is a blog covering journalism's efforts to figure out its future. Moreso than any other blog on the web, they are squarely focused on introducing new examples of "the new news" and figuring out what they might lead to. My only complaint is that I wish they'd post more. Just about everything they run is in my wheelhouse as a news startup guy.
3. Lost Remote
Lost Remote is focused on "hyper-local news, neighborhood blogs, and local journalism startups." Originally started by MSNBC.com's Cory Bergman, it is now edited by Steve Safran. Anything interesting that happens in the local news space that could impact hyper-local bloggers shows up here. Lost Remote is the TechCrunch of hyper-local bloggers. A must read.
4. Local Onliner
Peter Krasilovsky's Local Onliner blog is a repository of analysis pieces on the future of local online publishing that he writes for the Kelsey Group blog. As a vice president at BIA/Kelsey, where he works on local online commerce, Krasilovsky's perspective on hyper-local news, geo-targeted advertising and the like is worth a look for anyone who wants to understand the business behind local publishing.
5. Mashable's local section
Uber-blog Mashable devotes a post or two each month to the local space, and its coverage is picking up with the rise of group-buying sites such as Groupon and location-based social networks such as Foursquare and GoWalla. I filter down to just posts tagged "local" to sidestep the never-ending onslaught of headlines about Twitter.
Local SEO is a sharp blog from Andrew Shotland, an SEO consultant who specializes in local. Every hyper-local blogger needs to be aware of how findable their content is through search. Shotland's blog offers detailed rundowns of topics such as why sites like Yelp do so well in search that can help you better connect with readers through local search.
Matt McGee's Hyperlocal Blogger pulls together the latest news coverage of the hyper-local blogging space and publishes regular commentary on issues affecting neighborhood bloggers. For instance, McGee recently responded to the news that the city of Philadelphia is requiring city bloggers to buy a Business Privilege License for $300.
8. Chicago Art Magazine Transparency Pages
A bit of a hidden gem, this series of blog posts by Chicago Art Magazine's Kathryn Born covers a seven month period in late 2009 during which she launched a collection of websites focused on the Chicago art scene. In these posts, which carry a bit of a confessional tone, she discusses how hard it is to sell ads to local galleries, and her philosophy on creating quick content for the web. They're a great recounting of the trials and tribulations of starting a hyper-local web publication, and every hyper-local blogger should read them.
The blog you're reading right now has been a favorite of mine ever since I started Windy Citizen in 2008. I love the site for its great think-pieces about the future of news and updates from Knight News Challenge winners. We're excited to have a spot of our own now, and we still drop by regularly to see what's new. For hyper-local bloggers interested in new ideas about the space, this should be a regular stop.
10. eMedia Vitals
eMedia Vitals has an old-school name and takes an old-school approach to covering tactics and strategies for growing your digital business. Editor (and co-founder of TechicallyPhilly.com) Sean Blanda turned me onto the site at SXSW last year and I've since found their analysis to be relevant to people working in the local news space.
OPML File and Twitter ListThese are the sites I'm reading on a regular basis to keep up with what's happening in the hyper-local space. I'm sure you may have a few favorites of your own that I omitted. If so, feel free to share them with me in the comments below or via Twitter (I'm @bradflora).
I've created an OPML file that you can import to add the feeds for all these sites to Google Reader. You can find it here.
And if you prefer reading your news through Twitter, I've created a list over on the NowSpots Twitter account that you can follow to add these folks to your Twitter feed. You can find it here.
Happy reading!
For your reading pleasure, the City Council released the minutes from the closed-door ethics hearing on Councilmember Ydanis Rodriguez’s poking incident.
Here they are below.
City Hall published an article today looking at Sen. Eric Schneiderman’s role as a deputy sheriff in Massachusetts. Schneiderman has claimed the role as a qualifying experience in law enforcement and said that he ran a drug treatment program.
Either Senator Schneiderman has lied to the public about his past and his qualifications to be attorney general or his campaign is lying about his work history now to cover his tracks,” said Eric Phillips, spokesman for DA Rices campaign.
Schneiderman’s campaign has had a monumental last few days–receiving endorsements from the New York Times, Rev. Al Sharpton, and Scott Stringer.
Update: The Schneiderman campaign is touting this statement from Schneiderman’s former boss.
STATEMENT FROM BERKSHIRE COUNTY SHERIFF CARMEN MASSIMIANO:
I can attest with 100 percent certainty that Eric Schneiderman was a Deputy Sheriff in Berkshire County in the late 1970s. When I took office on December 28th, 1978, Mr. Schneiderman was a Deputy Sheriff on the staff of the Berkshire County Sheriff’s Office, Jail and House of Correction, assigned to the Human Services Office, where he was instrumental in forming the first comprehensive drug and alcohol treatment program at the jail and house of correction.”
Former Mayor Ed Koch has come out in favor Gustavo Rivera the man who is thought to have the best chance to defeat Sen. Pedro Espada in the Democratic primary. Espada is listed on Koch’s NY Uprising site as a “hero of reform” because Espada signed Koch’s good government pledge but Koch has made his distaste for Espada pretty darn clear.
“Guys like Pedro Espada inspired the term ‘throw the bums out,’ and if there is anyone in Albany who deserves an early retirement, it’s him,” said Koch in a statement. “In order to make Albany truly work for our communities again, the reform movement needs partners like Gustavo Rivera in the legislature. I am impressed by Gustavo’s commitment to meaningful reform, to his community, and to the Bronx. He’s got the skills to get the job done and the integrity to get it done ethically, and next year his service will be needed in order to accomplish independent redistricting, responsible budgeting and ethics reform, as well as other substantive measures, and I look forward to working with him on these when he’s elected to the State Senate.”
Here is the entire release from the Rivera campaign:
ED KOCH ENDORSES GUSTAVO RIVERA
Crusading Reformer Says Rivera “Has the Leadership Albany Needs”
MORE MOMENTUM FOR INSURGENT CAMPAIGN TO DEFEAT PEDRO ESPADA
(Bronx,NY) Former New York City Mayor and founder of the reform movement New York Uprising endorsed Gustavo Rivera today, the latest in a string of endorsements for Rivera’s insurgent campaign to unseat Sen. Pedro Espada.
“Guys like Pedro Espada inspired the term ‘throw the bums out,’ and if there is anyone in Albany who deserves an early retirement, it’s him,” said Ed Koch. “In order to make Albany truly work for our communities again, the reform movement needs partners like Gustavo Rivera in the legislature. I am impressed by Gustavo’s commitment to meaningful reform, to his community, and to the Bronx. He’s got the skills to get the job done and the integrity to get it done ethically, and next year his service will be needed in order to accomplish independent redistricting, responsible budgeting and ethics reform, as well as other substantive measures, and I look forward to working with him on these when he’s elected to the State Senate.”
“Ed Koch has sparked a movement of everyday New Yorkers who are sick and tired of Albany politicians putting their interest ahead of the public’s, and I am honored that he is joining our campaign” said Gustavo Rivera. “We need leaders who will fight for our community, not take from our community, and in three weeks we will have the chance to vote for change.”
Koch’s endorsement is the latest boost to Rivera’s rapidly accelerating campaign. Rivera’s campaign is endorsed by other elected officials including: Former Bronx Borough President Fernando Ferrer; Bronx Council Members: Fernando Cabrera, Oliver Koppell, Annabel Palma; Borough President Scott Stringer; Senators: Liz Krueger, Eric Schneiderman; Assembly Members: Adriano Espaillat, Daniel O’Donnell; and Council Members: Margaret Chin, Daniel Dromm, Daniel Garodnick, Robert Jackson, Brad Lander, Jessica Lappin, Melissa Mark-Viverito and Jumaane Williams. Labor unions that endorsed Rivera include AFL-CIO, 1199 SEIU, SEIU 32BJ, Communication Workers of America Local 1180, United Food and Commercial Workers Local 1500, Freelancers Union, Hotel and Motel Trades Council and Organization of Staff Analysts. Democratic clubs endorsing Rivera include 504 Democratic Club, Benjamin Franklin Reform Democratic Club, Jim Owles Democratic Club and Stonewall Democratic Club. Progressive groups that endorsed Rivera include New Roosevelt Initiative and Working Families Party.
Want to tell all registered voters what you think about the two ballot proposals approved by the Charter Revision Commission?
Here’s your chance.
The Campaign Finance Board is asking for pro and con submissions on the charter reform proposals to include in its voter guide.
To learn more, go here.
For another, the show's creators have promised to stay very true to the original comic, which is almost always a good move. It helps that the original material is pretty damn good. (Well, technically, I think it was really good, until it wasn't. But that's probably a thought for another time.)"
(tags: zombies tv entertainment)"And while you're at it, it's probably a good idea to disable the "Friends can check me in to Places" option under the "Things others share" section of privacy controls."
(tags: facebook privacy security locative geotagging sharing social+media)
Assemblymember Richard Brodsky spent the morning in Brooklyn, campaigning at senior centers and bingo games. The assemblyman — and candidate for state attorney general — drove himself around the Bensonhurst area in a black Honda, his seatbelt unbuckled, the seatbelt warning signal beeping periodically, all while he made cell phone calls to arrange future campaign stops.
Over the course of the day he would storm into church basements where bingo games were taking place and, after being introduced by the local assemblymember, would announce semi-jokingly, “I am Richard Brodsky. I am a fantastic person and great politician and I am running for attorney general.” Seniors would cheer when he was introduced as the man who “fought the MTA.” At each stop he would end his speech quickly so the bingo games could resume in a speedy fashion.
Brodsky said the campaign has been humbling, because despite his many years in the legislature, he has to introduce himself to a whole new set of voters who are not familiar with his accomplishments.
The hot issue of the day was the building of the Islamic center near ground zero. A number of seniors approached Brodsky and demanded to know his stance. Brodsky told them what he has been saying since he was asked the question months ago at an ABC debate: “The mosque being built in that area is offensive to me.” Brodsky told the seniors that if elected attorney general he would defend the right of the mosque to be there, but he would rather it was built somewhere else.
“They are trying to build the thing on a graveyard,” said Murray Redlitz, who was enjoying the music and lunch at the Sephardic Multi Service Senior Center on Kings Highway. “If we had recovered all the bodies it would be different,” he said. Brodsky told Redlitz he found the mosque plan “distasteful.” Afterward, Brodsky said his stand on the matter differentiates from the pack of Democratic candidates.
While Brodsky seems to be playing more of the moderate, one of his opponents, Sen. Eric Schneiderman, has been touting his own credentials as a progressive.
Earlier this evening Schneiderman stood on the steps of City Hall and received the endorsement of Rev. Al Sharpton. Schneiderman has been directing the voters’ focus to his role in reforming the Rockefeller drug laws, his stance on illegal guns, his legislation that counts prisoners where they live instead of where they are imprisoned and his slogan: “equal, progressive and independent justice.”
On Monday, Schneiderman spoke at a forum on gun violence in Albany and talked about forming a coalition to combat the gun lobby.
On the mosque issue, Schneiderman has stood with Mayor Michael Bloomberg in supporting the developer’s right to build the mosque in the current proposed location.
The endorsements for Eric Schneiderman continue. Just a few minutes ago, Al Sharpton announced on the City Hall steps that he “unequivocally” and “enthusiastically” backed the state senator for state attorney general.
Apparently the announcement had been slated to take place later but Sharpton is about to leave to prepare for Saturday’s Reclaim the Dream march in Washington so made his declaration today.
Now that the city’s scores on the state’s standardized tests no longer look quite so rosy, Chancellor Joel Klein has started touting other figures — the National Assessment of Educational Performance (which he once largely shunned) and the high school graduation rate. Weve closed the achievement gap with respect to graduation rates, Klein told Brian Lehrer last month.
A new report by the Schott Foundation, though, might give Klein some pause. The study looks particularly at the graduation rate for black males and finds, that in New York City, only 28 percent graduated with Regents or advanced Regents diplomas in 2007/8. The gap between black and white young men in New York City is less than it is nationally but only, the report says, because of the “low graduation rate of white male students.”
On the National Assessment of Educational Progress for reading, black fourth grade boys fare better in New York City than in the nation as a whole and in eight grade they are about on a par. The New York fourth graders also outperform the national average for math.
But by eight grade, New York black males have fallen behind the national level in math. More than half — 53 percent — of the students score below basic in math, leading one to wonder how they will fare with the math Regents tests in high school.
In all instances, the national and city achievement gap persists. In the nation as a whole, for example, 78 percent of white males graduated from high school in 2007-8; for black males, it was 47 percent. In the city, half of white males got Regents or advanced Regents diplomas that year, compared to 28 percent of black male students.
To look at the graduation gap another way, as this table on Gotham Schools does, about 53 percent of black and Asians — male and female — graduated in 2009, compared to slightly over three quarters of whites and Asians, for a gap of 22.5 percent.
Last month, KQED News in San Francisco dramatically expanded the scope of its news coverage with a new website, an increase from six to 16 local radio newscasts and the addition of eight news staffers, including six producers/reporters, a developer and a social media specialist. Its expansion will continue over the next several months (look for a new news blog in the next couple of months).
The changes at KQED reflect a system-wide emphasis on experimentation and news expansion by public media outlets. Since the release of the Knight Commission's report, Informing Communities - Sustaining Democracy in the Digital Age, last October, station-based news projects have grown substantially. Large, cross-platform projects are becoming more prevalent, especially among public media organizations with the resources to produce them. See, for example, some of the innovative work being done by outlets like WYNC and WBUR.
Cross-Platform Coverage + CollaborationKQED's news site combines coverage from KQED Public Radio, KQED Public Television, and KQEDnews.org. In addition to cross-platform news coverage within KQED, the site aims to provide seamless integration of local, national, and international coverage (thanks to extensive integration of NPR's API); in-depth news and commentary (including investigative reporting); and real-time weather and traffic updates. Eventually, the site will incorporate additional interactive features to make news stories more dynamic and relevant to Northern California residents.
According to Tim Olson, KQED's vice president of digital media and education, the expanded site is part of an overall increased push in news coverage. This shift is not the result of a new dedicated source of funding. Rather, said Olson, "It was something [KQED president and CEO] John Boland wanted to do for a long time. We restructured the budget to accommodate these changes."
The new site builds on KQED's history of successful collaborative initiatives. For example, KQED Quest is a "multimedia series exploring Northern California science, environment and nature." Quest integrates radio, television, and online coverage in a site that features maps, a community blog, and hands-on explorations.
KQED News also already has a wealth of in-depth news reports that integrate social media and Web 2.0 technologies. Take, for example, Climate Watch, which provides continuous coverage of climate-related news and incorporates mapping projects such as Reservoir Watch, which tracks the state's water reservoir levels. There's also California's Water Bond - Where Would the Money Go?, which explores the distribution of funds in recent California water-related legislation.
Another special feature, Governing California, invites users to learn about California government. This feature includes a California Budget Challenge game that allows users to submit their thoughts on spending decisions, and an interactive timeline of reform history in the state.
Additionally, "Health Dialogues," an exploration of health and health care in the state, includes an interactive map of health issues in rural California and Healthy Ideas, an eight-week special project that invited health care professionals to share their ideas on health care reform.
KQED News also incorporates maps, Twitter feeds, blogs, podcasts, video and user commenting on its news stories. KQED radio dedicates a portion of airtime to listener feedback, and the integrated site includes Perspectives, a section that provides two-minute audio commentaries from listeners each day.
Listen to this recent Perspective audio report from a KQED listener:
Traffic Increase & ChallengesSince the launch of the expanded site, KQED News has seen a 10-fold increase in the number of users, an impressive feat considering that, according to this article in the San Francisco Chronicle, "Measured by audience size and budget, KQED is the largest public station in the country with TV and radio under one roof." KQED is growing in terms of partnerships as well: The organization currently has ongoing partnerships with upwards of 25 other news outlets, including organizations like the Center for Investigative Reporting, Youth Radio, and ProPublica, and this number is growing.
The expansion is not without its challenges, however. KQED's clear strength is in radio news, but, as Olson noted, "text and images are required for a robust online news presence." Improving the text on the site is a major priority, and as the site continues to expand, this emphasis will grow as well. Olson noted that NPR has gone through a similar transition over the past few years, which was addressed by gradually training reporting staff, and adding photo editors and copy editors.
Another challenge is balancing the "one-stop shopping mall" all-news aggregator approach with the "hyper-targeted topic verticals" approach. It's sometimes difficult for sites to combine both of these elements, and KQED is currently testing both approaches, in addition to some of the more targeted projects listed above.
Olson said the expanded site is "very much just the first step" in overall growth. In addition to a news blog, "News Fix," launching shortly, a mobile version of the site is currently in production, and will be released in the fall. "We're in it for the long haul," said Olson. "We're just getting started."
Katie Donnelly is Associate Research Director at the Center for Social Media at American University where she blogs about the future of public media. With a background in media literacy education, Katie previously worked as a Research Associate at Temple University's Media Education Lab in Philadelphia. When she's not researching media, Katie spends her time working in the environmental field and blogging about food.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
Newly minted Councilmember Ydanis Rodriguez will be officially stripped of his chairmanship of the Higher Education Committee this afternoon after the council’s Standards and Ethics Committee found he had poked a staff member during an argument over the budget.
Rodriguez did not appear at the final hearing on the matter this afternoon, but he sent a letter accepting the punishment, a council spokesperson said. Earlier this month, Rodriguez asserted his innocence, and said he would lobby other members to vote the ethics committee’s recommendation down.
Daily Politics reports the councilmember just wants to put the matter to rest.
Rodriguez will be allowed to resume his chairmanship once he apologizes to the staff member and completes an employee relations program.
The letter is on its way, and we will be posting it shortly.
UPDATE — Here it is:
Kenya is moving towards greater democracy and more transparent governance thanks to the recent constitutional referendum that received 70 percent "yes" votes.
The new constitution, which is scheduled to be signed into law on Friday, replaces the one drafted during Kenya's colonial era. It includes a Bill of Rights, which states that all Kenyans should have access to clean water, decent housing, basic sanitation and quality food. The new constitution aims to decentralize political power, increase government accountability, create more robust checks and balances against corruption, and foster a move towards fairer distribution of wealth.
President Mwai Kibaki said, "The historic journey that we began over 20 years ago is now coming to a happy end." In reality, forming a new constitution is only the beginning of another long road which the country will need to travel.
However, at least Kenya is moving in the right direction. Here in Zimbabwe, our constitutional reform process is lagging behind. But I think there is a lot we can learn from the role that media played in the Kenyan process.
Lessons from KenyaZimbabwe's constitutional reform process should be an opportunity for meaningful public participation. Unfortunately, the process remains marred by intimidation and violence, including the alleged re-establishment of torture bases in farming communities where there are a high number of war veterans and youth militia.
I could not help but compare coverage of the Kenyan referendum to the Zimbabwean constitution-making process and reflect on what we can learn from Kenya. Although the countries' circumstances are not totally comparable, we certainly can't afford to let the Zimbabwean constitution-making process drag on for 20 years, as it did in Kenya!
The first factor that looms large is the fundamental role that a vigilant civil society plays in provoking public participation and debate, promoting state transparency and accountability, maintaining pressure and ultimately achieving change. A recent blog post on Pambazuka discusses the pivotal contributions that organizations such as the Association of Professional Societies in East Africa, Kenya Land Alliance, Kikuyus for Change and Kenyan Asian Forum made during the Kenyan constitution-making process.
The post, by Cottrell Ghai and Pal Ghai, also discusses the likelihood that civil organizations will continue to offer invaluable assistance, particularly "at a time when the capacity within the government is limited." This is further amplified because trade unions -- which uphold the constitution through their political and economic work -- are non-existent in Kenya.
The second factor is the role that a vibrant media has in driving reform. According to an opinion piece in the Washington Times, both civil society and the media have played a part in the constitution-making process in Kenya and will continue to do so.
"Kenya is blessed with free and vibrant media and a vigilant civil society that relentlessly shines light into all corners of government activity," it read. "This will heighten scrutiny in the use of public finances and resources by the executive and legislature."
Although it is unlikely that the Kenyan media are fully objective or free from political influence (which country's media is?), the Economist and the BBC have said that Kenya is more liberalized than most African countries. Various analysts have also stated that since independence the Kenyan media has been an important check on government power.
New Media ToolsNew media tools were also used during the constitution-making process in Kenya. A customized version of Ushahidi, a Knight grantee, was developed for use in Kenya. Called Uchaguzi, which means decision in Kiswahili, the collaborative deployment was supported by the Constitution & Reform Education Consortium (CRECO), Social Development Network (SODNET), Uraia, HIVOS and Twaweza. During the referendum, the shortcode 3018 received over 1,400 SMS messages from around the country that reported incidents of electoral irregularities, violence and peace activities.
Similarly, The Uwiano Peace Platform was established to prevent violence during the Kenyan referendum. The system took advantage of mobile technology to get up-to-date information "on tensions, hate speech, incitement, threats and violence" from citizens nationwide. The system allowed for free SMSes from the public to be sent to the Uwiano secretariat. Analysts then verified, mapped and relayed the data on to rapid response mechanisms for quick intervention. The public knew how to report incidents because the platform was advertised in the electronic media, print media and Electoral Commission materials.
It would have been interesting if a new media tool like Freedom Fone, our project, had been added to the mix to capture citizen reports in an audio format.
A vigilant civil society, vibrant media and new media tools have played a pivotal role in Kenya's constitution-making process. We must not underestimate the value of these organizations and tools during our process in Zimbabwe as we continue to strive towards the formation of a new constitution and a more democratic nation.
Kenya is moving towards greater democracy and more transparent governance thanks to the recent constitutional referendum that received 70 percent "yes" votes.
The new constitution, which is scheduled to be signed into law on Friday, replaces the one drafted during Kenya's colonial era. It includes a Bill of Rights, which states that all Kenyans should have access to clean water, decent housing, basic sanitation and quality food. The new constitution aims to decentralize political power, increase government accountability, create more robust checks and balances against corruption, and foster a move towards fairer distribution of wealth.
President Mwai Kibaki said, "The historic journey that we began over 20 years ago is now coming to a happy end." In reality, forming a new constitution is only the beginning of another long road which the country will need to travel.
However, at least Kenya is moving in the right direction. Here in Zimbabwe, our constitutional reform process is lagging behind. But I think there is a lot we can learn from the role that media played in the Kenyan process.
Lessons from KenyaZimbabwe's constitutional reform process should be an opportunity for meaningful public participation. Unfortunately, the process remains marred by intimidation and violence, including the alleged re-establishment of torture bases in farming communities where there are a high number of war veterans and youth militia.
I could not help but compare coverage of the Kenyan referendum to the Zimbabwean constitution-making process and reflect on what we can learn from Kenya. Although the countries' circumstances are not totally comparable, we certainly can't afford to let the Zimbabwean constitution-making process drag on for 20 years, as it did in Kenya!
The first factor that looms large is the fundamental role that a vigilant civil society plays in provoking public participation and debate, promoting state transparency and accountability, maintaining pressure and ultimately achieving change. A recent blog post on Pambazuka discusses the pivotal contributions that organizations such as the Association of Professional Societies in East Africa, Kenya Land Alliance, Kikuyus for Change and Kenyan Asian Forum made during the Kenyan constitution-making process.
The post, by Cottrell Ghai and Pal Ghai, also discusses the likelihood that civil organizations will continue to offer invaluable assistance, particularly "at a time when the capacity within the government is limited." This is further amplified because trade unions -- which uphold the constitution through their political and economic work -- are non-existent in Kenya.
The second factor is the role that a vibrant media has in driving reform. According to an opinion piece in the Washington Times, both civil society and the media have played a part in the constitution-making process in Kenya and will continue to do so.
"Kenya is blessed with free and vibrant media and a vigilant civil society that relentlessly shines light into all corners of government activity," it read. "This will heighten scrutiny in the use of public finances and resources by the executive and legislature."
Although it is unlikely that the Kenyan media are fully objective or free from political influence (which country's media is?), the Economist and the BBC have said that Kenya is more liberalized than most African countries. Various analysts have also stated that since independence the Kenyan media has been an important check on government power.
New Media ToolsNew media tools were also used during the constitution-making process in Kenya. A customized version of Ushahidi, a Knight grantee, was developed for use in Kenya. Called Uchaguzi, which means decision in Kiswahili, the collaborative deployment was supported by the Constitution & Reform Education Consortium (CRECO), Social Development Network (SODNET), Uraia, HIVOS and Twaweza. During the referendum, the shortcode 3018 received over 1,400 SMS messages from around the country that reported incidents of electoral irregularities, violence and peace activities.
Similarly, The Uwiano Peace Platform was established to prevent violence during the Kenyan referendum. The system took advantage of mobile technology to get up-to-date information "on tensions, hate speech, incitement, threats and violence" from citizens nationwide. The system allowed for free SMSes from the public to be sent to the Uwiano secretariat. Analysts then verified, mapped and relayed the data on to rapid response mechanisms for quick intervention. The public knew how to report incidents because the platform was advertised in the electronic media, print media and Electoral Commission materials.
It would have been interesting if a new media tool like Freedom Fone, our project, had been added to the mix to capture citizen reports in an audio format.
A vigilant civil society, vibrant media and new media tools have played a pivotal role in Kenya's constitution-making process. We must not underestimate the value of these organizations and tools during our process in Zimbabwe as we continue to strive towards the formation of a new constitution and a more democratic nation.
There is a "look around" button that lets users change the angle of view and take a new look at what's under the water.
Another tool added to Google Earth 1.1 is what Google calls the "Explore the Ocean" layer. This layer offers up a collection of photos and videos from contributors from all around the world.
(tags: google maps mobile tools android environment)"Zamzar supports conversion between a wide variety of different file formats. We're adding support for new formats all the time -
if there's a format that you'd like us to support why not
contact us and we'll do our best to add it."
Somehow I cannot find the page you want. Go Back to Copyrighteous?
Rising Voices is pleased to announce that our Introduction to Global Citizen Media Guide is now available in two more languages, thanks to the efforts of Elena Ignatova and the Metamorphosis Foundation based in Skopje in the Republic of Macedonia. Elena has been a part of the Global Voices Online community since 2008 and is the editor of Global Voices in Macedonian.
The Guide can now be downloaded in the languages of Macedonian and Albanian, adding to other versions in English, Spanish, French, Mongolian, and Bangla.
We will be adding more languages in the coming months. If you are interested in helping to translate our two existing Guides into other languages, please contact us.
It’s official.
New York is among nine states and the District of Columbia that won funding in the second round of the U.S. Department of Education’s Race to the Top competition, the department has announced.
Although the budget is not yet final, New York state will get about $700 million. That money, though, cannot go to reverse budget cuts but instead will pay to implement some 27 initiatives set forth in the state’s plan, such as helping troubled schools and developing a statewide curriculum. For better or worse, the money will go to expand or extend some programs adopted by the city — including some that have been controversial, such as the Leadership Academy for principals and the ARIS data system,
The city anticipates that it will get $250 million to $300 million.
After last month’s dismal news about inflated test scores and cavernous achievement gaps, politicians raced to hail this success — and claim credit for it.
Mayor Michael Bloomberg, for example, issued a statement saying the award is “a testament to what weve accomplished in our city schools over the last eight years.”
Sen. Eric Schneiderman was in Albany last night to take part in a discussion on gun violence. Schneiderman discussed a number of social justice issues with the crowd that gathered at the main branch of the Albany Public Library. Schneiderman was not his normal hyperactive self. He seemed a bit tired–ready for a Red Bull.
But Schneiderman’s campaign for Attorney General received a gigantic shot in the arm on Friday when the New York Times endorsed him.
“People who I haven’t spoken to in the last six months found my number again,” Schneiderman joked last night, before noting that he was proud of the endorsement and felt it would be followed by a lot more support.
Today the Citizens Union (whose sister organization publishes Gotham Gazette) endorsed Schneiderman, as did the United Federation of Teachers.
Here are the releases from Citizens Union:
CITIZENS UNION
BACKS STATE SENATOR ERIC SCHNEIDERMAN
IN DEMOCRATIC PRIMARY FOR ATTORNEY GENERAL
Long-time Advocacy for Reform and Independent Political Experience Make Schneiderman the Best Choice in a Talented Pool of Candidates
Citizens Union today announced its support for Eric Schneiderman by “preferring” him over the four other strong and appealing candidates in the September 14th Democratic party primary for the Office of New York State Attorney General. Schneiderman, a state senator representing parts of Washington Heights and Riverdale in Manhattan and the Bronx, is an independent reform leader in state government who has the most suitable experience and presents the most compelling vision for how he would serve as attorney general.
“Eric Schneiderman has been a consistent and independent force for change in state government, regardless of whether he was in the minority or majority party in the State Senate. A champion for a more transparent and accountable government that treats all New Yorkers with dignity and respect, Senator Schneiderman has not just talked about reform these past few years, but forcefully – and at times successfully – challenged the status quo, even when there were political risks,” said Citizens Union Executive Director Dick Dadey. “Schneiderman exercises independence, is politically experienced, and possesses integrity. His strong command of the issues and ability to seize opportunities in seeking change make him the most qualified of the five Democrats running for attorney general,” concluded Dadey.
Citizens Union is impressed with Schneiderman’s experience as a state legislator in which he has built coalitions and navigated the legislative process. That experience will help him effectively exercise the authority of the office of Attorney General to further advance a needed agenda of change and reform in Albany. He was the first among the candidates to raise with Citizens Union the importance of pushing the current governor to grant original jurisdiction to the attorney general to investigate and prosecute political corruption cases, a prerequisite for creating a better ethical climate in Albany.
Citizens Union views favorably Schneidermans plans to place a public integrity officer in each regional office of the attorney general to root out local wrongdoing, which seemed the most workable of other proposals suggested. His proposals to more aggressively use the False Claims Act, which Schneiderman strengthened in the legislature this past session, and engage whistleblowers to hold those accountable who defraud state or local governments also held appeal for Citizens Union. Schneiderman intends to push many reforms Citizens Union advocated for in the legislature through the attorney general’s bully pulpit and the office’s ability to introduce program bills, including public financing of campaigns and giving the attorney general the ability to permanently enforce election and campaign finance law.
“Whether challenging legislative leaders to achieve the most significant reforms to empower rank-and-file legislators or bringing together members from both sides of the aisle to ensure all senators exercise ethical conduct that sets a high standard, Eric Schneiderman has been one of those who has led the way in battling the dysfunction that plagues Albany,” said Peter Sherwin, Chair of Citizens Union’s Board of Directors. “He possesses the commitment and conviction to fight public corruption and continue advocating for reform on a larger stage and with the greater authority that comes with the Office of Attorney General.”
The preference of Citizens Union for Schneiderman in the primary was decided by a lengthy evaluation, full discussion and vote of the Board of Directors following interviews of all candidates by a team comprised of board members and members of Citizens Union’s Local Candidates Committee. The evaluation included a thorough review of a broad ranging questionnaire completed by the candidates, and an assessment taken after all five participated in the candidates debate held by Citizens Union last month.
John Horan, Chair of the Citizens Union Local Candidates Committee said, “Citizens Union was impressed with all the candidates in the race, each of whom brought their own unique skills and strengths. The committee felt that any one of them would serve the state well, and the challenge became choosing the candidate whose combination of skills and experience would best fit the office and the serve the people of New York. We believe we do that in supporting Schneiderman.”
The evaluation committee was especially stirred by Assemblyman Richard Brodsky’s creative and innovative vision for the office, and his ability to foresee unique ways in which to leverage the power of the office to maximize change. Brodsky’s record of enacting reform of seemingly impenetrable institutions like the state’s many byzantine public authorities and tackling complex processes like energy pricing made Citizens Union consider supporting his candidacy very seriously. He is one of the strongest candidates among an exceptional group, but Citizens Union feels his experience in building coalitions and advocating for our broader reform agenda is exceeded by Senator Eric Schneiderman. Should he not win election as attorney general, Albany will be all the poorer for not having Brodsky in the legislature, where he is a natural talent and effective reformer.
Eric Dinallo showed impressive knowledge of the inner workings of the Office of Attorney General, having creatively used the Martin Act while serving as Assistant Attorney General under Eliot Spitzer, that would serve him and the state well. His efforts to obtain original jurisdiction in public corruption cases for the office from the governor has been second to none. With a track record in leading an agency as Superintendent of Insurance during a time of great financial tumult when a smart mind and steady hand were needed, Dinallo also possesses significant management skills that would also serve him well should he win.
Sean Coffey is a newcomer to running for office, but nonetheless is a dynamic and focused candidate. Citizens Union is pleased with the way he has embraced the reform agenda and prioritized it in his campaign, and by extension made it more visible in the public debate. His service to the country, work as a trial lawyer, and grasp of the issues suggest he could be a strong attorney general. Citizens Union’s decision not to prefer Coffey was due in part to our concern over the disconnect created by him and his firm’s involvement in making legal political contributions to comptroller candidates across the country and in New York – some of whom later awarded state contracts to his firm – and his pledge to reduce the influence of money in politics in Albany.
Kathleen Rice, the district attorney for Nassau County who has implemented innovative programs, impressed the committee with her ability to connect her experience and accomplishments to how she would be a successful attorney general. Rice also gave a very thorough account of what the Office of Attorney General would look like under her leadership. Citizens Union saw firsthand how her clarity and sense of purpose has helped her become a successful prosecutor. Citizens Union, however, found it difficult as a good government group to back her given her absence from voting throughout much of her adult life. Her answer to why she did not vote for eighteen years did not dissuade us of our belief that a candidate for statewide office should be setting a strong example for consistent civic responsibility. We also felt there are other candidates in the race who expressed a stronger commitment to seek and obtain from the governor the power to handle public corruption.
Citizens Union’s preference is only for the Democratic Party primary election. It will re-examine the race when the Democratic nominee is selected by the voters and faces off against Dan Donovan, District Attorney for Staten Island and Republican nominee for attorney general, making a final decision regarding whom to endorse in the General Election in mid-October.
Here is the release from Schneiderman’s office regarding the endorsement by the UFT:
UNITED FEDERATION OF TEACHERS ENDORSES
ERIC SCHNEIDERMAN FOR ATTORNEY GENERAL
Demonstrating Growing Momentum, 200,000-Strong Union Becomes the Latest In A Slew of Recent Endorsements for Eric Schneiderman
NEW YORK CITY – In the wake of endorsements from the New York Times and Buffalo Mayor Byron Brown, the United Federation of Teachers (UFT) today endorsed Eric Schneiderman for Attorney General, demonstrating the growing momentum propelling the campaign. With 200,000 members, the UFT becomes the latest in a growing list of over 100 progressive leaders, labor unions and grassroots organizations that are supporting Schneiderman for Attorney General.
“We need an Attorney General who will be an advocate for equality and justice for all New Yorkers,” said UFT President Michael Mulgrew. “Eric Schneiderman is that advocate. Eric has spent his entire career fighting for everyday New Yorkers, showing an unparalleled commitment to working people, progressive justice and public education. He’s the right choice for teachers, and the right choice for New York.”
“I am honored to be endorsed by New York’s teachers,” said Eric Schneiderman. “I will have no greater priority as Attorney General than to fight every single day for equality and justice for all New Yorkers. Over the past few weeks, I’ve been proud of the diverse coalition of progressive leaders and advocates that has come forward to support my campaign. Together, we will build a safer, stronger and more prosperous state.”
The UFT represents approximately 200,000 people, 87,000 teachers and 19,000 classroom paraprofessionals, along with school secretaries, attendance teachers, guidance counselors, psychologists, social workers, education evaluators, nurses, laboratory technicians, adult education teachers, 28,000 family day care providers and 53,000 retired members.
With widespread support from a broad and diverse coalition of progressive New Yorkers and the unanimous endorsement of the state’s largest labor union, 1199/SEIU United Healthcare East, the largest private-sector union, 32BJ, NARAL Pro-Choice New York and Citizen Action, momentum is growing for Schneiderman’s campaign to be the state’s next Attorney General.
To date, Schneiderman has earned the endorsement of over 100 progressive leaders, including U.S. Representatives Yvette Clarke, Jerry Nadler and Jose Serrano and a host of prominent community activists, and grassroots organizations.
I've written for MediaShift several times about journalistic collaboration between news organizations, such as the Climate Desk project, for example, or Public Media's EconomyStory. But there's another kind of collaboration that's critical to the future of journalism: Collaboration between a news organization and the community it serves.
This kind of collaboration is critical for a few reasons. First, as anyone who reads MediaShift surely knows, the line between consumers of news and producers of news continues to blur. Community blogger expertise may match that of a newspaper's Metro columnist, and the people watching the evening news post their own video of news events to YouTube. Just as formerly competitive newsrooms are beginning to work together, as limited resources encourage the setting aside of differences in pursuit of a superior news product, news organizations need to rethink their relationships with the communities they serve.
In addition, finding efficient ways to harness and apply community expertise is increasingly critical to a news organization's ability to compete. Projects like Minnesota Public Radio's Public Insight Network have emerged to leverage the power of networks to source stories and collect quotes.
KCET Departures
One example of community/news provider collaboration that really captures my imagination is Departures, an online documentary series from KCET Los Angeles. What sets Departures apart, for me, is the passion and dedication of its producer, Juan Devis. Devis is not just passionate about community collaboration in the abstract, or obedient to the trendy importance of listening to community members; rather, he is passionate about Los Angeles, about the people of Los Angeles, and about bringing the neighborhoods of the city to life in an authentic and compelling way online.
"No one knows Los Angeles as well as the organizations and individuals working and living in the area," Devis wrote to me via email. "By bringing them in and engaging them in every step of the content development process, Departures provides an authentic, accurate and fresh take on the issues and stories most affecting the city."
For example, Devis and his team produced a recent installment on Chinatown in partnership with the Chinese American Museum and the Chinatown Service Center Youth Council, providing multimedia production training to student reporters, who in turn contributed stories to the series.

There is also a concerted effort to capture stories from a diverse array of citizens in order to paint a multi-layered portrait of a neighborhood, rather than extrapolating truths about a place based on scarce citizen interaction. For the Chinatown installment, for example, Devis and crew spoke to hundreds of people from the neighborhood, ranging from community activists Munson Kwok and Irvin Lai, to Congresswoman Judy Chu, to journalists Ann Summa and Jeff Spurrier, who covered the Chinatown Punk Scene in the 1980s.
The name "Departures" is meant to evoke the idea of traveling within your own city -- discovering new neighborhoods and cultures with fresh eyes, from Chinatown to Compton Creek to Venice Beach's Abbot Kinney Boulevard. Devis calls the series a love letter to the city. The content of Departures, then, is more evocative than provocative; it's meant to conjure a sense of place, and replicate the experience of talking to the people in a neighborhood -- Mr. Rogers would be proud -- rather than analyze issues or draw conclusions.
Non-Linear Storytelling and Falling ShortIn fact, by design, Departures encourages users to form their own opinions of the city and its people.
"When you're tied to a linear narrative, you're tied to a point of view," Devis said in a video about the project. Departures is decidedly non-linear, with a series of interactive maps and murals serving as gateways to a collection of audio, video, and text stories. This approach to navigation encourages users to explore each installment the way they might explore a physical neighborhood, wandering down a series of streets and alleyways.
I admire this concept, though in practice, navigating the Departures site is not quite immersive. (I should confess that I used to write a column about intersections between documentary storytelling and the web, and have strong opinions about multimedia storytelling.) The series home page features individual stories from the latest installment in the manner of a traditional news website; I'd rather begin at a visually evocative map of the city that lets me "travel" to and from individual neighborhoods. While there is a central Departures map, it's a traditional map interface with pin points that correspond to the locations of individual stories, rather than a visual interface that evokes a sense of place.
The stories in Departures "should not be the ends unto themselves," Devis said, "but seeds: A context for engagement."
But while his team's real-world, behind-the-scenes engagement with communities is clear, online engagement with Departures seems surprisingly low. The series home page features a "From the Community" box, a design decision that seems at odds with the series' core dedication to stories from the community. The Community box features few comments, and I did not see comments integrated with the stories throughout the site. Given the series ethos, shouldn't community members' responses to the stories -- in other words, the dialogue around the stories -- be an equal part of the storytelling experience?
Expanding DeparturesWhen I asked Devis about the interplay of Departures with KCET's more traditional news programming, he noted that now that the series has matured, "it offers a concise template that the station itself can follow, so KCET has started to incorporate some Departures elements in its more traditional media spaces." Devis also shared that beginning in 2011, his team will begin creating a series of daily TV interstitials tied to Departures. "We anticipate that, by that time, the media production teams (at KCET) will overlap in ways that we have not seen before," he said.
Devis talks about wanting to expand Departures beyond Los Angeles, and I hope he can do it. I'd love to see this kind of artistic representation of local culture depicting communities nationwide. Sure, the site itself could be improved -- but what site couldn't be? We need more rich, textured representation of local community culture, and I'd take a flawed but passionate, visionary approach over a more tepid effort any day. I worry, though, that replication will require reliance on templates, which will inhibit the site's ability to be more immersive.
"Journalism and news organizations need to become context providers," Devis said. "That is, they need to create and provide spaces -- structures -- into which users and community members are invited as full participants, and from which meaningful stories can emerge."
I agree, and I hope other news organizations will be inspired by Devis' example.
******
What examples have you seen of collaboration between news organizations and local communities? Share your thoughts in the comments below.
Image of Chinatown sign courtesy of Flickr user 7-how-7
The former editorial director of PBS.org, Amanda Hirsch is a digital media consultant who recently managed the EconomyStory collaboration, a journalistic partnership between 12 public media organizations. Learn more about Amanda's background at amandahirsch.com and follow her on Twitter at @publicmediagirl.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
This just in from the city Charter Revision Commission.
Here are the exact questions that will appear on the ballot this fall. All of the proposals have been consolidated into two questions — which has been the subject of some controversy.
Enjoy!
City Question 1. Term Limits: The proposal would amend the City Charter to:
Reduce from three to two the maximum number of consecutive full terms that can be served by elected city officials; and
Make this change in term limits applicable only to those city officials who were first elected at or after the 2010 general election; and
Prohibit the City Council from altering the term limits of elected city officials then serving in office.
Shall this proposal be adopted?City Question 2. Elections and Government Administration: The proposal would amend the City Charter to:
Disclosure of Independent Campaign Spending: Require public disclosure of expenditures made by entities and individuals independent from candidates to influence the outcome of a city election or referendum;
Ballot Access: Generally reduce the number of petition signatures needed by candidates for city elective office to appear on a ballot;
Voter Assistance and Campaign Finance Board: Merge voter assistance functions, including a reconstituted Voter Assistance Advisory Committee, into the Campaign Finance Board, and change when Campaign Finance Board member terms begin;
Conflicts of Interest Law: Require all public servants to receive conflicts of interest training, raise the maximum fine for a public servant who violates the Citys conflicts of interest law, and allow the City to recover any benefits obtained from such violations;
City Administrative Tribunals: Authorize the Mayor to direct the merger of administrative tribunals and adjudications into the Office of Administrative Trials and Hearings and permit the Department of Consumer Affairs to adjudicate all violations issued by that department;
City Reporting Requirements and Advisory Bodies: Create a commission to review requirements for reports and advisory bodies and waive the requirements, subject to City Council review, where the commission finds they are not of continuing value; and
Map for Facility Siting: Include in the Citys facilities siting map those transportation and waste management facilities operated by or for governmental entities, or by private entities that provide comparable services.Shall this proposal be adopted?
In my last post about TileMill, I outlined some of our general plans and the background for why we’re working on this project to help make it easier for people to design very custom maps online. One question that we get a lot from people who are new to the GIS space is, “When would I need this? How could I hope to improve on what (fill in the blank: Google/Bing/etc.) make available?”
The answer is that it’s all about the details of the specific communications goal you want to accomplish. In many cases, Google and Bing maps are great. In other situations, having additional control over map design is crucial to reach your goal (or at least improve your delivery). To get a sense of the kind of situations where custom designed maps really make a difference, I’ll share a story about some maps that we made for our hometown of Washington, D.C.
In 2008 the Washington, D.C. Office of the Chief Technology Officer (OCTO) released a large set of municipal datasets to the public to coincide with the original “Apps for __” contest, Apps for Democracy. Included in this data were ESRI shapefiles, a great format for GIS pros but hard to work with for anyone else. Using this same geodata, we created three very different custom maps, each for different use cases.
StumbleSafelyThe first was for a website we called StumbleSafely. It was a bit tongue-in-cheek — the idea was that the site could help users see the latest crimes near their favorite bars so they could be aware of problem areas. Because we weren’t actually helping people map out navigation paths to get home, the real communications point we wanted to hit with the map was showing crime in proximity to bars and subway stations. Street names didn’t matter as much, and neither did highlighting any other kinds of businesses.
The D.C. police department was publishing crime data that we could scrape and add to the site to show crime locations, and the Alcoholic Beverage Regulation Administration was publishing liquor license data that we could use to visualize density points on a map that corresponded to areas with lots of bars. For the base map itself, though, we needed little else in the way of data to accomplish our purpose. We were able to take shapefiles for roads, parks, and river features in the city and do a very low key map design that fit the aesthetic of the site and contained no extraneous information. People familiar with the city could quickly look at it and see right away what the crime situation was like in their favorite areas, without any other distractions.

Another example was a very similar map, but for a very different use case. DC Bikes was designed on the same platform as StumbleSafely to provide a resource to the D.C. cycling community. It showed bike thefts, bike lanes, and bike shops around the city.
For the map on that site, we again wanted to show crime data and were able to take the same basic approach to StumbleSafely for the base map design, but there was one additional feature we needed — bike lanes. These were made available as a shape file from the D.C. government as well, so we were able to quickly repurpose the map from Stumble Safely, tweak the colors to match a new design, and highlight the bike lanes in a new color so they stood out. For the cycling community, we were again able to show just the more relevant information on the map and omit any distractions.

Finally, we wanted a much higher level of detail for a different project. Rather than omit details from our map in this case, we wanted to pack it full of details about public infrastructure. Not just buildings and roads, but even crosswalks, medians, and topography lines. The map we released for the public, “DC Nightvision,” includes all of these details, each of which are again published by the D.C. government as shapefiles.

With the increasing availability of shapefiles like the ones mentioned here, TileMill will make it easy for end users without a lot of GIS training to churn out custom maps that meet their unique communications needs. With the data in hand and user-friendly tools to work with it freely available, creativity will be the only limit for creating great custom maps.
In my last post about TileMill, I outlined some of our general plans and the background for why we’re working on this project to help make it easier for people to design very custom maps online. One question that we get a lot from people who are new to the GIS space is, “When would I need this? How could I hope to improve on what (fill in the blank: Google/Bing/etc.) make available?”
The answer is that it’s all about the details of the specific communications goal you want to accomplish. In many cases, Google and Bing maps are great. In other situations, having additional control over map design is crucial to reach your goal (or at least improve your delivery). To get a sense of the kind of situations where custom designed maps really make a difference, I’ll share a story about some maps that we made for our hometown of Washington, D.C.
In 2008 the Washington, D.C. Office of the Chief Technology Officer (OCTO) released a large set of municipal datasets to the public to coincide with the original “Apps for __” contest, Apps for Democracy. Included in this data were ESRI shapefiles, a great format for GIS pros but hard to work with for anyone else. Using this same geodata, we created three very different custom maps, each for different use cases.
StumbleSafelyThe first was for a website we called StumbleSafely. It was a bit tongue-in-cheek — the idea was that the site could help users see the latest crimes near their favorite bars so they could be aware of problem areas. Because we weren’t actually helping people map out navigation paths to get home, the real communications point we wanted to hit with the map was showing crime in proximity to bars and subway stations. Street names didn’t matter as much, and neither did highlighting any other kinds of businesses.
The D.C. police department was publishing crime data that we could scrape and add to the site to show crime locations, and the Alcoholic Beverage Regulation Administration was publishing liquor license data that we could use to visualize density points on a map that corresponded to areas with lots of bars. For the base map itself, though, we needed little else in the way of data to accomplish our purpose. We were able to take shapefiles for roads, parks, and river features in the city and do a very low key map design that fit the aesthetic of the site and contained no extraneous information. People familiar with the city could quickly look at it and see right away what the crime situation was like in their favorite areas, without any other distractions.

Another example was a very similar map, but for a very different use case. DC Bikes was designed on the same platform as StumbleSafely to provide a resource to the D.C. cycling community. It showed bike thefts, bike lanes, and bike shops around the city.
For the map on that site, we again wanted to show crime data and were able to take the same basic approach to StumbleSafely for the base map design, but there was one additional feature we needed — bike lanes. These were made available as a shape file from the D.C. government as well, so we were able to quickly repurpose the map from Stumble Safely, tweak the colors to match a new design, and highlight the bike lanes in a new color so they stood out. For the cycling community, we were again able to show just the more relevant information on the map and omit any distractions.

Finally, we wanted a much higher level of detail for a different project. Rather than omit details from our map in this case, we wanted to pack it full of details about public infrastructure. Not just buildings and roads, but even crosswalks, medians, and topography lines. The map we released for the public, “DC Nightvision,” includes all of these details, each of which are again published by the D.C. government as shapefiles.

With the increasing availability of shapefiles like the ones mentioned here, TileMill will make it easy for end users without a lot of GIS training to churn out custom maps that meet their unique communications needs. With the data in hand and user-friendly tools to work with it freely available, creativity will be the only limit for creating great custom maps.
It won’t be official until noon but the Daily News is reporting that New York State is a winner in the competition for federal Race to the Top education funds. This means the state — and city — will get some share of $4 billion in federal funds.
Sen. Charles Schumer said the award reflects the “strong strides” the state’s schools have made toward excellence.
The state had stumbled in the first round of funding but then made changes in its education law — raising the cap on the number of charter schools in the state, for one — and in its proposal, which originally asked for funds for furniture.
As expected, the city Charter Revision Commission approved a ballot proposal last night that if approved would rescind the controversial 2008 term limits extension, prohibit the City Council from extending their own terms in the future and grandfather in current officeholders to the three term limit.
The grandfathering proposal proved to be the most controversial considered by the commission. Some commissioners urged the commission to make any term limit proposal effective immediately. The mayor also came out against grandfathering every official in.
“Allowing any councilmember to benefit by postponing the effective date and precluding the public from immediately voting on it, in my view, does not respect the will of the people,” said Commissioner Kenneth Moltner last night.
Meanwhile, some members of the City Council threatened to sue if they were not allowed to serve a full three terms — we covered that issue here.
In addition to term limits, proposals to disclose independent spending in campaigns, increase the fine for ethics violations and halving the number of signatures needed to get on the ballot were all approved by the commission.
Larger issues, like the power of borough presidents or the public advocate, that some anticipated would be under review, were sidestepped.
"The update to Froyo gives the phone a number of goodies – new applications, Wireless-N (without a custom kernel), 720p video recording, and a much faster operating system. However, to get everything to work you need to apply a leaked OTA firmware and antenna update. There is some concern that when the official OTA update is released it will be a newer version than the leaked one, and the two won’t play nicely together. Some figure there is a 50/50 chance that applying the leak, and then applying the final OTA update will brick your phone – making it completely useless.
"It’s not hopeless – there are steps to undo the leaked OTA firmware and antenna update – but it’s a complicated process. These things are definitely not for the inexperienced or timid."
(tags: android software tutorial)
The digital media revolution promises to improve the quality of our lives though an expanded capacity to communicate, collaborate, learn and make informed decisions. Yet our seemingly insatiable demand for digital media is driving a proliferation of consumer electronic devices and IT infrastructure, which are significantly contributing to a tsunami of toxic electronic waste.
This week U.S. Environmental Protection Agency administrator Lisa Jackson announced that promoting citizen engagement and increasing government accountability on enforcement to improve the design, production, handling, reuse, recycling, exporting and disposal of electronics is of the EPA's top six international priorities. In light of this, publishers, device manufacturers, bandwidth providers and other players in the digital media supply chain should rethink their marketing narratives and redouble their efforts to identify, quantify, disclose and manage the toxic e-waste impacts associated with digital media -- before regulation or catastrophe require them to do so.
The issues and dilemmas related to digital media and e-waste can be complex and confusing, but if they are ignored or only paid lip service to they will be sure to wash up on the shores of our lives... and in our politics, in short order. If you want a quick take on some of the key issues associated with e-waste, take a few minutes to watch this short animated Public Service Announcement co-produced for Good Magazine by Ian Lynam and Morgan Currie:
To learn more, read on. In the weeks ahead we look forward to your questions, comments and suggestions about how issues associated with the environmental impacts of the digital media revolution's e-waste detritus can best be addressed. Here are some thought starters to get the conversation rolling.
FAQHow much toxic e-waste is being created and what are some of its environmental and social impacts?
According to market analyst firm ABI Research, approximately 53 million tons of electronic waste were generated worldwide in 2009, and only about 13% of it was recycled. The Electronics Take Back Coalition (ETBC) estimates that 14 to 20 million PCs are thrown out every year in the U.S. alone. There has been a recent surge in e-waste created by aggressive marketing encouraging consumers to "upgrade" basic voice-only mobile devices to 3G and 4G smartphones and mobile game consoles. There has also been an enormous surge in CRT monitors and TV sets set into motion by the switch to large flat screen displays and DVRs.
The EPA estimates that over 99 million TV sets, each containing four to eight pounds of lead, cadmium, beryllium and other toxic metals, were stockpiled or stored in the U.S. in 2007, and 26.9 million TVs were disposed of in 2007 -- either by trashing or recycling them. While it's not a large part of the waste stream, e-waste shows a higher growth rate than any other category of municipal waste.
Overall, between 2005 and 2006, total volumes of municipal waste increased by only 1.2 percent, compared to 8.6 percent for e-waste. Particularly troubling are the mountains of hazardous waste from electronic products growing exponentially in developing countries. The United Nations report Recycling - from E-Waste to Resources predicts that e-waste from old computers will jump by 500 percent from 2007 levels in India by 2020 and by 200 percent to 400 percent in South Africa and China. E-waste from old mobile phones is expected to be seven times higher in China and 18 times higher in India. China already produces about 2.3 million ton of e-waste domestically, second only to the United States, which produces about 3 million tons each year.
According to the Electronics Take Back Coalition, e-waste contains over 1,000 toxic materials harmful to humans and our environment, including chlorinated solvents, brominated flame retardants, plasticizers, PVC, heavy metals, persistent organic pollutants, plastics and gases used to make electronic products and their components such as semiconductor chips, batteries, capacitors, circuit boards, and disk drives. E-waste can also contain tin, tantalum, tungsten and gold, of which Section 1502 of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform Act requires reporting if they originated in Congo or a neighboring country.
Not all e-waste is exported to China, India or Africa. The Electronics Take Back Coalition reports that some recyclers and many federal agencies in the U.S. send their e-waste to recycling plants operating in federal prisons operated by UNICOR, a wholly owned subsidiary of the federal Department of Justice. One criticism of UNICOR is that by paying prison workers as little as 23 cents per hour, they undercut private commercial recyclers. Another criticism is that reliance on high tech chain gangs may frustrate development of the free market infrastructure necessary to safely manage the tsunami of e-waste that the digital revolution is intensifying.
How much e-waste does the consumption and production of digital media generate?
Digital media doesn't grow on trees. Its creation, distribution and use requires massive quantities of energy, minerals, metals, petrochemicals and labor. Rather than relying on proprietary estimates of product lifecycles or limited forensic evidence we need reliable standards-based lifecycle inventories of the energy and material flows that make our broadband connectivity and digital media experiences possible. Proponents of digital media often tout the benefits of the digital media shift in terms of the number of trees that will be saved, but shifting to digital media has an environmental footprint and toxic impacts that bear greater scrutiny.
The digital media industry has a long way to go before it can declare itself sustainable, or justify its environmental footprint based on cherry-picked data, anecdotal evidence and unfilled promises. Companies like Apple and HP that tout their commitments to sustainability fail to make a even a "greenish" grade in the most recent Greenpeace Greener Electronics Scorecard..

Until media companies, device manufacturers and service providers are inspired to make standards-based environmental product declarations through market pressure or regulation, it will be impossible for consumers to make informed decisions or compare the climate change or e-waste impacts associated with specific products or services. A look at the overall growth trends in a few key categories is enough to justify more serious attention to the issues at hand and to the toxic tragedies that loom over the horizon.
A shift in preference from traditional media to digital media is one key trend. According to the PriceWaterhouseCoopers report, Global Media and Entertainment 2010-2014, digital media's share of consumer spending is growing at double digit rates and is expected to reach 33 percent of their entertainment and media spending by 2014.
Growth in the number of broadband mobile connections and wireless devices is also a determining factor. Smartphone manufacturer Ericsson estimates that the world will reach 50 billion mobile connections within this decade with 80 percent of all people accessing the Internet using their mobile devices. Ericsson estimates there are over 500 million 3G subscriptions worldwide with more than 2 million mobile subscriptions being added per day.
At current rates of growth some pundits believe we may soon face a zettaflood of data, and the number of broadband wireless connections, smartphones, e-books, tablets, game consoles and "wireless devices with IP addresses will outnumber humans on our planet by an order of magnitude. The World Wireless Research Forum predicts 7 trillion devices for 7 billion people by 2017 - a thousand devices for every man, woman and child on the planet.
In short we are rapidly becoming a world of digital media hyper-consumers that need to develop a better understanding of the connections between our rabid digital media appetites and their lifecycle environmental impacts before they become our undoing.
Unfortunately, at present there is no reliable way to determine and compare the greenhouse gas emission or e-waste impacts associated with digital media consumption. While the impact of an individual decision or transaction may be negligible, the aggregate impact of billions of connections and trillions of transactions cannot be left unexamined and unmanaged.
What laws and sources of international, federal, state and local government support for e-waste management are in place and on the horizon?
The U.S. lags behind the EU, which has recently created two new policies on ways to deal with e-waste: the Restriction on the Use of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) and the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment. At present the U.S. is also the only member of the Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development that has not ratified the Basel Convention, which is intended to regulate the movement of hazardous waste across international borders.
In addition the U.S. does not have a comprehensive national approach for the reuse and recycling of used electronics, despite efforts to introduce federal legislation such as Senate Bill 1397 - Electronic Device Recycling Research and Development Act. However, electronics manufacturer take-back laws have gained traction at the state level.
An important report on e-waste recently issued by the Government Accounting Office (GAO) titled Electronic Waste: Considerations for Promoting Environmentally Sound Reuse and Recycling states that 23 states have passed legislation mandating statewide e-waste recycling, including several states that introduced legislation in 2010 (in yellow below).

All of these laws except California use the Producer Responsibility approach, where the manufacturers must pay for recycling. A guide to current and pending e-waste legislation is available on the Electronics Take Back Coalition website.
The Udall Center for Studies in Public Policy at the University of Arizona recently published an award-winning paper titled E-wasted Time: The Hazardous Lag in
Comprehensive Regulation of the Electronics Recycling Industry in the United States that addresses the status of electronics recycling regulation in the U.S., as well as how the regulatory climate influences industry practice.
How can consumers and manufacturers of digital electronic devices, providers of broadband connectivity and data center services address digital media/e-waste dilemmas through voluntary initiatives and coalitions?
The EPA provides a guide to locations where electronics can be donated for reuse or recycling through the Plug-In To eCycling Partnership, Responsible Recycling and Recycling Industry Operating Standard RIOS certification initiatives. The Electronics Take Back Coalition and the Basel Action Network (BAN) have developed a competing voluntary program called e-Stewards that identifies recyclers they deem to be environmentally and socially responsible.
Both the Electronics Take Back Coalition and Greenpeace have developed scorecards that rate companies on their policies and the actions they are taking to address e-waste issues. Such sites are far from perfect, but can help can you sort through the confusing combination of apathy, indifference, marketing spin and unfulfilled green promises that predominate in today's consumer electronics marketplace. Before you buy or dispose of a cell phone, e-reader, tablet, PC, display, DVR, set-top box, game console, charger, plug strip, batteries, printers, or other electronic devices ask the manufacturer if there is a standards-based Environmental Product Declaration or Lifecycle Analysis for the product and check if the brand and the product is rated by Greenpeace and EPEAT.
Over the next five years our challenge is to stem the tide of e-waste being exported from the U.S. to the developing world, and develop a legal framework that will support mining and managing the mountains of toxic e-waste in the U.S. and in the developed world. According to Interpol the illegal trafficking of electronic waste (e-waste) is a serious crime and a growing international problem, posing an unacceptable environmental and health risk, in particular in developing countries in Africa and Asia. According to EPA administrator Lisa Jackson: "It's time for us to stop making our trash someone else's problem, start taking responsibility and setting a good example."
Going forward our greater challenge will be to change the prevailing business models and digital media marketing narratives that ignore the toxic tide and rethink the design of next generation digital media devices, media products, data networks and data centers so that they are greener by design, eliminate conflict minerals, use less energy, last longer and can be disassembled, upgraded and recycled responsibly.
*****
Please use the comments area below to share your questions and suggestions. More importantly, use your social networks to engage the marketing and product development executives of digital media companies, device manufacturers, carriers and other key stakeholders -- including elected officials and EPA regulators. Engage them in an informed dialogue on how we can communicate sustainably and decouple the production and consumption of digital media from the scourge of e-waste in a timely and effective manner.
MediaShift environmental correspondent Don Carli is senior research fellow with the non-profit Institute for Sustainable Communication (ISC) where he is director of The Sustainable Advertising Partnership and other corporate responsibility and sustainability programs addressing the economic, environmental and social impacts of advertising, marketing, publishing and enterprise communication supply chains. Don is an Alfred P. Sloan Foundation Industry Studies Program affiliate scholar and is also sustainability editor of Aktuell Grafisk Information Magazine based in Sweden. You can also follow him on Twitter.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
As the saying goes, "Be careful what you wish for."
In my case, I won a Knight News Challenge grant to launch an online, social media reporting network that follows a battalion of U.S. Marines throughout their deployment to southern Afghanistan. (Congratulations! You've won a year in Helmand Province, roadside bomb capital of the world...)
Although recently upgraded from "forgotten war" to "central front," the Afghanistan conflict exists on the periphery of the American consciousness. We're nearly a decade into the longest war in U.S. history, but most Americans still have a pretty fuzzy idea of what we're actually doing over there. "Counterinsurgency" is the new buzzword, but if we held a national pop quiz to actually define the term, I don't expect we'd get good grades.
Beyond social media, this project is really about the simple, literal question: "What are we doing in Afghanistan?"
A Year to Rediscover AmericaWhile the public is clearly disconnected, I somehow don't accept the notion that they aren't interested -- personal experience over the past year tells me the opposite. I spent that year at Stanford on a Knight journalism fellowship -- mostly impersonating a college student, but occasionally impersonating an "Afghanistan expert" on the lecture circuit. (Prior to the fellowship, I hadn't read a lot of books on the subject, but I'd spent years wandering the far reaches of Afghanistan, Pakistan, and Kashmir as a photographer, sometimes embedded with military forces. My photos have appeared in publications including Time, Newsweek, Outside and National Geographic.).
For the first time I could remember, I spent a solid year in my own country. I saw a lot more of America than I ever had before, I don't think we've got a public that doesn't care -- I think we've got a profession that doesn't know how to communicate.
Flash forward to now, I'm at Camp Lejeune, North Carolina -- a week from departure, without so much as a domain name registered. I'm dusting off body armor, scrambling to locate satellite transmitters and solar panels, wondering what I was thinking, and what exactly an "online social media reporting network" looks like, and how I'm actually going to materialize all this vaporware.
As far as I know, the project is a bit of an anomaly in the technology-heavy spectrum of News Challenge winners. It promises no coding, no new widgets or algorithms, and not much that could really pass for a business model.
Ultimately, it comes down to the idea that we could do a lot more with the resources that we already have. Among other things, those resources include communication tools of incredible, and untested reach. (Consider the notion that 50 percent of the activity on the Internet occurs on a single website, Facebook).
To be honest, this thing wasn't actually my idea, and I had one foot out the door on the Afghanistan business, when I got the call.
The IdeaThe idea came from a Marine I'd met in Afghanistan in 2004. Back then he was a captain, leading a hundred Marines through the mountains in eastern Afghanistan, just a few miles off the Pakistani border. I'd just come out of Iraq, and he was on his way over, and I remember sitting on a hillside, in total darkness one night, telling him what he was in for. I told him Iraq was a lot worse than he'd heard, and it was just starting to slide off the edge. Afghanistan, by comparison, felt like it was on the right track.
I was half right, at least.
He's a major now, with a mind-bending six tours under his belt. He's second-in-command of a battalion and about to return to Afghanistan with almost a thousand Marines. And he asked me: Did I want to come along? Would I ride out the entire tour with them?
One of these days, I have to learn how to say no.
Typically, embedded journalists spend a week or two with a military unit, reporting for a news agency or a magazine or a newspaper. The embed slot is like a revolving door, with one media outlet rotating out, as another one rotates in. Correspondents in places like Iraq and Afghanistan work on directives from editors in places like London and New York -- and if you're a photographer like me, you might find yourself in some remote desert or mountain range, hunting for scenes conjured in the imagination of a correspondent in Kabul or Baghdad.
What if we tried a different approach, something both more autonomous, and more collaborative?
Execution and distribution might come down to the question: What's the social graph of a thousand Marines? I have no idea, but when I run a Facebook app to analyze my own social network, my MacBook spins, chokes, and crashes as it attempts to crunch the data, and plot the connections around a single person. That might just be buggy code over at Facebook, but I'd still guess the numbers surrounding a battalion-strength network of 19 year-olds are some degree of real big.
It may be that the Marine Corps had the same question, because earlier this year, it lifted a long-standing ban on social media for deployed troops. Translation: Marines can tweet and Facebook from Afghanistan.
It's anyone's guess what that means practically, especially in a place that doesn't have a lot of Internet cafes. But it's worth watching how the military makes use of the social web. So far, on an institutional level, they seem to have made much more effective use of it than the professional media.
More soon from the other side...
As the saying goes, "Be careful what you wish for."
In my case, I won a Knight News Challenge grant to launch an online, social media reporting network that follows a battalion of U.S. Marines throughout their deployment to southern Afghanistan. (Congratulations! You've won a year in Helmand Province, roadside bomb capital of the world...)
Although recently upgraded from "forgotten war" to "central front," the Afghanistan conflict exists on the periphery of the American consciousness. We're nearly a decade into the longest war in U.S. history, but most Americans still have a pretty fuzzy idea of what we're actually doing over there. "Counterinsurgency" is the new buzzword, but if we held a national pop quiz to actually define the term, I don't expect we'd get good grades.
Beyond social media, this project is really about the simple, literal question: "What are we doing in Afghanistan?"
A Year to Rediscover AmericaWhile the public is clearly disconnected, I somehow don't accept the notion that they aren't interested -- personal experience over the past year tells me the opposite. I spent that year at Stanford on a Knight journalism fellowship -- mostly impersonating a college student, but occasionally impersonating an "Afghanistan expert" on the lecture circuit. (Prior to the fellowship, I hadn't read a lot of books on the subject, but I'd spent years wandering the far reaches of Afghanistan, Pakistan, and Kashmir as a photographer, sometimes embedded with military forces. My photos have appeared in publications including Time, Newsweek, Outside and National Geographic.).
For the first time I could remember, I spent a solid year in my own country. I saw a lot more of America than I ever had before, I don't think we've got a public that doesn't care -- I think we've got a profession that doesn't know how to communicate.
Flash forward to now, I'm at Camp Lejeune, North Carolina -- a week from departure, without so much as a domain name registered. I'm dusting off body armor, scrambling to locate satellite transmitters and solar panels, wondering what I was thinking, and what exactly an "online social media reporting network" looks like, and how I'm actually going to materialize all this vaporware.
As far as I know, the project is a bit of an anomaly in the technology-heavy spectrum of News Challenge winners. It promises no coding, no new widgets or algorithms, and not much that could really pass for a business model.
Ultimately, it comes down to the idea that we could do a lot more with the resources that we already have. Among other things, those resources include communication tools of incredible, and untested reach. (Consider the notion that 50 percent of the activity on the Internet occurs on a single website, Facebook).
To be honest, this thing wasn't actually my idea, and I had one foot out the door on the Afghanistan business, when I got the call.
The IdeaThe idea came from a Marine I'd met in Afghanistan in 2004. Back then he was a captain, leading a hundred Marines through the mountains in eastern Afghanistan, just a few miles off the Pakistani border. I'd just come out of Iraq, and he was on his way over, and I remember sitting on a hillside, in total darkness one night, telling him what he was in for. I told him Iraq was a lot worse than he'd heard, and it was just starting to slide off the edge. Afghanistan, by comparison, felt like it was on the right track.
I was half right, at least.
He's a major now, with a mind-bending six tours under his belt. He's second-in-command of a battalion and about to return to Afghanistan with almost a thousand Marines. And he asked me: Did I want to come along? Would I ride out the entire tour with them?
One of these days, I have to learn how to say no.
Typically, embedded journalists spend a week or two with a military unit, reporting for a news agency or a magazine or a newspaper. The embed slot is like a revolving door, with one media outlet rotating out, as another one rotates in. Correspondents in places like Iraq and Afghanistan work on directives from editors in places like London and New York -- and if you're a photographer like me, you might find yourself in some remote desert or mountain range, hunting for scenes conjured in the imagination of a correspondent in Kabul or Baghdad.
What if we tried a different approach, something both more autonomous, and more collaborative?
Execution and distribution might come down to the question: What's the social graph of a thousand Marines? I have no idea, but when I run a Facebook app to analyze my own social network, my MacBook spins, chokes, and crashes as it attempts to crunch the data, and plot the connections around a single person. That might just be buggy code over at Facebook, but I'd still guess the numbers surrounding a battalion-strength network of 19 year-olds are some degree of real big.
It may be that the Marine Corps had the same question, because earlier this year, it lifted a long-standing ban on social media for deployed troops. Translation: Marines can tweet and Facebook from Afghanistan.
It's anyone's guess what that means practically, especially in a place that doesn't have a lot of Internet cafes. But it's worth watching how the military makes use of the social web. So far, on an institutional level, they seem to have made much more effective use of it than the professional media.
More soon from the other side...
Map of Liberia. Image by Flickr user MercyWatch. CC BY-NC-ND
Africa's oldest republic Liberia celebrated its 163rd Independence anniversary last month (July 26, 2010) and it is disheartening to see that after all these years Liberia is still is a developing country with all its problems. “The war-torn country is the first independent country in Africa, when it declared its independence in 1847″, notes Nat Bayjay at the Ceasefire Liberia blog. From Wikipedia:It was founded and colonized by freed American slaves with the help of a private organization called the American Colonization Society in 1821-1822, on the premise that former American slaves would have greater freedom and equality there.
These colonists formed an elite group in Liberian society, and, in 1847, they founded the Republic of Liberia, establishing a government modeled on that of the United States, naming Monrovia, their capital city, after James Monroe, the fifth president of the United States and a prominent supporter of the colonization.
So what are the problems in this war-torn country that had kept it from progressing? In fact Liberia started to walk backwards after the military-led coup in 1980. The country struggled with two civil wars which have killed hundreds of thousands of people and devastated the country's economy.
Now the country is battered with many problems including corruption. Nat Bayjay quotes Father Tikpor, the National Orator of Liberia:
Unless the government buries the deadly corruption virus that is currently eating the energy of the government, all else achieved will go down the drain.
Ellen Johnson Sirleaf, the President of Liberia. Image by Flickr user Bahia. CC BY
The Liberian President Ellen Johnson Sirleaf called on the Liberian people to be united in the midst of county’s engulfed land disputes.The issue of land disputes became a post-war crisis in Liberia, with Nimba County at the center of it, causing several misunderstandings that have led to fears of a potential return to war.
Although debt reliefs can be a boost for the country, they are not a panacea for Liberia’s considerable challenges, which are, according to Jahbulleh Cicero Dempster:
A street in Monrovia, capital of Liberia. Image by Flickr user Tweefur. CC BY-NC-SA
The citizen journalists of Rising Voices grantee Ceasefire Liberia are doing their parts in addressing the challenges by providing news and information on the anomalies in the society and the government. Nathan Patio Charles writes in Ceasefire Liberia Blog:
An independent investigation conducted by Ceasefire Liberia, in collaboration with Liberia’s Journalists for Human Rights and Good Governance (a) four month justice reporting workshop for students from several universities in Liberia, has discovered that the Monrovia Central Prison, popularly known as South Beach in Monrovia, is overcrowded. [..]
Crime continues to increase and the justice system in Liberia is notoriously slow, leaving the prison overcrowded with pre-trial detainees.
The Justice system seems to be a problem for the country. Nat Bayjay reports that Liberia’s Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC) submitted its findings and recommendations to the National Legislature and accused the justice system as a hindrance to peace and reconciliation in Liberia:
“Reconciliation is a process, not a commodity that can be purchased in the absence without the building of a just and equitable society founded on the rule of law. There can be no peace without any justice”.
However, there are signs of progress in the justice system as the Liberia National Police have finally charged and sent to court a 48-year old, who raped a 13 year old girl in Central Monrovia, which sparked fresh violence.
Read more such stories in the Ceasefire Liberia Blog.

Here’s a little proof that Twitter is now not simply location aware, in terms of latitude and longitude or address, but is now place-aware. I checked in to both of these places on FourSquare and Twitter recognized these places by name:
Then, I decided to click on the Trader Joe’s, Falls Church link beside the little map marker, and lo! there was the following pop-up window, which is very much aware of not simply location anymore but they’re following the trend of Facebook Places and the other location-aware social networks by starting to connect to businesses:
Via Marketing Conversation and Chris AbrahamChris Abraham is co-founder and principal of Abraham Harrison LLC, an international consulting group with specialties in online word-of-mouth/conversation marketing and online business & technology strategy advising. See his profile, contact Chris via email, Twitter, or leave a comment below.
4MR is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
In this week's 4MR podcast I look at the recently launched Facebook Places location feature. While the social network touts it as a great way to tell your friends where you are in the physical world, others worry about the privacy implications. In fact, the most popular stories on the subject are telling people how to turn it off. I talked with Gawker staff writer Adrian Chen about his take on how Facebook could have made it easier to turn Places off.
Check it out:
>>> Subscribe to 4MR <<<
>>> Subscribe to 4MR via iTunes <<<
Listen to my entire interview with Adrian Chen:
Background music is "What the World Needs" by the The Ukelele Hipster Kings via PodSafe Music Network.
Here are some links to related sites and stories mentioned in the podcast:
Who, What, When, and Now...Where at the Facebook blog
The First Thing You Should Do With Facebook Places - Don't Let Other People Tag You at Gawker
Facebook Places Privacy Controls Get EFF Approval at eWeek
Why I'm Not Using Facebook Places at Jolie O'Dell's blog
How to Disable Facebook Places at Huffington Post
How To Disable Facebook Places at ReadWriteWeb
Facebook Adds Location Check-Ins Through Foursquare, Gowalla, and Yelp at LifeHacker
How to Disable Facebook Places at LifeHacker
Facebook gets its hands on check-in startup Hot Potato at SocialBeat
Also, be sure to vote in our poll about what you think about Facebook Places:
What do you think about Facebook Places?survey software
Mark Glaser is executive editor of MediaShift and Idea Lab. He also writes the bi-weekly OPA Intelligence Report email newsletter for the Online Publishers Association. He lives in San Francisco with his son Julian. You can follow him on Twitter @mediatwit.
4MR is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
City’s Open Data Sets Allowed to Stagnate
(Spatiality)
Mosque Hatred Symptom of Viscous Cycle
(The American Conservative)
Two Cheers for American Tolerance
(Reason Magazine)
Ground Zero Imam: ‘I Am a Jew’
(The Atlantic)
Bike-Pedestrian Injuries Drop Even Lower
(Streetsblog)
Foodprint City
(Urban Omnibus)
Still Time for a Complete Streets Law
(Tri-State Transportation Campaign)
The Burden of Proving One’s Homelessness
(Coalition for the Homeless)
The MTA’s Uninformative Info Boards
(Second Avenue Sagas)
County to County Commuting
(Newgeography.com)
State’s Budget Gap Grows
(NY Fiscal Watch)
Wireless Bike Share Pilot Coming to City
(Govtech.com via NYConvergence)
Governor Has the Power to Control Spending
(City Journal)
The large city of Cairo is usually cooler in the mornings, so Rising Voices started its visit to the Minya Governorate, which is located 247 km south of Cairo) in the early morning hours. I was accompanied by Nevine Ebeid, the project lead of the Women of Minya Day by Day citizen media project, one of the three Rising Voices projects in Egypt, and Eddie Avila from Rising Voices. The purpose of our travel was to meet the participants of the project and to finalize details with the host NGO.
This was my first visit to Minya, even though my father is originally from Upper Egypt. Minya is often known as the “Bride of Upper Egypt” and a statue of Queen Nefertiti is prominent in the city's entrance. It is the only governorate which has a woman as a symbol, but Nevine replied that “it does not symbolize the well-being of women here.” Upon arrival, it appeared to be that the governorate seemed to be neglected, as it has been one of the poorest areas in the country over the last 15 years according to Human Development reports. The percentage of the population that is illiterate is 67% Some of the comments and statistics would provide the context of some of the stories that we heard from the young women that we met.
Harsh Working Conditions
Our destination was a village called Dawadeyya and we knew we were arriving soon when we spotted Minya Mountain. It's known for being a source of marble, and where local workers spend around 16 hours a day breaking rocks and preparing them for manufacturing. Unfortunately about a quarter of the quarry workers in Minya are minors. Working on the mountain also poses serious health problems, such as lung, vision, skin, and some have even lost a limb from the machines that use a very high voltage of electricity. However, it is not only men and children who work in the quarry because women also can be found collecting rocks under the hot sun.
Minya mountain where many of the quarries are located.
In Dawadeyya, we were received by three nice women who are representatives from the high board of the Ben El-Reef (Daughter of Countryside) Society, the organization that the New Woman Foundation will be partnering with to teach the citizen media project. All three were wearing the traditional Abaya and a hair scarf, even the male accountant working with them, was dressed in a Jellabiya. They do not wear formal attire because they are able to better relate to the community that they serve, when they dress with local customs. This is especially important since the women often visit other women in their homes to talk about family issues or reproductive health issues.
We met some of the young women who will participate in the program. Approximately eight entered the modest office of Bent El-Reef, with big smiles on their faces. The head of the organization explained why they were smiling, “they are very happy to have visitors in Dawadeyya.”
Hearing the Stories of the Young Women
The first young woman introduced herself as Shimaa, the oldest sister of four brothers. She is responsible of helping her mother in making a living since her father passed away some years ago. “I first worked in construction, I used to carry blocks and sandbags on top of my head from 7 a.m. to 6 p.m.,” she would say with self-confidence and with a smile. “But I was only paid 4 or 5 pounds a day” (equivalent to approximately to 1 $US), while men who did the same job were paid triple. “Now I am farming and take the harvest to the market myself,” she added and revealed that she did all this while attending evening school to learn how to read and write.
Women of Minya
The next girl, Aya was still in high school. She said, “sometimes I don't attend school in order to work, otherwise, I would not even the tuition fees.” Even though she received good grades in middle school, her father wanted her to drop out of school because he did not want to pay for anything. She spoke honestly and angrily about how her father treated her and her four sisters, as if they were like “animals”. However, she is eager to learn and thinks that others should learn about how some people live in her village.
After hearing some of these stories, I joked, “women here are as tough as men!” and everyone laughed except for Huda who looked sad. She introduced herself briefly, “I'm Huda. I do not work, but I want to learn how to use the internet.” However, she also thought that she was not as impressive to the visitors as compared to the others because she said she only does household chores for her three brothers and her aging father, while her mother works.
Citizen Media to Tell Their Stories
These stories remind us that women in Upper Egypt often work equally as hard as men and in equally harsh conditions, but are paid less. Yet, when the work is over and men can lay down to relax, the work for the women does not end. There are household chores that need attending to. In the village of Dawadeyya, baking is a common chore for the women. They often spend 10 hours or more baking for her family and the neighbors, and also to sell. A traditional mud oven can be found inside the house, but it is unhealthy for the woman and her children because of the fumes. With funding from the UNDP, Bent El-Reef developed an oven equipped with an air exhaust pipe and a sliding door to prevent carbon monoxide from coming into the house. With more of these ovens in the community, women and her daughters can earn a living by selling gas for the oven.
Learning how to use a digital camera
However, this visit to Minya helped laid the foundation for the citizen media project Women of Minya Day by Day, where stories from girls like Shimaa, Aya, and Huda can come to light. To give them a taste of what they can expect in the workshops, all three of us handed them our cameras so that they can feel what it is like to hold a camera. We invited them to snap a photo of us. They did so with large smiles on their faces and eagerly asked when the workshops would start because they want to take photos of their mothers, farm, and the rest of their village.
If you run any kind of business, large or small, you're always looking for ways to get quality work done at a low cost. And when it comes to contract jobs like web and logo design, or copywriting, you're caught balancing between quality and cost. A couple years ago, CrowdSpring launched as a way for small and medium-sized businesses to get those projects done at a set price from multiple people around the world. Each project is a contest, and the buyer gets to pick the winning creative work -- meaning everyone else just created something for nothing.
After talking to the co-founders of CrowdSpring, I put the site to the test by telling two friends about it. One is a vice president at a mid-sized tech startup, whose wife does graphic design. His first reaction was that yes, this could hurt his wife's business and the designs must not be very good. His next reaction was to think seriously about whether his business should use CrowdSpring. Another friend needed a simple website design, and he decided against CrowdSpring and found someone local whom he could meet in person and brainstorm with.
My takeaway was that services like CrowdSpring are not for every designer, nor are they for every business looking for design or writing contract help. But they can work for the right type of work at the right time. Barilla pasta had people design a new type of pasta using a CrowdSpring contest, and Guy Kawasaki designed his new book cover using CrowdSpring. Here's how the service works:
While CrowdSpring said they are nearly profitable, and have more than 68,000 creative people in their community, more established professional designers hate the idea of people doing work "on spec" -- without any promise of payment. An entire No!Spec campaign sprung up, with people like Andrew Hyde explaining why he hates CrowdSpring. His major worry was that the end game for crowdsourcing, if it becomes the standard, is there won't be "more happy designers, or clients. Design as a whole will be lesser if this model is used, and that will be a real shame."
But Mike Sampson, a co-founder of CrowdSpring, told me that opposition to them has changed.
"When we first started, it was a pretty steady drumbeat from many of the incumbent designers," he said. "As it's gone on, I think it's tapered off and we only get pushback when a high-profile project is posted ... But I think the numbers speak for themselves. We have about 68,000 registered users, creatives working on our site. It is by many multiples larger than the AIGA, which is the leading professional organization for the design industry [and has spoken out against CrowdSpring]. It does speak volumes in terms of acceptance and the pool of talent out there, and the people who are out there who want an outlet for their creativity."
The following is an edited transcript of my phone chat with Sampson and the other co-founder of CrowdSpring, Ross Kimbarovsky. They told me why they started the company, its challenges, and how they've started a Pro version where companies can pre-screen creative workers.
Q&AWhat was your motivation for starting CrowdSpring? What problem were you trying to solve?
Ross Kimbarovsky: We came at it from two complementary perspectives. I was an attorney at the time leading the redesign of my law firm's website, dealing with traditional vendors. I had a very bad experience with those vendors. I picked a top candidate after a lengthy RFP [request for proposal] process, and when the vendor finally delivered, I was disappointed in the designs they offered us. At the same time, Mike [Sampson] and I had been talking because he ... wanted to outsource video work, and I was running into the same problem with getting contract design work done.
I was so frustrated that I started to look online to see if there were better ways to buy creative services. I stumbled on some examples of groups around the world who had design contests, with students competing against each other for fun to see who could design the best print ad, for example. I called Mike and suggested we get together because we both were trying to solve slightly different issues, but it seemed like it presented a broader opportunity to change the way that people like us -- small or mid-size businesses -- buy creative services.
Mike Sampson: We identified a gap in the market. Small and mid-size businesses had limited access to the traditional design market. The pricing structure is prohibitive for many small businesses, and ... there were geographical supply-and-demand deficiencies. If they were in a small town, they might not have access to talented creative.
Since you launched it about two years ago, how have things changed? Startups often have to change focus. Has that happened at all?
Kimbarovsky: There are two external changes that happened, though we didn't have to change our whole business. One was that large companies and even agencies were interested in working with us and our creative community. We hadn't considered that because we thought the problem only existed for small businesses and entrepreneurs. We created a more sophisticated version of our product that we call CrowdSpring Pro, which included more privacy, non-disclosure, user control. The other thing that changed in the marketplace was the acceptance of crowdsourcing more broadly across industries and government.
When you launched, there were some designers who said no one should join the CrowdSpring community and do work on spec. Are you still dealing with an anti-spec feedback from people in the creative community?
Sampson: We do. It's interesting. When we first started, it was a pretty steady drumbeat from many of the incumbent designers. As it's gone on, I think it's tapered off and we only get pushback when a high-profile project is posted. For instance, we have a project on the site with Guy Kawasaki of Alltop [who] has a new book coming out. He's sourcing the cover of the book design with us. We haven't heard from the 'no spec' folks for some time, but as soon as Guy posted his project there's been a bit of an uproar on Twitter and on social media because a lot of Guy's followers are designers who work in the traditional model. And they aren't thrilled that he's using this different model.
Kimbarovsky explains that established designers who have plenty of work don't need to use CrowdSpring's speculative model:
Tell me more about CrowdSpring Pro. How does it work and what does it cost?
Kimbarovsky: It differs in a few ways from our regular product. First, minimums in Pro start at $1,000 for most categories, and higher in some. For a typical design project, the minimum is $200. We always let the buyer set their own price, but we do have higher minimums in Pro. As a buyer in Pro, you can decide if the designers can see each other's designs or not -- you control who can see what. In Pro projects, you also decide who can participate in the project. Anyone who wants to work on one has to sign a non-disclosure agreement and can provide references, and the Pro buyer can check those out or their portfolio, and then decides who can participate.
We created this because we had agencies and companies who wanted to try different things like product design and didn't want their competitors to see them. Or there were campaigns they wanted to launch but didn't want competitors to know about them or what the collateral would be. Pro projects give buyers more granular control, so they've brought in more high profile clients. We've worked with LG [with the Design the Future Competition], Barilla pasta, and numerous others including agencies.
In those cases, they can pre-screen people before they do the work?
Kimbarovsky: Yes, they can pre-screen or let anyone who signs a non-disclosure sign up. We've had companies use our community for help, or some companies have only used their own internal community because Pro allows you to invite anyone you want for a project. So we've had companies who crowdsourced internally within their own organization and didn't let anyone outside participate.
What's the advantage of using CrowdSpring if they're doing it their own community? Why not do it on their own?
Sampson: Basically they're coming to us for the convenience of the platform, they're leveraging what we've got. And they're experimenting with the tools we have to see if it will work.
Each project has its own individual page and gallery with all the entries and submissions. It has entry detail pages, with larger thumbnails, more info on the creator of the entry, and a comment thread so the buyer can comment on the entry, it has feedback tools, and an 'activity' tab, which is a closed forum for participants in a project. And a wrap-up phase at the end of the project, with upload and download capabilities, file-handling, feedback, approval capability.
You talked about getting outsourced work from India. Do you get a sense that there are still a lot of people coming from India and China?
Sampson: About 50 percent of our creatives are U.S.-based, and the other people come from 175 countries around the world. We are truly a global company in that sense. Buyers are about 65 percent to 70 percent in the U.S.
Do you handle the monetary transaction between buyer and creator?
Sampson: Yes. When a buyer posts a project, we require them to escrow with us the full cost of the project at the start. We do that to protect the community [of creatives]. One of the things we learned early on from the creatives was that they were willing to participate in a model like this as long as they knew the buyer wasn't window shopping, that they were serious about awarding their project. We hold the money while the project is in process, and only when the project is finalized and approved do we release money to the creative. We handle money coming in and the escrow of the funds and final payment to the winning creative.

How do you handle payments, especially with so many people in various countries?
Sampson: It's a challenge, because we have made payments to dozens and dozens of businesses. PayPal is a great business, and more than 90 percent of our payments go out via PayPal. Buyers can pay with either a credit card or PayPal account, and the rest we can pay by direct international bank wires.
What about with media companies themselves? Have they used you for designs? When you talk about "agencies" do you mean ad agencies?
Kimbarovsky: We've had projects from advertising agencies, design agencies, media buying, PR agencies. We have had projects from media companies, we've had projects from Forbes, from publishers like DoubleDay. In the Pro category, we've seen a handful of different kinds of buyers, but because of the private nature of them we can't talk about them.
We've seen some interesting buyers in our writing category. We started with graphic and web design, and moved into industrial design. Earlier this year we launched copywriting projects, anything from domain names and company names and taglines to entire books. We've had people source entire books on CrowdSpring using our community of writers. We currently have a project from Air New Zealand looking for a new script for their safety video. They have a pretty irreverent attitude with customers, and their current video is six or seven years old, so they wanted something fresh for that video.
Kimbarovsky describes how a book publisher used CrowdSpring to write an entire book, chapter by chapter:
When you added the copywriting category, did it bring any new challenges?
Sampson: The biggest challenge was similar to what we had when we launched the site: How do you build a community of skilled, talented people with experience to act as providers? We have a chicken-and-egg problem, which we had from the start. If you attract the buyers, will the providers follow? Or does it take a large base of providers to attract the buyers? Our approach has always been to market to buyers. Our thinking has always been that if there is enough work and money on the table, then the providers will follow.
How do you market to the buyers? What's your best strategy?
Kimbarovsky: We've tried many approaches, as this is our main challenge. We leveraged social media very heavily, we are big users of Facebook, Twitter and have been from the moment we launched. As a startup outside Silicon Valley with a new business model, we had a lot of different challenges to climb. We write a small business newsletter that we send out to 65,000 people, our users, and PR is very important for us, helping introduce us to a wider audience. It all boils down to word of mouth, which is the single biggest driver of business to us.
What's been one of the things that's been a major complaint among your users?
Sampson: The biggest thing we hear is that the quality of the work isn't high enough. But when we ask about quality in surveys, the perception of quality is very high. But occasionally someone comes along, maybe 1 out of 20, and says the quality isn't up to what they're looking for. And that's a difficult thing. The perception of quality is very subjective. It's very difficult for me to say what you will like. We might look at the same thing and I'll think it's high quality and you'll think it's low quality.
Kimbarovsky: Let me add one thing. One thing we're seeing in our data is that quality perceptions are different in different countries. When we look at European countries such as France, they tend to be more sensitive about quality than people in other countries and a bit more critical.
So how can you address those quality issues?
Sampson: One of the things we track is buyer engagement, by checking their feedback. A highly engaged buyer leaves lots of comments, gives lots of feedback, scores every entry. And a buyer with low engagement does the opposite, leaves no comments, scores few entries. There's a high correlation between low engagement and high dissatisfaction. Our approach is to try to engage buyers, because we believe the engagement itself will shift their perception. So we've added tools that don't quite force buyers to get engaged, but strongly encourage them.
Kimbarovsky talks about how CrowdSpring has weathered the economic storm because it can save money for small businesses on contract work:
Are there other areas you are considering expanding into?
Kimbarovsky: We are considering moving into video and audio as natural fits. Video is both a natural fit and something we know about. Mike was a director and producer working for just about every major Hollywood studio and TV network. So these are both markets that are challenging for small businesses because they are expensive and sophisticated, and these companies have trouble trying to source video content, whether for their blog or their website or for promotional materials.
*****
What do you think about CrowdSpring? Have you used the site as a buyer or creative designer? Or do you think people should avoid it? Share your thoughts in the comments below.
*Correction: An original version of this story said CrowdSpring paid a kill fee of $250 on refunded projects. Thanks to a commenter, we've corrected that to $100, a change that CrowdSpring made last June.
Mark Glaser is executive editor of MediaShift and Idea Lab. He also writes the bi-weekly OPA Intelligence Report email newsletter for the Online Publishers Association. He lives in San Francisco with his son Julian. You can follow him on Twitter @mediatwit.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
We just got this in from the Working Families Party.
Looks like nothing is to come out of the federal investigation into its finances — which was first announced after an exhaustive series of investigative pieces by City Hall News.
Here is the statement:
In December 2009, we announced that the U.S. Attorneys Office for the Southern District of New York was conducting an investigation concerning the Working Families Party and Data & Field Services, Inc. We were advised last night that the U.S. Attorneys Office has decided to close its investigation without the filing of any charges.
The Working Families Party and Data & Field Services cooperated fully with the extensive investigation conducted by the government. We appreciate the professionalism of the U.S. Attorneys Office.
Of course, the NYC Campaign Finance Board, as part of the post-election audit process of campaigns that participate in the public campaign finance system, is auditing the campaigns that contracted for services with Data & Field Services in 2009.
We are gratified that the federal investigation has concluded and look forward to continuing our work for good schools, good jobs, and good government.
This post was co-authored by Nonny de la Peña
Stroome, a winner of the 2010 Knight News Challenge grant, fosters a social network that allows journalists to collaborate together by sharing content and stories that can be edited right in a browser and then pushed across the web.
Prototyped at USC Annenberg's pioneering Online Program on Online Communities in the fall of 2008, the idea was strikingly simple: Create a place where journalists can efficiently work together to create a culture that offers accurate, contextual news in real-time.
The result was Stroome, an online video editing platform crossed with a social network that allows you to upload, edit, and share thousands of clips from different users. In short, the perfect toolset for journalists aspiring to retool in the digital age. Learn more in the below video:
Knight News Challenge: Stroome from Knight Foundation on Vimeo.
Why Stroome? Why Now?Anyone who has tried to work on a video project in which the stakeholders are in geographic locations knows the problems inherent in online collaboration. File transfer slows down the process; there are breakdowns in communication; the flow of critical information is often lost in the mix.
Stroome breaks that technological and communication bottleneck by offering revision histories and intuitive, collaborative editing tools that allow individuals and groups work together for the good of the whole to foster a supportive culture that can quickly produce accurate news stories.
Stroome not only enables the next generation of digital journalists to upload and edit content right in the browser but, more importantly, allows stakeholders in disparate locations to create a community around that content -- from small groups to national news outlets.

Whether it's a small group of journalists working to get out a story quickly, or a community remixing pieces to reflect their points of view, Stroome focuses on visual journalism as a participatory process. Our unique browser-based platform allows you to upload, edit, and share thousands of clips from different users in real-time. Then you can push your projects out across the web to the major social media sites or share them on Stroome with other users so that they can open and edit your clips, too.
But the real breakthrough is that by publishing content quickly and allowing diverse geographic communities to communicate, we believe Stroome will rejuvenate the relationship between a news organization and its audience by radically increasing responsiveness with an inexpensive, agile online solution.
But don't count out the satellite trucks just yet. We fervently believe participatory video is the future of visual storytelling on the web, and we are devoted to trying to use the technology to support the idea that content creation can be a communal experience instead of merely a tool for passive viewing. But we also recognize that what we are asking will require a significant shift in thinking.
The Future of News is DigitalFor us, that shift begins today. Over the next few weeks, our team will be working with local news outlets to set up a series of beta experiments in which the Stroome platform will be implemented in the field and in the classroom. So if you have a unique case study you'd like to test, email us info@stroome.com.
This post was co-authored by Nonny de la Peña
Stroome, a winner of the 2010 Knight News Challenge grant, fosters a social network that allows journalists to collaborate together by sharing content and stories that can be edited right in a browser and then pushed across the web.
Prototyped at USC Annenberg's pioneering Online Program on Online Communities in the fall of 2008, the idea was strikingly simple: Create a place where journalists can efficiently work together to create a culture that offers accurate, contextual news in real-time.
The result was Stroome, an online video editing platform crossed with a social network that allows you to upload, edit, and share thousands of clips from different users. In short, the perfect toolset for journalists aspiring to retool in the digital age. Learn more in the below video:
Knight News Challenge: Stroome from Knight Foundation on Vimeo.
Why Stroome? Why Now?Anyone who has tried to work on a video project in which the stakeholders are in geographic locations knows the problems inherent in online collaboration. File transfer slows down the process; there are breakdowns in communication; the flow of critical information is often lost in the mix.
Stroome breaks that technological and communication bottleneck by offering revision histories and intuitive, collaborative editing tools that allow individuals and groups work together for the good of the whole to foster a supportive culture that can quickly produce accurate news stories.
Stroome not only enables the next generation of digital journalists to upload and edit content right in the browser but, more importantly, allows stakeholders in disparate locations to create a community around that content -- from small groups to national news outlets.

Whether it's a small group of journalists working to get out a story quickly, or a community remixing pieces to reflect their points of view, Stroome focuses on visual journalism as a participatory process. Our unique browser-based platform allows you to upload, edit, and share thousands of clips from different users in real-time. Then you can push your projects out across the web to the major social media sites or share them on Stroome with other users so that they can open and edit your clips, too.
But the real breakthrough is that by publishing content quickly and allowing diverse geographic communities to communicate, we believe Stroome will rejuvenate the relationship between a news organization and its audience by radically increasing responsiveness with an inexpensive, agile online solution.
But don't count out the satellite trucks just yet. We fervently believe participatory video is the future of visual storytelling on the web, and we are devoted to trying to use the technology to support the idea that content creation can be a communal experience instead of merely a tool for passive viewing. But we also recognize that what we are asking will require a significant shift in thinking.
The Future of News is DigitalFor us, that shift begins today. Over the next few weeks, our team will be working with local news outlets to set up a series of beta experiments in which the Stroome platform will be implemented in the field and in the classroom. So if you have a unique case study you'd like to test, email us info@stroome.com.
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
The problem with five jam-packed days of panels and events is that you can't do it all. Presentations and business meetings for the 93rd annual conference of the Association for Education in Journalism and Mass Communication (AEJMC), which was held in Denver earlier this month, ran concurrently from 7 a.m. until, for some, after midnight. I hustled from my booth in the exhibit hall to sit in on sessions across the different groups, but especially to eavesdrop on discussions among attendees and peek over their shoulders as they tapped silently on their iPhones. Below are five key messages I overheard in Denver.
1. Boots on the Ground"I have to be on the ground, witnessing events with my own eyes ... [War reporting] is not just a cocktail party -- you can't just drop in." - Anne Garrels, former foreign correspondent for NPR
Garrels commanded the room during a keynote address that saw her recount harrowing experiences during her six years as an embedded journalist during the Iraq War -- including false accusations made on her Wikipedia page that she believes could have gotten her killed.
In the face of "raw information" quickly disseminated through new social mediums, Garrels emphasized committed, responsible, on-the-ground reporting. "Having knowledge to put events into context is really key," she said. "Otherwise, information is pretty hollow."
2. Editing Skills to Pay the Bills"We need to get our students to think of themselves not just as reporters, but as editors." - Eileen Gilligan, assistant professor, SUNY Oswego
Gilligan said the above during a session about teaching convergence in the midst of a climate of ambiguity surrounding priorities in journalism education. Her session, "Teaching through Transition," presented data from several research studies conducted by AEJMC members that revealed an alarming disparity between the skills needed in convergent newsrooms and the core curricular priorities in U.S. journalism schools.
The data underscored the importance of superior storytelling skills. But interpersonal skills (such as the ability to develop sources), news judgment (the right story, the right way), and multi-tasking (the hardest of the three) were cited by news directors as necessary traits to succeed in converged newsrooms. Gilligan said the most meaningful feedback was that editing is a core skill for current students and future journalists.
3. Social Media Everywhere"Social media showed me that people don't just care about the news, they care about the people who write it." - Arizona State University student Sebastien Bauge, as quoted by Serena Carpenter in her presentation in the AEJMC social media competition
Social media was popular during the conference, both in panels and in practice. One session, "Social Media in the Classroom", shared how instructors incorporate these tools in their courses. Examining Twitter updates during current events -- like the earthquake in Haiti earlier this year -- and hashtagging course names for classroom conversations were among the suggestions discussed. One course at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill invited Pizza Hut's public relations coordinator-turned-"Twitterologist" as a guest speaker to discuss corporate social media strategies. Mich Sineath, who tweeted for @AEJMC during the conference, called it the "hands-down BEST panel of #AEJMC10."
Social media happened to me, too. When inside the large, glass-walled room for Poynter's News University presentation (and announcement of its new syllabus exchange program), I tweeted from @CQPJournalism that it was one of the most well-attended sessions I had seen. Within minutes, professor Jake Batsell of Southern Methodist University responded that he had at least "40+" attendees for his panel on creating and running multi-platform student news websites. Turns out, Batsell was sitting two seats away from me.
4. Entrepreneurship the Answer?"I'm not even slightly interested in saving the industry." - Dan Gillmor, director of the Knight Center for Digital Media Entrepreneurship at Arizona State University
The lack of viable business models that can sustain an increasingly complicated news marketplace was still the elephant in the room this year, especially in light of the fact that the conference showed that traditional news jobs continue to disappear. In fact, panelists for the "New Media Economics" panel admittedly had little to offer in terms of successful strategies. Gillmor, author of "We the Media" and a forthcoming book called Mediactive, went on to say, "I've given up the idea that the industry wants to be saved. We've moved on."
By that Gillmor meant that the news industry should look toward new types of social and media entrepreneurship. He explained that journalists and entrepreneurs must have an appreciation of risk and be attuned to the current media culture.
"Innovation," he said, "is doing something better than how somebody else is doing it."
5. Enrollment Changing Along With the Industry"Everything is changing, not dying" - Guy J. Golan, chair of the new Political Communication interest group
During the conference, I frequented the Starbucks on 16th street, just across from the Sheraton Downtown Denver Hotel. It was a place to refuel, charge my laptop, and access free wireless, which was not available in the conference rooms nor in hotel rooms. When I reached over to unplug my laptop, Golan handed me my cord and we chatted about the conference. He corrected my assertion that the common perception is that the news industry is "dying" and yet enrollment rates are rising in journalism schools.
It's the PR and advertising programs that are gaining students, he said, along with niche beats like sportswriting and political coverage. That was an interesting distinction to note. It was also borne out by some of the association business that was taken care of during the conference: political communication and sports communication became newly-minted interest groups this year, and the Communicating Science, Health, Environment and Risk Interest Group (ComSHER) was raised to division status at the conference.
Golan, currently a "free agent" professor, interviewed for work during the conference job fair, along with the many grad students I ran into at a school-sponsored evening social. He said there are "lots of jobs, and lots of candidates" in the world of journalism and communications education.
Christina Mueller is an Assistant Editor in the College Division of CQ Press, a division of SAGE Publications. She comments at @CQPJournalism and blogs for the journalism and mass communication line of books. The opinions of this post are that of the individual author and may not reflect the opinions of SAGE Publications.
Education content on MediaShift is sponsored by Carnegie-Knight News21, an alliance of 12 journalism schools in which top students tell complex stories in inventive ways. See tips for spurring innovation and digital learning at Learn.News21.com.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
On July 24, Video Volunteers joined hands with millions of people from 197 countries to work on a single film project named ‘Life in a Day’. 15 Community Correspondents of Video Volunteers’ IndiaUnheard Community News Service , from 14 Indian states went out on field and shot videos that captured glimpse of life on a single day within their community. The footage will be used to make a final, feature-length film, executive produced by Ridley Scott and directed by Kevin Macdonald. The film, once completed, will premiere in January’ 2011 at the Sundance Film Festival and on the YouTube website.
The goal of the project ‘Life in a Day’ is to create a single day’s snapshot of life on earth, in order to leave a message for future generations to tell and show our grandchildren and great grandchildren what life was like on an ordinary day in 2010.
For this project, VV partnered with Bangalore-based media production house Ixoraa Media. Ixoraa media approached us after learnt of our work from Technology Entertainment and Design(TED). TED, of which VV’s founder director Jessica Mayberry is a Fellow, had suggested that if Ixoraa was looking for community-produced content, then Video Volunteers, with it’s countrywide network of Community correspondents, had the best capability of providing a done day’s captured snapshot of life in India.
The entire project was done in less than a week’s notice – a huge challenge, considering almost all of our correspondents were based in remote areas where communication facilities are poor. Since this was peak of monsoon, weather was another concern as poor light and rain posed serious hurdles for the correspondents. Yet all the 15 correspondents, some of who learnt of the project only on 23rd July, managed to complete their videos within the steep deadline of 24th July. In fact each correspondent was enthusiastic about shooting the video. The reason: It was an opportunity to profile their community.
However, since India is a multilingual society, there was a big concern of translating the conversations between the CCs and their community members. To deal with this, the CCs were given a set of questions that they would ask to each person they interviewed.
The questions they asked were these:
Tell me about yourself (Work, education, life)
What or whom they love?
What they are afraid of?
What makes them laugh?
What is in their pocket or bag today?
To answer these questions, 15 community correspondents chose people of 15 professions who, when put together, present a vibrant montage of the diverse means of livelihood that Indians follow.
Here they are at a glance
A milk man who sells milk door to door,
A Transgender person, performing on street,
School and college going students Govt employee,in the conventional ‘sarkari’ office
An apple farmer in his orchard
Shepherd and Goatherd boys, tending their cattle
A barber
An ironsmith
A laundryman
A tea seller
A Chaat (snack) Stall worker
A Paan(betel nut) Stall worker
An electrician
A traditional craftsman A vegetable vendor
For VV, the project “Life in a Day” project was a good way to learn 3 important facts:
1.Our wide community outreach – we were able to speak to sixteen community representatives in fourteen states within three days and document their daily activities
2. We have the logistics and skill to complete a project in short notice.
3. Our community reporters are able to recognize their communities’ forgotten members – goatherds and paan stall workers.
According to Youtube, eighty thousand videos, amounting 4,600 hours of footage have been submitted to “Life in a Day” project. While editing of the huge amount of footage will take quite some time, the individual submissions, including those from VV will be available for viewing soon. Youtube is building a special gallery, created to feature ‘Life in a Day’ channel which will show all the videos once the site goes live in September.
I'm helping MIT's Center for Future Civic Media put together a talk on how better to cover slow-motion disasters, and I'd like your thoughts.
The bursting of the housing bubble, for example, cost the American economy $8.3 trillion. Yet for a decade, national media missed signs of the coming disaster, acting instead to simply keep pumping.
While we can cover hurricanes and terrorist attacks, we – the media, Americans, humans – seem to be terrible technologically and rhetorically at covering disasters that unfold slowly, stories like oil spill cleanups or health care policy that take months or years to fully tell, yet, as that $8.3 trillion number shows, absolutely require attention and action.
So what reporting models would help avoid or mitigate these disasters before they happen? What examples have you seen, as we at MIT have with Jeff Warren's grassroots mapping work in the Gulf or much of the work at ProPublica, of people or groups already doing a good job of using new tools and methods?
I'm helping MIT's Center for Future Civic Media put together a talk on how better to cover slow-motion disasters, and I'd like your thoughts.
The bursting of the housing bubble, for example, cost the American economy $8.3 trillion. Yet for a decade, national media missed signs of the coming disaster, acting instead to simply keep pumping.
While we can cover hurricanes and terrorist attacks, we – the media, Americans, humans – seem to be terrible technologically and rhetorically at covering disasters that unfold slowly, stories like oil spill cleanups or health care policy that take months or years to fully tell, yet, as that $8.3 trillion number shows, absolutely require attention and action.
So what reporting models would help avoid or mitigate these disasters before they happen? What examples have you seen, as we at MIT have with Jeff Warren's grassroots mapping work in the Gulf or much of the work at ProPublica, of people or groups already doing a good job of using new tools and methods?
"Any label looking for to sign Floyd to a new deal will likely demand this practice continue, not least because few online retail methods exist today for purchasing albums as single entities."
(tags: music content+biz business content-rights copyright)
You have to admire his chutzpah. Rupert Murdoch, the so-called nemesis of public interest news, is now being hailed by some as its potential savior. Sick and tired of people reading his news outlets for free online, Murdoch has erected pay walls around his sites (or some of them at least).
Anyone who wants to see what is published on thetimes.co.uk will have to pay at least £1. That includes search engines who are not even allowed to index the Times' online content. Now we have to wait and see if the subscription revenues start rolling in.
Yet even those who hope the pay wall succeeds have reservations. Pay walls represent both a practical and philosophical shift in the provision of news on the net. They represent a shift from the openness that has defined the early history of the web, to a closed world much more reminiscent of the 20th century's constrained media environment. Erect a pay wall and you immediately cut yourself off from much of the web community. You disable the vast majority of people from recommending, linking, commenting, quoting, and discussing.
It is for this reason that any forward thinking journalist cannot help but be disheartened by the pay wall. It cuts you off from a much bigger potential audience. It suffocates networked journalism, whereby you engage with your readers to source, expand, deepen, and extend your story. It limits your opportunity to enhance your own brand, as opposed to that of the publication. But worst of all, it turns its back on the reason for the net's success -- the flowering of millions of conversations. As the lawyer who stopped writing for the Times after it put up its pay wall said, "inside the paywall no-one can even hear you scream."
Fortunately, there is an alternative. A way in which news can remain distributed, open, even re-usable. A way in which journalism can work with the grain of the web, and continue to grow, extend, and integrate. And it is a way -- crucially -- that journalism can still make money.
But first, a story.
Library of AlexandriaIn the fourth century BC, a student of Aristotle, Demetrius of Phaleron set up a library in Alexandria. It was a little different from the libraries we're now familiar with. It had lecture halls, a dining room, meeting rooms, and a "walk." It also had a reading room and lots of books (or scrolls as then were). Within a few decades it had acquired almost half a million scrolls, many containing multiple works. Such an abundance of scrolls would quickly have become unmanageable had it not been for Callimachus of Cyrene. Callimachus started "the first subject catalogue in the world, the Pinakes," according to Roy Macleod in "The Library of Alexandria." This was made up of six sections and catalogued some 120,000 scrolls of classical poetry and prose. His methods were then adopted and extended by other librarians.
Thanks in no small part to the cataloguing, people were able to build on each other's knowledge. Scholars began to compare the texts and try to understand the reasons why they differed. Hence cross-textual analysis was born. People were able to contrast and evaluate various scientific methods. Archimedes (of "Eureka" fame) worked out methods for calculating areas and volumes while at the library that later formed the basis for calculus.
The library at Alexandria became the most famous of the ancient world, and spawned many further libraries and even whole university towns such as Bologna and Oxford. Yet had its books not been catalogued none of this might have happened. Had the books not had metadata giving basic details about who wrote them, when they were written, what they should be classified as, then there would not have been the foundations on which scholars could build.
Metadata is just a fancy word for information about information. A library catalogue is metadata because it categorizes the books and describes where you can find them. You find metadata on the side of every food packet, only we don't call it metadata, we call it ingredients. The equivalent metadata about a news article would capture information about where it was written, who wrote it, when it was first published, when it was updated. All pretty basic stuff, but critical to properly identifying it and helping its distribution.
Importance of MetadataMetadata did not matter so much when news was all tidily packaged together in a newspaper. You knew when something was published because it was inside that day's paper. You knew who had published it because it was on the masthead and at the top of every page. There was -- is -- lots of metadata about news in newspapers, we just tend to take it all for granted.
The Internet, and the search engines and social networks that power the web, have broken the newspaper package down into discrete pieces of content. These atomized chunks -- individual news articles, photographs, video clips, audio clips -- are what we consume online. We do not read an online paper cover to cover, as we would a print paper. That would be exhausting. The BBC news website publishes about 150,000 words each day. To skim every individual article would take upwards of 17 hours. Instead we pick and choose, we unbundle.
Rather than seeing unbundling as a problem, news outlets should see it as an opportunity. An opportunity to distribute news all around the web. An opportunity to get readers to help sell their news - by recommending pieces to their colleagues and friends, and by linking to stories from their networks and blogs. The only thing news producers need to do before publishing a news article, is make sure it has metadata integrated to it. This way whenever people -- or machines (i.e. search engines) -- see it, they can also see its provenance, recognize what category of information it is, and give credit to its creator.
Having basic information about who produced something is to the mutual advantage of the person who wrote the article (or took the photograph or shot the film footage), and of the public who is reading it. The producer gets proper credit for what they created, and the public gets to see who created it -- giving the news greater transparency and a measure of accountability.
When you think about it, it seems remarkable that so much content does not have this sort of metadata already. It is like houses not having house numbers or zip codes. Or like movies not having opening or closing credits. Or like a can of food without an ingredients label. As Jeff Jarvis wrote recently, "When it comes to products, we want to know: where it was made, by whom, in what conditions, using what materials, causing what damage, traveling what distance, with whose assurances of quality, with whose assurances of safety." Why should news be any different?
hNewshNews is just one of a number of methods of adding metadata. It is a simple, open standard that is free and that anyone can implement. We at the Media Standards Trust Britain developed it in partnership with Sir Tim Berners-Lee's Web Science Trust, and in the latter stages by working with the Associated Press. (This was made possible thanks to two foundation grants, one from the MacArthur Foundation and one from the Knight Foundation. You can read my blog posts about the development of hNews over at Idea Lab, a Knight-funded sister site of PBS MediaShift.)
There are other ways to add metadata to news, for example using RDF or linked data. hNews is an easy entry point since it is built on existing standards (microformats), fits easily within any CMS (there is a WordPress and a blogger plugin), and is entirely reversible. Almost 500 news sites in the US have already implemented hNews, including the Associated Press and AOL. But you choose whichever one suits you best. (Some sample implementations are available here.)
Once hNews is added there are some immediate benefits. Every news article has consistent information about who wrote it, who published it, when it was published etc. built into it. Every article also has an embedded link to the license associated with its reuse (so ignorance is no excuse). And, every article has a link to the principles to which it adheres. These principles should not only help to distinguish the article as journalism, but should make the principles that define journalism -- that are right now opaque and little understood by the public -- transparent. Moreover, all this information is made 'machine-readable' by hNews. In other words a machine (like a search engine) can understand it.
Making this information machine-readable opens up the less immediate, but more exciting aspects of metadata. It creates an ecology of structured data that makes search more intelligent, enables innovation, and opens up new revenue opportunities.
It is a little known truth that much of the evolution of the web has already been driven by open standards. And that many of the uses of open standards are not at first apparent to those who create them. Who could have known that RSS (Really Simple Syndication) a simple standard for syndicating web content, would now be the way millions of people consume audio podcasts? Or that OAuth and OpenID would so simplify the sharing of private information across websites?
The openness and re-usability of hNews enables people to build stuff with it and on top of it. It allows you, for example, to add a "news ingredients" label to the bottom of each article. This is what Open Democracy are doing. Under each article that has hNews embedded they will automatically add an hNews icon. Scroll over this icon and you will get a pop-up box with all the basic details of the article (author, publish data/time, principles etc.). Rather like the ingredients on a food packet. Some of this information is hyperlinked so that you can click directly through to more information -- like the license associated with re-use of the article. Imagine labels like these on all news articles. At a stroke you would have transformed their transparency and accountability.
Embedding metadata like hNews has countless other potential uses. As a simple illustration of the type of thing it enables, we built a browser plugin - itchanged.org - that allows you to track changes in news articles. Another application might be more intelligent recommendations (e.g. see readness.com). But most importantly, structuring data creates an environment in which invention becomes possible -- in the same way, for example, that library catalogues do.
AP News Registry
It can also help news organizations work out ways to make money. For example, the Associated Press has built its News Registry on top of hNews. The news registry is AP's way of tracking its news around the web so that it has much better metrics that it can use to charge more accurately for its content, and work out revenue sharing opportunities for advertising associated with its content.
How it does this is pretty straightforward. In addition to hNews the AP embeds an image file, probably a transparent pixel, to each news article. This file is equivalent to a photograph in a web page, except that it is not intended to be seen. But like a photograph in a web page, this image file has to be served up from a separate server -- in this case AP's servers. So whenever the article is viewed on a computer, the browser (Internet Explorer, Firefox etc.) notices the image file and asks AP's server to deliver it. That way the AP knows who is reading the article. It's a little like a carrier pigeon. The pigeon can fly wherever it likes but always knows where its home is.
Pay walls will rise and pay walls will fall. But in the world of information abundance in which we now live pay walls are a step backwards. If news wants to benefit from the remarkable openness and dynamism that the internet has unleashed then it should embrace the distributed network and take advantage of it, not turn its back.
Martin Moore is the director of the Media Standards Trust, a nonprofit organization that aims to foster high quality journalism. He has been working in news and media for more than a decade, including for the BBC, Channel 4, NTL, IPC Media, Trinity Mirror and others. Moore studied history at Cambridge and holds a doctorate from the London School of Economics, where he was teaching and researching until summer 2006.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
I recently attended the Walkley Media Conference in Sydney, Australia. It is run by the Walkley Foundation, a very interesting outfit that I'm learning more and more about. The Foundation aims to encourage professional and ethical journalism in Australia, and they run the country's main media awards. They also publish the the Walkley Magazine every two months, which anyone interested in journalism should read. The conference had a lot of great speakers and led off with Peter Fray, the editor of the Sydney Morning Herald, who spoke about Who moved my pyramid?.
Speakers from the U.S. included John Nichols, Washington correspondent of The Nation, and the author of some of the best books on U.S. journalism; Jay Rosen, a leading thinker about public and participatory journalism from New York University, was also on the conference bill.
It has been interesting to hear that some folk in Australia are launching a site that's based on the Knight Foundation-funded Spot.us' model (and code). It's great to see Knight-funded innovation diffusing all over the place.
I spoke about our Knight-funded Iindaba Ziyafika project, but also about broader issues dealing with media, journalism, citizen journalism and digital business models in Africa. (It was a panel, so there were questions that led in lots of directions!). I looked in particular at citizen journalism as a concept, and shared something of what we're trying to achieve. Below is the text that I prepared in advance of the panel, and which was first published in the conference issue of Walkley Magazine.
Remarks on Citizen JournalismCan democracy work and good government happen without local media?"
The two are not the same thing of course. Authoritarian governments can get the trains to run on time, and tip-top democracies can still have badly run departments, councils or even whole ministries at a national level. A double whammy is to have both low levels of democratic participation (even though people might vote once every five years), and poor government services. In many parts of South Africa, we have both whammies. Does and can local media, or "community" media, make a difference? And if it does, how does it do that?
Our general experience in South Africa is that community media does make some difference, if only to make graft, corruption and inefficiency slightly more likely to be exposed and, we like to think, therefore slightly less likely to occur. Studies that provide hard evidence for this are thin on the ground, but there are some, and they do suggest reasons for optimism in this regard.
A more specific example, of Grahamstown, our fairly representative of the rest of South Africa city of 100,000 people, reinforces this "gut feel" that good local journalism can play both watchdog and more proactive, get-people-involved roles. In Grahamstown, we enjoy a twice-a-week community newspaper that has been publishing for 140 year, Grocott's Mail. Anecdotally at least, many believe the reasonable performance of our local council and police -- when compared on national comparative charts that are published periodically by government agencies -- might have something to do with the greater volume of decent press coverage from Grocott's Mail.
But how can local media achieve greater volumes of credible journalism that is good enough to make a difference? To be commercially viable, or even to stay open, most community papers (and of course even most commercial papers) run on razor thin staff complements. It is hard to get one reporter to a council meeting, let alone cover all the sub-committees, for example.
The Role of Citizen JournalismThat's where citizen journalism can possibly play a huge role. With Iindaba Ziyafika ("the news is coming") our approach to citizen journalism is, firstly, to get clear about what we mean. The term "citizen journalism" has always been controversial because of the slippage between the meanings often intended by the users of co-joined term, and the meanings usually ascribed to both constituent words when used on their own. We take the view that journalism, citizen or otherwise, has to adhere to some of the norms of a rather "liberal" conventions of short-form news journalism, which are fairly standard, if aspirational at the edges, in most democracies.
This means that citizen journalists have learned that stories need to be "told" (so a short narrative needs to be constructed), and that the story needs to give as full a picture as possible about the subject matter, and still be as "fair" and "balanced" as it can be.
Fullness, or at least adequate context, comes from a focus on the basics of the "who, what, where, when, how" classic news formulation, and fairness stems, in part, from openness of motive (being clear about why you, the writer, or the paper, or both, are running the story), balance (not just covering the bad stuff) multiple sourcing ("one source is no source" is one of our mantras) and affording a clear right of reply.
None of these are easy to do, or to inculcate, but getting it mostly right means you have a much better chance of creating the kind of stories that readers are more likely to trust and act on.
Achieving this is not straightforward or easy. In our experience, papers that want to do this need to provide a fair amount of training and, harder still, need to seed something of a "community of practice." (This concept, coined by Jean Lave and Etienne Wenger, suggests that ongoing learning takes place best in groups where new knowledge and approaches can be easily shared, and where the sense of belonging to a group is a critical spur to a sense of identity, the development of which is the key to mastery in any profession).
Training Citizen JournalistsOur approach revolves around offering about 20 hours of training over six week, which is carefully sequenced. Our training focuses first on story selection -- what is important, what is happening, what can be changed.
Then we spend a lot of time on finding sources and interviewing skills. Many trainees are amazed that their people who's job it is to talk to the media, and that they will talk to our citizen journalists, especially if they develop some credibility with those sources.
Then we talk and explore how to achieve balance and fairness, but also going just that bit further than "standard," "objective" commercial media pieces, to working out ways to create more "empowering" and "solution orientated" stories. We want our writers to not just write about what is wrong, but to ask and explore how is it to be fixed. Better still, follow up, and follow up some more, something many papers have become poor at, until something happens!
Post training, we now also provide a dedicated citizen journalism editor and we encourage the most promising citizen journalists from each course (about 30 people complete each course, which are run over six weeks) to attend diary meetings. We've also created our own citizen journalism diary meetings. And, we pay for published articles and photos. It is a very modest amount, R100 for a published article, but in a town where more than one in two people are unemployed (and youth under 30, unemployment is two out of three), this can and is becoming a useful way to get some additional income.
Of course, a lot of people -- when hearing about our approaches -- throw their hands up and say, "Ok, wait a second, your so-called citizen journalists are trained, there is post training mentoring, their copy is edited and fact checked, stories are paid for, and you even encourage them to join diary meetings with all the pros -- how is this not just journalism en masse, rather than citizen journalism?"
Holistic Approach WorksAnd if they are producing good stories, that make some difference, how is this not just a
way of generating copy cheaper, i.e. how is this not exploitative? (And when the Knight Foundation grant is gone, how could you, or any other grantless paper, afford to give volunteers 20 hours of training, payment for stories and photos, and a sense of belonging to a group of people with an emerging quasi-professional identity. Yes, we give our citizen journalists press cards!)
These are all good questions, but these citizen journalists remain dedicated and committed, some now for more than a year, because they know how to craft stories that do "get things done" -- most often by shaming local officials into doing their jobs better, or getting local police to stop using the disabled parking bays when doing their grocery shopping! -- and they get some collegiality and conviviality that comes from a work like experience. Many are unemployed, but some have jobs and want to make a difference. In each group about a fifth - about four or five people per training group -- really get into it. (And we working hard to figure out more about why that is, and how to up these numbers).
But, taken overall, this set of approaches has produced about 70 published stories we would not otherwise have had in past six months. Our first trainings in 2009 produced few viable stories and little longevity of interest. It has only been when we have created a more holistic experience, honed in on training and post training "space" that builds confidence and starts creating some sense of identify as citizen journalists, that we're starting to see more regular contributions and, even more gratifying, some great journalism.
Its early days, but "watch this space" -- it might yet be filled with citizen journalism some day.
(For examples of some of the citizen journalism produced by the Iindaba Ziyafika project, see [www.grocotts.co.za] and other sections of Grocott's Mail online)
I recently attended the Walkley Media Conference in Sydney, Australia. It is run by the Walkley Foundation, a very interesting outfit that I'm learning more and more about. The Foundation aims to encourage professional and ethical journalism in Australia, and they run the country's main media awards. They also publish the the Walkley Magazine every two months, which anyone interested in journalism should read. The conference had a lot of great speakers and led off with Peter Fray, the editor of the Sydney Morning Herald, who spoke about Who moved my pyramid?.
Speakers from the U.S. included John Nichols, Washington correspondent of The Nation, and the author of some of the best books on U.S. journalism; Jay Rosen, a leading thinker about public and participatory journalism from New York University, was also on the conference bill.
It has been interesting to hear that some folk in Australia are launching a site that's based on the Knight Foundation-funded Spot.us' model (and code). It's great to see Knight-funded innovation diffusing all over the place.
I spoke about our Knight-funded Iindaba Ziyafika project, but also about broader issues dealing with media, journalism, citizen journalism and digital business models in Africa. (It was a panel, so there were questions that led in lots of directions!). I looked in particular at citizen journalism as a concept, and shared something of what we're trying to achieve. Below is the text that I prepared in advance of the panel, and which was first published in the conference issue of Walkley Magazine.
Remarks on Citizen JournalismCan democracy work and good government happen without local media?"
The two are not the same thing of course. Authoritarian governments can get the trains to run on time, and tip-top democracies can still have badly run departments, councils or even whole ministries at a national level. A double whammy is to have both low levels of democratic participation (even though people might vote once every five years), and poor government services. In many parts of South Africa, we have both whammies. Does and can local media, or "community" media, make a difference? And if it does, how does it do that?
Our general experience in South Africa is that community media does make some difference, if only to make graft, corruption and inefficiency slightly more likely to be exposed and, we like to think, therefore slightly less likely to occur. Studies that provide hard evidence for this are thin on the ground, but there are some, and they do suggest reasons for optimism in this regard.
A more specific example, of Grahamstown, our fairly representative of the rest of South Africa city of 100,000 people, reinforces this "gut feel" that good local journalism can play both watchdog and more proactive, get-people-involved roles. In Grahamstown, we enjoy a twice-a-week community newspaper that has been publishing for 140 year, Grocott's Mail. Anecdotally at least, many believe the reasonable performance of our local council and police -- when compared on national comparative charts that are published periodically by government agencies -- might have something to do with the greater volume of decent press coverage from Grocott's Mail.
But how can local media achieve greater volumes of credible journalism that is good enough to make a difference? To be commercially viable, or even to stay open, most community papers (and of course even most commercial papers) run on razor thin staff complements. It is hard to get one reporter to a council meeting, let alone cover all the sub-committees, for example.
The Role of Citizen JournalismThat's where citizen journalism can possibly play a huge role. With Iindaba Ziyafika ("the news is coming") our approach to citizen journalism is, firstly, to get clear about what we mean. The term "citizen journalism" has always been controversial because of the slippage between the meanings often intended by the users of co-joined term, and the meanings usually ascribed to both constituent words when used on their own. We take the view that journalism, citizen or otherwise, has to adhere to some of the norms of a rather "liberal" conventions of short-form news journalism, which are fairly standard, if aspirational at the edges, in most democracies.
This means that citizen journalists have learned that stories need to be "told" (so a short narrative needs to be constructed), and that the story needs to give as full a picture as possible about the subject matter, and still be as "fair" and "balanced" as it can be.
Fullness, or at least adequate context, comes from a focus on the basics of the "who, what, where, when, how" classic news formulation, and fairness stems, in part, from openness of motive (being clear about why you, the writer, or the paper, or both, are running the story), balance (not just covering the bad stuff) multiple sourcing ("one source is no source" is one of our mantras) and affording a clear right of reply.
None of these are easy to do, or to inculcate, but getting it mostly right means you have a much better chance of creating the kind of stories that readers are more likely to trust and act on.
Achieving this is not straightforward or easy. In our experience, papers that want to do this need to provide a fair amount of training and, harder still, need to seed something of a "community of practice." (This concept, coined by Jean Lave and Etienne Wenger, suggests that ongoing learning takes place best in groups where new knowledge and approaches can be easily shared, and where the sense of belonging to a group is a critical spur to a sense of identity, the development of which is the key to mastery in any profession).
Training Citizen JournalistsOur approach revolves around offering about 20 hours of training over six week, which is carefully sequenced. Our training focuses first on story selection -- what is important, what is happening, what can be changed.
Then we spend a lot of time on finding sources and interviewing skills. Many trainees are amazed that their people who's job it is to talk to the media, and that they will talk to our citizen journalists, especially if they develop some credibility with those sources.
Then we talk and explore how to achieve balance and fairness, but also going just that bit further than "standard," "objective" commercial media pieces, to working out ways to create more "empowering" and "solution orientated" stories. We want our writers to not just write about what is wrong, but to ask and explore how is it to be fixed. Better still, follow up, and follow up some more, something many papers have become poor at, until something happens!
Post training, we now also provide a dedicated citizen journalism editor and we encourage the most promising citizen journalists from each course (about 30 people complete each course, which are run over six weeks) to attend diary meetings. We've also created our own citizen journalism diary meetings. And, we pay for published articles and photos. It is a very modest amount, R100 for a published article, but in a town where more than one in two people are unemployed (and youth under 30, unemployment is two out of three), this can and is becoming a useful way to get some additional income.
Of course, a lot of people -- when hearing about our approaches -- throw their hands up and say, "Ok, wait a second, your so-called citizen journalists are trained, there is post training mentoring, their copy is edited and fact checked, stories are paid for, and you even encourage them to join diary meetings with all the pros -- how is this not just journalism en masse, rather than citizen journalism?"
Holistic Approach WorksAnd if they are producing good stories, that make some difference, how is this not just a
way of generating copy cheaper, i.e. how is this not exploitative? (And when the Knight Foundation grant is gone, how could you, or any other grantless paper, afford to give volunteers 20 hours of training, payment for stories and photos, and a sense of belonging to a group of people with an emerging quasi-professional identity. Yes, we give our citizen journalists press cards!)
These are all good questions, but these citizen journalists remain dedicated and committed, some now for more than a year, because they know how to craft stories that do "get things done" -- most often by shaming local officials into doing their jobs better, or getting local police to stop using the disabled parking bays when doing their grocery shopping! -- and they get some collegiality and conviviality that comes from a work like experience. Many are unemployed, but some have jobs and want to make a difference. In each group about a fifth - about four or five people per training group -- really get into it. (And we working hard to figure out more about why that is, and how to up these numbers).
But, taken overall, this set of approaches has produced about 70 published stories we would not otherwise have had in past six months. Our first trainings in 2009 produced few viable stories and little longevity of interest. It has only been when we have created a more holistic experience, honed in on training and post training "space" that builds confidence and starts creating some sense of identify as citizen journalists, that we're starting to see more regular contributions and, even more gratifying, some great journalism.
Its early days, but "watch this space" -- it might yet be filled with citizen journalism some day.
(For examples of some of the citizen journalism produced by the Iindaba Ziyafika project, see [www.grocotts.co.za] and other sections of Grocott's Mail online)


Photo by tantek on Flickr
Since I have become addicted to Foursquare, the location check-in service, I set out to find the best tips to get to the top of Foursquare’s leaderboard while playing fair.
Here are the top 5 tips I discovered:
1If you want to become mayor, check in to places that you know that you’ll be able to check in to frequently, as many times as possible. Didn’t find your place on Foursquare already? Add it. Don’t forget and don’t neglect — someone else may steal your mayorship from you.
2Foursquare resets its leaderboard on Sunday nights. To maximize your weekly tallies, make sure you start early in the week.
3Check in to new places — every time you do so, these grant you 5 extra points, and these can add up quickly.
4Get familiar with how to unlock your special badges and work on unlocking them. Here are two great badges lists: TonyFelice.WordPress.com and TheKruser.com.
5Don’t cheat. For the sake of the community, don’t check in to places if you’re not really there. This only hurts the whole user experience on Foursquare.
Hey, Foursquare, here’s an idea for youOne feature I feel is missing in Foursquare: Once I check in to a place, I want the app to scan all my contacts and tell me the 5–10 users who are closest to my proximity at any given time. This will enable users to maximize the potential of meeting people in their network more frequently and make for a more cohesive user base.
And finally, here’s a good, short Foursquare tutorial for you:
How To Unlock Your World With Foursquare on Howcast
• Foursquare Focuses on Privacy on Eve of Expected Facebook Location Launch (Mashable)Ayelet Noff is founder and CEO of Blonde 2.0, a New Media PR firm specializing in helping brands use social media tools such as social networks, the blogosphere and social software to create brand awareness, buzz, find leads, recruit employees or achieve any other goal. See her business profile, contact Ayelet, follow her on Twitter or leave a comment below.
I’ve been thinking lately about fashion and class. It’s Mario’s fault. He’s the kind of friend you can sit down with for hours over a few microbrews to discuss the evolution of advanced capitalism through the lens of hipster fashion. I’m still not really sure what that means, but the man does have great taste in beer and threads, and he has me thinking about a thing or two. I live in Condesa, not far from the border with Roma, hipster mecca of Mexico City. It’s where you find people dressed like this.
It’s one of the few places where my little sister, looking like she does these days, fits right in. Like others in her aesthetic cohort, I’m amazed by the time, energy, and nonchalance that goes into perfecting the image. I love the creativity behind the impulse, and yet am frustrated by the vanity.
Did I mention that just about everything costs double in my neighborhood? Rent, food, a cup of coffee. This is a place for the middle-upper class, the young and the restless, the type of kids with enough money to spend entire days in thrift stores to be seen at parties looking like this:
Despite the working class, bohemian aesthetic, most of these kids are the sons and daughters of CEO’s and politicians. And most of them were raised in the gated communities of upper-class suburbs like Santa Fe. My theory is that growing up surrounded by suburbs and sitcoms is venom for the creative soul. It’s a plague that affected so much of my generation. So we moved from mass-manufactured, cookie-cutter houses to Silver Lake, the Mission, Williamsburg, West Oakland. But unfortunately, for so many, ‘creativity’ meant dressing up like this to go to parties, to create an ‘alternative scene’
If only a small percentage of that creativity could be channeled into something that goes beyond supporting beer and cigarette companies.
Yes it's true, for the past few months we've been hard at work with a lot of other co-authors on The Definitive Guide to Drupal 7.
The Definitive Guide to Drupal 7 accelerates people along the Drupal learning curve by covering all aspects of building web sites with Drupal: architecture and configuration; module development; front end development; running projects sustainably; participating in the community; and contributing to Drupal's code and documentation.
Check out the website today! http://definitivedrupal.org/
A federal appeals court sided with India and Mongolia over the Bloomberg adminsitration today, saying the city cannot collect property taxes on diplomatic spaces not used for so-called diplomatic purposes.
According to the Department of Finance, the city is owed about $590 million in outstanding property taxes. At least $278 million of that debt is directly related to foreign missions, like those owned by Mongolia and India. According to City Room, it is not clear whether today’s ruling would affect taxes previously collected by these types of properties.
Our chart below breaks down who owes what to the city — from Iran to Bulgaria. According to the Department of Finance, the largest sovereign debtor goes to Hungary, which the city argues owes $139 million in property taxes.
Click on the chart to interact.
Amigos stick together.
We got this press release from Sen. Ruben Diaz’s camp yesterday. For more on Sen. Pedro Espada’s re-election campaign, go here:
Here is the full release in all its glory:
Earlier this afternoon, at 1:30PM, while standing in front of the beautiful Church of the Mediator located at 351 East 231 Street in Riverdale, New York State Senator Ruben Diaz,Sr. endorsed the Re-Election of New York State Senate Majority Leader Pedro Espada, Jr for another term. Senator Esapda was described as the seminole leader who worked closely with Senator diaz to save senior centers from closing. Senator Diaz exhorted the public to prevent the election of an unknown rookie who, “does not know where the Senate is”.
Senator Diaz extolled Senator Espada’s many years of fighting for the community, and he enthusisastically endorsed Senator Espada ’s Re-election in the September 14, 2010 Democratic Primary.
Several members of the Bronx Clergy also publicly endorsed Senator Espada att the press conference.
Senator Espada thnaked Senator diaz for his support and he made brief remarks, and he took questions from news reporters afterward.
The video furnished herein of Senator Diaz’ endorsement of Senator Espada, was made by Franck LaBoy, Press Secretary to Senator Espada for use by the news organizations.
I love my iPad. One of the reasons I love it is that it's a great device for watching video. Some mainstream media integrate video very nicely into their iPad applications. However, it seems that all this slickness comes at a price: The conversation with the people formerly known as the audience is often non-existent. It seems that the potentially-messy-but-genuine conversation with
the community is being shifted to Facebook and Twitter.

The iPad (and similar products) is potentially a disruptive device, empowering people to publish not just blog posts or status updates but also their own books and magazines, as the example of Flipboard (left) demonstrates. There is a danger, however, that traditional media won't understand this and will revert to its old ways by producing slick end products that broadcast without actually engaging in a conversation.
You can see this tendency at work online in the videos produced by newspapers. Yes, you can (often) embed their videos, share them on Twitter and Facebook and via email. But often you can't participate in a discussion about the video. Sometimes you can't even leave a comment. Too little effort is being made to evaluate and integrate interactive and community aspects into video.
For example, have a look at the impressive video production on WSJ.com. The videos are well done, but the integration of community interactivity is underwhelming. We're struggling with this at my own newspaper as well, but we're in the process of applying some of the solutions I suggest below.
10 SuggestionsIn order to help media organizations do a better job of making video interactive, here are 10 suggestions for integrating video into a wider discussion with the community.
Those are my ideas. Please share your own suggestions for turning video into a community experience below in the comments.
Roland Legrand is in charge of Internet and new media at Mediafin, the publisher of leading Belgian business newspapers De Tijd and L'Echo. He studied applied economics and philosophy. After a brief teaching experience, he became a financial journalist working for the Belgian wire service Belga and subsequently for Mediafin. He works in Brussels, and lives in Antwerp with his wife Liesbeth.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
One of the things we have quickly learned at Ushahidi is that it is about more than just about creating great code/design and an easy-to-use tool -- what really makes everything come together is the people; or, if I can appropriate the term, it's about the peopleware.
By this I mean not just the team behind Ushahidi, or the wonderful volunteers who work with us, but the wider community of people using the tool...whether it is a civil society group, an election monitoring group, or the individuals who take the time to submit a report to a Ushahidi deployment.
What we are also discovering is that we need to spend as much time on "peopleware" as we do on the hardware or software. So how are we doing this? Well, I like to think about it as the three L's: Listen, Learn (and unlearn), and Leverage.
The Three L'sListen -- We listen in a variety of ways: We follow up with groups using the tool, we conduct surveys, we hold end-user workshops, we open up our blog to people using the tool, we keep our door open.
Learn (and unlearn) -- We incorporate the feedback we get into our work. For example, 99 percent of the new features we work on are directly driven by feedback we get from end users. We always look to push the envelope if it will impact positively on our work (and sometimes even if we don't know what the hell will happen), and we don't stay firmly wedded to any maxims, though we do like "keep it simple." If something doesn't work, we are happy to toss it to the side and move on.
Leverage -- We realize that our small team can only do so much. Our strength lies in making it easy for the community around us to grow and thrive, and in building a tool that helps end users accomplish their goals. So we reached out to the community to help us put together a community resources page. We encourage the work of organizations like Digital Democracy and E-moksha because they have built up expertise in helping other groups integrate Ushahidi into their work. We also try and make sure there are many happy marriages of ideas and resources from people looking to build on our work.
What lessons can you share?
One of the things we have quickly learned at Ushahidi is that it is about more than just about creating great code/design and an easy-to-use tool -- what really makes everything come together is the people; or, if I can appropriate the term, it's about the peopleware.
By this I mean not just the team behind Ushahidi, or the wonderful volunteers who work with us, but the wider community of people using the tool...whether it is a civil society group, an election monitoring group, or the individuals who take the time to submit a report to a Ushahidi deployment.
What we are also discovering is that we need to spend as much time on "peopleware" as we do on the hardware or software. So how are we doing this? Well, I like to think about it as the three L's: Listen, Learn (and unlearn), and Leverage.
The Three L'sListen -- We listen in a variety of ways: We follow up with groups using the tool, we conduct surveys, we hold end-user workshops, we open up our blog to people using the tool, we keep our door open.
Learn (and unlearn) -- We incorporate the feedback we get into our work. For example, 99 percent of the new features we work on are directly driven by feedback we get from end users. We always look to push the envelope if it will impact positively on our work (and sometimes even if we don't know what the hell will happen), and we don't stay firmly wedded to any maxims, though we do like "keep it simple." If something doesn't work, we are happy to toss it to the side and move on.
Leverage -- We realize that our small team can only do so much. Our strength lies in making it easy for the community around us to grow and thrive, and in building a tool that helps end users accomplish their goals. So we reached out to the community to help us put together a community resources page. We encourage the work of organizations like Digital Democracy and E-moksha because they have built up expertise in helping other groups integrate Ushahidi into their work. We also try and make sure there are many happy marriages of ideas and resources from people looking to build on our work.
What lessons can you share?


Google Webmaster Tools is a phenomenal free resource.
Guest post by Danny Dover
SEO moz
For as long as I can remember, the best way for me to learn has been to do. I have gone through countless checklists while trying to understand search engine optimization. The following is a compilation of the most useful checklists I have completed in order to learn SEO. My intent is that this list can be used by people who are inexperienced in SEO but want to learn more.
Learn how to build a basic websiteBefore diving into SEO techniques, it’s important to know the basics of web development. The following tasks will develop the necessary web development skills needed to become successful at SEO:
Learn how to code a basic website without using a WYSIWYG editor – Don’t fear the word code, writing HTML is much easier than you think. If you can make a sandwich with two pieces of bread and put something in the middle, you can write HTML. For help, check out this excellent tutorial. Remember, don’t worry about SEO techniques at this point. Focus on learning how to build a website first.
Code a website that contains the following:
Pick your keywords — Pick keywords that are uncompetitive. This is very important as the words you choose will become the center of your SEO efforts. I recommend using your name. Go to Google and search for yourself. If a small amount of low quality websites show up, use your name as your keywords. If your name is competitive to rank for, find a variation of your name that is easier. Example: Danny Ben Dover.
Register a domain name and find hosting — This is not nearly as difficult as it sounds. I recommend SiteGround as good option. However, there are literally thousands of choices. Use your best judgment, but remember you shouldn’t be paying more than $7 a month and the domain name should be included for free. Your only requirement is that your host can’t have immovable ads. These could be crawled by the search engines and ruin your rankings. For your domain name, use your keywords from above. Eg., dannydover.com or dannybendover.com. If your keywords are not available as a domain name, choose different keywords. (Note: In this exercise, the keywords you are optimizing for and your domain name should be the same. Although this is not always the case in the real world, having similar keywords to your domain name makes SEO much easier.)
Upload your website files to your new hosting account - The easiest method is to use FTP to drag and drop your files. See your hosting provider for details.
Sign up for Google Analytics and verify your website – This free tool will allow you to track visitors to your website. Installation instructions are included by Google.
![]()
Wait a week and search for your keywords in the big four search engines – I generally use the rank checker tool (immediately above) as a shortcut. It is all right if your website doesn’t show up. That is what SEO is for. If you do find your website ranking (even if it is not on the first page), record how it ranks in the major search engines (Google, Yahoo, Bing) in a spreadsheet.
Wait two weeks to allow search engines to find your site and for Google Analytics to gather data.
Learn about SEO and apply it to your siteNow for the fun part. Learn basic SEO techniques and apply them to your glorious website. This will allow you to see how SEO can help your website rank.
Read the entire Beginner’s Guide to SEO – This is essential to building a strong SEO foundation. I also recommend reading the completed parts of the new Beginner’s Guide and Aaron Wall’s SEO Overview.
Read all of the Google Search Engine Ranking Factors – These will reinforce what you already know and give a perspective on variation. These factors are based off of the experience of some of the SEO industry’s most successful people.
Sign up for Google Webmaster Tools, verify and read everything – This phenomenal resource will show you how Googlebot sees your website and point out any SEO problems you have on your site. Be sure to familiarize yourself with it. The information it provides is formulated toward Google but applies to all the search engines.
Run your website through the SEOmoz tools – Specifically, I recommend the Term Target Tool and Page Strength Tool. These tools will point out areas where you can improve your website.
Add a robots.txt file and a sitemap — Although these are not really necessary for such a small site, familiarizing yourself with these files will be indispensable.
Apply your knowledge – Optimize your Title Tags, URLs, Anchor Text, HTML structure (H1, H2), and keyword usage. This is the bread and butter of onsite search engine optimization.
Link build – Add a link to your website on all of your favorite social media/networking sites. Feel free to try your luck with linkbait, although for a site with no competition this isn’t really necessary.
Track your site on Linkscape and Yahoo! Site Explorer – Wait a month for Linkscape and Yahoo to find your links and then check to see what links are being counted. On Yahoo, be sure to select “inlinks except from this domain to entire site.” Only the links on Linkscape are displayed in the order of importance.
Check Google Analytics – By this time, you should see more interesting data from your analytics tool. Use this data to learn the basics of analytics and use it as a reference point while link building.
Update your spreadsheet – Search for your keywords in the big three search engines again and look to see where your website ranks. Record these results in your spreadsheet. Tracking your data lets you see what techniques are working what techniques are not worth your time.
Test your own SEO theories and record the results — This is not really a task you can ever complete. 90% of all SEO information is already freely available if you can find it. Testing your own theories and getting good results will help you uncover the remaining 10% necessary to outperform your competition.
I sincerely believe that if you complete all the tasks on this list, you will be well on your way to becoming a successful SEO. I recommend printing this post and pasting it somewhere visible near your computer. That way you can complete all of the tasks in your spare time and develop your skills. Best of luck to all of the new SEOs!
If you liked this, be sure to check out The Beginner’s Checklist for Small Business SEO.
This post originally appeared at SEOmoz and is republished with permission. The author’s views are entirely his own and may not reflect the views of SEOmoz, Inc. SEOmoz is not affiliated with Socialmedia.biz and has not reviewed this translation. SEOmoz provides the Web’s best SEO tools and resources.
The official psychological term for this behavior is "motivated cognition" — a tendency to bias our interpretation of facts to fit a version of the world we wish to believe is true. For instance, one study found that college basketball fans, viewing the same video of a game, were likely to believe the rival team committed at least twice as many fouls as their own."
(tags: journalism psychology bias problems)How do those stats compare to the rest of the wireless industry? You'd think that Verizon Wireless — whose network has a stellar reputation compared to AT&T's — would have much, much lower churn. Not quite.
Verizon Wireless customers are indeed more loyal than AT&T's, but barely. Its monthly churn last quarter was 1.27 percent, only a hair below AT&T's. If you exclude prepaid subscribers, it was 0.94 percent — again, better than AT&T's, but not by much. For comparison, Sprint was almost twice as bad, and T-Mobile was more than twice as bad as AT&T and Verizon."
Those two cities in particular — and parts of other big cities, like downtown Chicago, Illinois — are sort of the perfect storm for AT&T…"
(tags: ATT carriers network-congestion iphone geography problems Verizon Bay+Area comparison)

On Friday night I appeared on KQED’s “This Week in Northern California” discussing the open letter Google and Verizon cowrote to the FCC proposing new broadband requirements for mobile and some type of second Internet. The letter bent everyone out of shape and caused a flurry of response from traditional journalists and bloggers. While the protest at Google on Friday was a dud, anger in the blogosphere remained very high, with most everyone trying to extrapolate what Google and Verizon meant with their rather vague proposal. Google and Verizon responded to these various theories trying to clear up some myths that had developed over the week. But in the end it appeared the two elements that most upset everyone, mobile and this “second Internet” being exempt from the FCC’s net neutrality regulation, were still very much on the table according to the two powerhouses.
If you haven’t been paying attention, or need an overview, watch my five minute segment from the KQED show with Belva Davis.David Spark helps businesses grow by developing thought leadership through storytelling and covering live events at Spark Media Solutions. He blogs at The Spark Minute and can be heard and seen regularly on ABC Radio, Cranky Geeks with John C. Dvorak, and KQED in San Francisco. See his business profile, contact David, or leave a comment below.
This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial 3.0 Unported.
OurBlook.com has been conducting an ongoing interview series on the current and future role of journalism and social media. In previous posts for PBS MediaShift, I shared some of the insights we've gathered about the future of journalism, and the skills that will be required of future journalists.
In this installment, experts weigh on the impact social media has had on the media industry, and the way that journalists relate to their audiences. Overall, experts agreed that social media helps journalists:
"I can't understand why so many sectors are going kicking and screaming from the industrial age. News organizations have been reporting the change for decades, so what's the surprise? There is no shock that newspapers and magazines are failing; the model of printed news is being transformed into a new relationship model of information. Consumer markets, political conversations and everyday decision-making are being driven more and more by content in social media. Did news not get the memo that everyone wants to be a reporter?" -- Val Marmillion, president of Marmillion + Company Strategic Communications
"Social media are value neutral; their main virtue is the promise of democratic communication. This brings along with it all of the difficulties of democratic society...incivility, bullying, bias, prejudice, privatization, power struggles. These problems aren't a reason to dismiss or fear social media platforms; they're a challenge to each of us to fight for parity, transparency, access and openness." -- Jessica Clark, director for the Future of Public Media Project for the Center for Social Media at American University, and MediaShift contributor
"Twitter's brevity, its inherent capacity to reflect and create chaos, and to do so instantly and without verification, does not suggest that it has the power to create the kind of narrative that sustains real revolutionary action." -- Trevor Butterworth, editor of STATS.org

"Too much information bouncing around at the speed of thought leads to too much information erroneously being 'reported' or accepted as 'fact.' This has only accelerated the pressure to be 'first,' often at the expense of being 'right.' But perhaps even more dangerous is that the increasing proliferation of choices means that news consumers can choose to focus exclusively on 'infotainment,' and thus disengage from serious coverage of critical issues." -- Matt Hinckley, assistant dean for journalism and student media at Richland College
"At a joint National Press Club/Atlanta Press Club event a while back, I asked this question of the panel: In the future, how will people know what is a journalistic story and what is a paid, biased or fictitious post? I said I was concerned that young people may not know the difference. The panelists' answer was to encourage journalistic literacy programs, which is a good idea. But the most telling moment came when a journalism student approached me afterward and said young people can tell the difference; he's more worried about people in the older generation like his mother, who can't tell a scam email from the real thing." -- Terri Thornton, owner of Thornton Communications
"I strongly disagree that social media represent a dumbing down of America. It's the opposite...it's a way for us to become more informed, more connected and overall less ignorant. It's a way for us to experience different lives, different worlds and different points of view in a way that's never been possible, quite literally, in the history of the world. To call this tremendous capacity and facility to share information a 'dumbing down' is to miss the forest for the trees." -- Sasha Pasulka, blogger and founder of EvilBeetGossip.com

"People who approach political discourse from the perspective of reading blogs and engaging in online debates via social networks -- Twitter and so on -- tend to value authenticity in those interactions, and are less patient with the niceties of the one-to-many broadcast model of communication...Members of the millennial generation in particular find the pomposity and stuffiness of traditional media less engaging than the give-and-take of social channels" -- Rob Salkowitz, author of "Young World Rising: How Youth, Technology and Entrepreneurship are Changing Global Business."
"One particular advantage of social media is that they help a reporter see the intellectual and social network of a source. For example, in Twitter I can see whom you are following and who is following you. I can see what you have re-tweeted and what links you have selected. Therefore, I can understand more fully your social context." -- Jerry Zurek, professor of English and communication department chair at Cabrini College
"This is a new way, an emerging way, and now a pervasive way. So when you jump in this pool, you have to jump in all the way. And that means, you have to listen, you have to participate, you need to contribute value as part of those relationships. And the reason you have to do that is because if you are not, your competitor probably is." -- David Kissel, partner of the Zocalo Group
"Social media is a good tool for publishers to expand content reach, but it won't save the fundamental business model of journalism at its core." -- Mitch Joel, president of Twist Image, author, and social media expert.
"Social media isn't a fad; it's changed the way people share and consume content. The web has allowed people to create their own online neighborhoods and elect leaders to speak for them. That's something journalists are going to have to really take into consideration. It's a new audience." -- Lisa Barone, chief branding officer of Outspoken Media, Inc.
"To be sure, social media are a frightening phenomenon to incumbents in the press, in politics and in the media. To the incumbents, social media are profoundly disruptive because of how they obviate their ownership of the 'choke point' in the communication channel. Their power is based on control of scarcity: Scarce resources, capital, intellectual property, and modes of production and distribution." -- Larry Elin, associate professor, S.I. Newhouse School, Syracuse University

"An active democracy is a successful democracy. As social media platforms engage voters in the political system, our democracy thrives. The risk, however, is that special interest groups have a significant opportunity to skew the conversation in their favor. While regular users have the ability to contribute to the conversation, few are motivated enough to do so. That allows motivated subgroups to manipulate the conversation and portray an inaccurate picture of the most important issues." -- Patrick Schwerdtfeger, author of "Webify your Business: Internet Secrets for the Self-Employed."
This article was co-written by Kurt Schilligo, a University Partnership Program intern.
Sandra Ordonez calls herself a web astronaut who has been helping organizations navigate the internet since 1997. Currently, she helps run OurBlook.com, a collaborative online forum that gathers interviews from today's top leaders in the hopes of finding tomorrow's solutions. Since December 2008, the site has been conducting a Future of Journalism interview series. Sandra also heads up the Facebook page, "Bicultural and Multicultural People Rule." Previously, she was the Communications Manager for Wikipedia. She graduated from American University with a double degree in International Relations and Public Relations.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
GoMap is a map-based interface for local news, initiatives, building projects, public hearings and tweets. Our project, which won a 2010 Knight News Challenge grant, is ment to turn a city into a neighborhood, a place where everybody sees and hears his/her friends, can communicate with each other, and have fun based on their geographical location. Here's how the project was described by the Knight Foundation:
To inspire people to get involved in their community, this project will create a live, online map with local news and activities. GoMap Riga will pull some content from the web and place it automatically on the map. Residents also will be able to add their own news, pictures and videos while also discussing what is happening around them. GoMap Riga will be integrated with the major existing social networks and allow civic participation through mobile technology. The project will be tested in Riga, Latvia, and ultimately be applicable in other cities.
You can also watch a video about GoMap:
Knight News Challenge: GoMap Riga from Knight Foundation on Vimeo.
Below is a piece-by-piece overview of the elements that will be incorporated into the project.
Project ElementsNews -- GoMap will automatically read news from online sources and place them on the map. GoMap will notify people about the news related to their home or interest area, so that people won't miss it when something is going on in their local community.
Initiatives-- Issues like "this fountain needs to get fixed" or "let's have an artist wall here" could take place on the city map. People could also create initiatives on the map, gather signatures from fellow citizens, and bring the initiative to the attention of the local municipality, media, police, etc. in order to get things done.
Building projects-- GoMap will automatically place all the local building projects on the map, notify locals about them, and in effect host an online public hearing about these projects.
Twitter -- Tweets like "check out this bar" or "let's meet right here" will be incorporated into GoMap. With just two clicks, people can have their tweets placed on the map.
We're currently in the very early stages of development and you can keep an eye on our progress at [gomapdev.appspot.com]. Our key challenge is to master the Google Maps API and create a lot of new code in order to get things to work and look the way we need.
Let us know what you think about our project, and thanks for reading!
GoMap is a map-based interface for local news, initiatives, building projects, public hearings and tweets. Our project, which won a 2010 Knight News Challenge grant, is ment to turn a city into a neighborhood, a place where everybody sees and hears his/her friends, can communicate with each other, and have fun based on their geographical location. Here's how the project was described by the Knight Foundation:
To inspire people to get involved in their community, this project will create a live, online map with local news and activities. GoMap Riga will pull some content from the web and place it automatically on the map. Residents also will be able to add their own news, pictures and videos while also discussing what is happening around them. GoMap Riga will be integrated with the major existing social networks and allow civic participation through mobile technology. The project will be tested in Riga, Latvia, and ultimately be applicable in other cities.
You can also watch a video about GoMap:
Knight News Challenge: GoMap Riga from Knight Foundation on Vimeo.
Below is a piece-by-piece overview of the elements that will be incorporated into the project.
Project ElementsNews -- GoMap will automatically read news from online sources and place them on the map. GoMap will notify people about the news related to their home or interest area, so that people won't miss it when something is going on in their local community.
Initiatives-- Issues like "this fountain needs to get fixed" or "let's have an artist wall here" could take place on the city map. People could also create initiatives on the map, gather signatures from fellow citizens, and bring the initiative to the attention of the local municipality, media, police, etc. in order to get things done.
Building projects-- GoMap will automatically place all the local building projects on the map, notify locals about them, and in effect host an online public hearing about these projects.
Twitter -- Tweets like "check out this bar" or "let's meet right here" will be incorporated into GoMap. With just two clicks, people can have their tweets placed on the map.
We're currently in the very early stages of development and you can keep an eye on our progress at [gomapdev.appspot.com]. Our key challenge is to master the Google Maps API and create a lot of new code in order to get things to work and look the way we need.
Let us know what you think about our project, and thanks for reading!
![]() | ![]() | ||
![]() | RELATED | ![]() | |
![]() | |||
![]() |
| ![]() | |
![]() |
Campus Party, one of the Spanish-speaking world's largest technology conferences came to Colombia first in 2008. It has been replicated ever since with growing successes and the Rising Voices grantee Hiperbarrio community in Colombia has been actively participating in these events with enthusiasm (2008, 2009).
Hiperbarrio team in Campus Party 2010
Deisy Alvarez in Hiperbarrio blog reflects [es] about the impact of Campus party in their lives:
Since 2008, the year in which they conducted the first campus party Colombia, it has become well established in what it is today, an event which is not only national but international, and that from its inception it has become a center for conversion work, collaborative experiences and it is also clear that it is the biggest technology festival in the country.
Therefore we have implemented a “give to receive” approach, which means each person transfers his or her learning to an individual who does not have this knowledge in areas such as campus blog, development, free software and more.
Today I reflect and conclude that in CAMPUS PARTY technology is not about only human relations, information sharing, or a monetary value [..] it is a friendship that is generated from what others think. [machine translation]
This year HiperBarrio was invited for the Campus Party Colombia and was told to do something different [es]:
The proposal was to use the pin hole camera technique to record the activities of CampusBlog among others.
Franky Posada's pin hole camera
Now what is a pin hole camera?
A pinhole camera is a simple camera without a lens and with a single small aperture — effectively a light-proof box with a small hole in one side. Light from a scene passes through this single point and projects an inverted image on the opposite side of the box. (Wikipedia)
Franky Posada explains [es] in a three part video how to build a pin hole camera:
Here are the results of using the pin hole camera technique for photography:


You can watch more pictures taken in this technique from the Hiperbarrio Flickr page.
Apparently this technology has created a sensation in the community. So HiperBarrio started arranging workshops [es] on Pin hole photography for its citizen media projects.
Some HiperBarrio members wrote about their experiences in the Campus party. Henry El Sucio wrote about the talks and lectures given in Campus party, especially learning about Creative Commons License and its implication in using others contents such as texts, images etc.
Yeskenia writes in Convergentes blog:
Campus Party Colombia, is a digital event in which many people around the country gather with guests from other regions to share knowledge. In the 2010 version new areas were introduced that did not exist in the minds of the previous Campus parties: Innovation, Creativity, Security and Networks.
I'm impressed and also the group of HiperBarrio was also impressed to learn that in the field of astronomy it became practical and easy to handle the tools required and we should not be “Astronomers” to develop satellites and learn to observe the sky. [machine translation]
She also shares a video about a campus party attendee:
"Distimo, another app store analytics provider, says there were 20,798 iPad applications available at the end of July 2010, 4,903 of which were Games (roughly 23.5 percent).
"It’s safe to say games are popular on the iPad either way (surprise!), whether they make up a fourth or a fifth of the total number of iPad-specific apps. Be that as it may, Distimo said over one third of iPad-only apps were games back in April, admittedly when the number of available apps at the time was still reasonably low."
(tags: mobile ipad apps games statistics)
Parks Columnist Anne Schwartz filed this post:
Former Parks Commissioner Henry Stern, one of the citys most stalwart defenders against arboricide, recently sounded an alert about a proposed massacre of 87 trees, many nearly 80 years old, along Pelham Parkway in the Bronx.
What is special about this Parkway is that as you drive in it, above you is an arbor of trees whose upper branches reach from one side of the road to the other. It looks, and you feel, as if you were traveling through a park, he writes.
The $36 million road project by the NYC Department of Transportation to install guardrails and re-grade the road is supposed start this fall. Sterns comments are posted on the website of New York Civic.
Ground Zero Mosque Would be Green
(The Daily Beast via greenbuildingsNYC)
Interactive Tool for Tracking MTA Capital Plan
(Second Avenue Sagas)
Community Gardens as Green Infrastructure
(SWIM Coalition)
Why the City Needed the Federal Fiscal Relief
(DMI Blog)
What to Expect from the New Sustainability Chief
(Streetsblog)
Flexible Transit to Serve a Decentralized Workforce
(Forbes)
State’s First Passive House Under Construction
(Inhabitat)
Making Small Spaces Livable
(Core77)
New Work City Moves Into New Location
(Business Insider via NYConvergence)
PULP Still Without Funding
(PULP Blog)

Guest post by Anthony Piwarun
SEOmoz
Like most in the SEO (search engine optimization) community, I’m always looking for ways to improve content for my clients. Whether it’s a website, blog or a press release, there is always a way to make it rank better. Recently I began optimizing profiles on LinkedIn, the social networking site for business professionals. Using my own LinkedIn profile as a test, I’ve discovered that the same principles we use in the SEO field.
For two months, I altered various fields of my profile and logged the effect on the number of searches that it appeared in according to LinkedIn analytics. While I’m not one to rely heavily on a single method of measurement, LinkedIn doesn’t offer an option for analytics so my primary method of measurement was the in-house tracking system. The results I found were conclusive: It is possible to optimize your LinkedIn profile to rank better in search.
Before diving into the results of my study, I’d like to point out a few areas that I believe are key to achieving an optimized LinkedIn profile and also give a brief “how-to” on optimization techniques.
How to handle the profile headlineThe first and most important field to optimize on your LinkedIn profile is the headline. The headline field can be most equated to a meta description in SEO terminology. It’s a way to explain what you do and how you do it (in as few words as possible) to the world without having to use one of those awful labels known as a “job title.”

For my headline, I opted to go with three keywords and my contact information. For those that aren’t too familiar with LinkedIn, contacting a non-connection isn’t easy unless you’re in the same group or you have a mutual friend, so adding contact information is helpful for new business development. Like its SEO counterpart the meta description, it’s the first thing a searcher sees when searching on LinkedIn.

A LinkedIn summary is a chance to describe who you are, what you want to accomplish, and what you aspire to be. In SEO terms, I like to think of it as the first 100 words of the page. This is a great opportunity to add a ton of keywords, related terms, and longer, more descriptive strings. While it’s important to use your targeted phrase a few times throughout your summary, keep in mind this is a professional profile and if you sound like a robot you most likely won’t win the bid, get hired, or be able to go more than 4 consecutive hours without your coworkers calling you R2D2. Just like any effective website, a LinkedIn profile optimized with user experience in mind will get the sale long before a keyword-stuffed can of Spam.

Another important field when looking to optimize a LinkedIn profile is the job title and description. I’m not going to open myself to hate mail from HR reps, so I’ll bypass job title optimization and cut right to the description. The job description you provide doesn’t have to and most likely shouldn’t be word-for-word verbiage from your job offer letter. Be creative, yet truthful; descriptive, yet succinct. Remember, your target audience has even less time than you to spend reviewing job applicants or proposals so cut to the chase.

Group memberships and the total number of first-, second– and third-degree connections also play a part in determining your ranking in LinkedIn search results. Group memberships and connections are a lot like incoming links– they serve as a “vote of confidence” of sorts, and the closer your connection is to the searcher, the higher up you will show if they use the one-click filter option to sort by relationship. My best advice would be to join as many (relevant) groups that you can and connect with a few LIONs (LinkedIn Open Networkers) from your industry. Note: Don’t connect with random strangers, it’s just plain rude!

A little-known perk of having a LinkedIn profile is the strength of the domain and the presence of doFollow, customizable anchor links. Your profile allows three links for your website, blog, or Twitter with default anchor text like “My Website” or “Other”. The “Other” field, when selected, allows for customized anchor text. Instead of selecting “My Blog” or “My Website”, use the “Other” option and give yourself some link love from a trustworthy PR 8.

Because we’re all results-driven marketers, optimizing content and leaving it alone simply isn’t an option. We need to track, and we need to measure! Throughout my 8 week test on LinkedIn I kept a log to track changes and measure results. The fields that I changed over time were headline, summary, and work description– each of which were explained in detail above. Some other notable variables included a new recommendation from a vendor and a premium LinkedIn subscription.

While the actual numbers aren’t something to write home about, they show an increase of search impressions by as high as 5.5x the baseline measurement. Changing the headline, summary, and work experience alone increased search impressions by a factor of 1.8. Because a new recommendation is an uncontrolled variable, there’s no accurate way to measure (or predict) the results of this type of action. Upgrading to a premium membership slightly increased the number of search impressions but, in my opinion, not enough to justify the cost.
Key takeawaysAfter reading this HOW-TO, I hope to drive home the following points:
I hope this How-To was helpful — if anyone has done LIO testing on their own, please leave feedback in the comments below for all to see. For more internet marketing tips, be sure to visit my blog and follow me on Twitter.
This post originally appeared at SEOmoz and is republished with permission. The author’s views are entirely his own and may not reflect the views of SEOmoz, Inc. SEOmoz is not affiliated with Socialmedia.biz and has not reviewed this translation. SEOmoz provides the Web’s best SEO tools and resources.
Who owns your copy of "War and Peace"? If we're talking about a dog-eared paperback copy of "War and Peace" that you purchased in your college bookstore, then you own the copy for purposes of copyright law. But if we are talking about an e-book version of the latest translation that was bought online and downloaded to an e-reader or other mobile device, then the question of ownership of the copy is not so simply answered. Unlike works published in print, electronic works are typically sold subject to agreements, in transactions that look less like an outright sale and more like a limited license.
Owner Versus LicenseeOwnership of a copy is an important concept in copyright law. Ownership of a copy of a work is distinct from ownership of the copyright in a work, which is retained by the author or publisher of a book or other work. Ownership of a copy determines whether the copyright owner has the right under copyright law to control subsequent transfers of the copy by sale, gift, rental or lending. In the case of computer programs, ownership of a copy determines whether the program may be used for specified purposes without infringing the copyright owner's rights.
In the last several decades, questions concerning the ownership of copies of digital content have arisen with respect to various kinds of digital content. The federal courts are currently grappling with the issue in the context of audio CDs, videogames and software in a trio of cases that were recently argued before the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit. The resolution of these disputes may help predict how other federal courts will view the issue of ownership of copies of e-books and other electronic publications, such as the proliferating category of all digital magazines targeted at Apple's iPad and other tablet devices.
The Copyright First Sale DoctrineThe copyright first sale doctrine has its origins in a dispute that arose when the publisher of a copyrighted novel sought to preclude dealers who purchased copies of the book for resale from reselling it at a price lower than that stipulated by the publisher. The publisher relied on language that was printed on the inside cover of the book that established a specific retail price and stated that dealers were not licensed to sell it at a lower price, and that a sale at a lower price would be treated as an infringement of the publisher's copyright. In Bobbs-Merrill Co. v. Straus, the U.S. Supreme Court concluded that this notice did not give the publisher the right, under copyright law, to limit subsequent sales of the books by the initial purchaser.
The ruling in Bobbs-Merrill Co. v. Straus was subsequently codified in what is now Section 109(a) of the Copyright Act, which states that "the owner of a particular copy or phono record lawfully made under this title, or any person authorized by such owner, is entitled, without the authority of the copyright owner, to sell or otherwise dispose of the possession of that copy or phono record."
As evidenced by a nation that is thick with used bookstores and charity used book sales, under this section the purchaser of a printed book can sell, give away or even burn the copy without the permission of the copyright owner.
Section 109 does not, however, define the critical term "owner ... of a copy," leaving copyright officials and federal courts to interpret it on a case-by-case basis.
Owner of a CopyIt's easy to conclude that the purchaser of a printed book who pays the price and walks out of the store with it is the "owner" of that copy of the book, because the transaction has two significant incidents of a typical sale: Payment of a single price, and transfer of permanent possession of the item. But as an episode involving the remote deletion of e-books from Amazon's Kindle e-reader device demonstrates, some e-book ecosystems allow the seller to remotely delete content, a fact which makes the transfer of possession potentially less than permanent. E-books are also typically sold subject to an agreement containing a variety of provisions limiting purchasers' rights. For example, the Terms of Use available on the Barnes and Noble website contains provisions that restrict the right to transfer "digital content" to another device and limit the right to lend digital content to another user.
The Register of Copyrights recently studied the issue of ownership of digital content on mobile devices during the triennial rule-making proceeding under the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. The issue arose in the context of the Register's determination of whether the purchaser of a device such as an Apple iPhone is the owner of copies of the firmware installed on the device, and thus whether the purchaser has the right to modify the software in order to "jailbreak" it. The Register threw up her hands and rested her decision instead on the "fair use" doctrine, commenting that even the federal courts have disagreed as to the proper test under copyright law for determining ownership of software copies.
Current DisputesThe struggle in the federal courts over the issue of ownership can be seen in three cases argued simultaneously in June in the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit. Each case presents the issue of ownership of copies under copyright law in a different context, although all three involve reliance on contractual language to limit the rights of purchasers and recipients of copyrighted content. In an unusual move, the court agreed to the request of the parties to these cases that they be heard simultaneously by the same appellate panel, due to the similarity of the issues they present.
Universal Music Group v. Augusto involved online auctions of promotional CDs distributed by the music company to reviewers, radio stations and others in or associated with the music industry. The CDs were distributed by the company with an included agreement stating that the CD was licensed to the recipient and that resale or transfer of possession was not permitted. Universal argued that the language in the agreement precluded a finding that the recipient was an owner under copyright law. The trial court concluded that, among other things, the transfer of possession of the CDs to the recipients for an indefinite period of time indicated that the recipients were owners of the copies.
Another case, Vernor v. Autodesk, involved packaged software that was resold by the original purchaser to a reseller who posted it for sale in an online auction. Autodesk, the software developer, relied on language in the shrink-wrap license agreement accompanying the software in the original transaction, stating that the distributor granted to the purchaser a "non-exclusive, non-transferable license" and prohibited subsequent transfers of the software without its consent.
Autodesk argued that this language prohibits its original purchaser from disposing of Autodesk software in the secondary market. The trial court disagreed, concluding that because the original transaction allowed the purchaser to retain possession of the copy for a single, up-front payment, the transaction was a sale that transferred ownership of the copy. Significantly, however, the trial court found that rulings in the Ninth Circuit (the federal appellate court which the trial court was bound to follow) were in conflict on the issue and that if the court followed the most recent of those conflicting opinions, it would have ruled in favor of Autodesk on the issue of ownership.
The third case, MDY Industries, LLC v. Blizzard Entertainment, Inc., involved videogame software, and the question of whether the terms of the end user license agreement accompanying the videogame preclude a finding that the purchaser is the owner of a copy under 17 U.S.C. § 117(a). That section affords owners certain rights to use copies of computer programs. In MDY, the issue was not the transfer of the videogame software, but the use of the videogame with a third-party computer program that is not approved by the video game developer. The trial court concluded that purchasers' use of the videogame software with unapproved programs was not protected under Section 117(a) because the end user license agreement had so limited the purchasers' rights that the transaction could not be considered the sale of a copy. Like the court in Vernor v. Autodesk, the court in MDY referenced the conflicting rulings in the Ninth Circuit on the issue of ownership, but chose instead to follow the later rulings that are more favorable to the position of content owners.
ConclusionWhat is at stake in these cases is not the ability of copyright owners to limit transfers or certain uses of their copyrighted works at all, but whether they may do so under the Copyright Act. The Copyright Act affords content owners powerful and versatile remedies that are not available if the limitations that content owners place on their works are viewed merely as contract provisions, and the violations of them are treated as breaches of contract.
What is at stake for purchasers of e-books and other electronic publications is whether they will be treated under copyright law as owners of copies of the books and magazines they download, or simply licensees with limited rights.
Jeffrey D. Neuburger is a partner in the New York office of Proskauer Rose LLP, and co-chair of the Technology, Media and Communications Practice Group. His practice focuses on technology and media-related business transactions and counseling of clients in the utilization of new media. He is an adjunct professor at Fordham University School of Law teaching E-Commerce Law and the co-author of two books, "Doing Business on the Internet" and "Emerging Technologies and the Law." He also co-writes the New Media & Technology Law Blog.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
The man who nearly beat Bloomberg, former City Comptroller Bill Thompson, has endorsed Sen. Eric Schneiderman in his run for Attorney General. Here is the release from the Schneiderman campaign:
Former NYC Comptroller and Brooklyn Democrat Bill Thompson announced his support today for Eric Schneiderman to be New Yorks next Attorney General. Thompson, New Yorks first black comptroller, joins the growing list of over 100 progressive leaders, labor unions and grassroots organizations that have endorsed Schneiderman for Attorney General.
Im proud to endorse Eric Schneiderman for Attorney General because he is the one candidate in this field who will truly represent all New Yorkers in the fight for equal justice. Ive seen Eric in action and have no doubt that he will continue his lifelong fight for criminal justice reform, for economic fairness and for progressive change as New Yorks next peoples lawyer. Whether its taking on the insurance industry or ending the Rockefeller Drug laws, Eric has shown true leadership and demonstrated that he will be an Attorney General we can be proud of, said former NYC Comptroller Bill Thompson.
From 2002-2010, Bill Thompson served as New York Citys Comptroller. Thompson grew up in the Bedford-Stuyvesant section of Brooklyn and became the youngest Brooklyn Deputy Borough President and later served as President of the Board of Education. In 2009, Thompson was the Democratic nominee for Mayor of New York.
I am thrilled to have the support of Bill Thompson, a progressive leader who has worked his whole life to improve the lives of New Yorkers, said Eric Schneiderman. As Attorney General, I will join forces with the reformers of this state to end the status quo and fight for equal justice every day. Our broad, diverse and progressive coalition is growing by the day and will lead us to victory this fall.
With widespread support from a broad and diverse coalition of progressive New Yorkers and the unanimous endorsement of the states largest labor union, 1199/SEIU United Healthcare East, the largest private-sector union, 32BJ, NARAL Pro-Choice New York and Citizen Action, momentum is growing for Schneidermans campaign to be the states next Attorney General.
The idea behind Order in the Court 2.0, one of this year's winners of a Knight News Challenge grant, is to restore and reinvigorate the public's access and understanding of our nation's courts.
Up to now journalism has been the primary bridge connecting the public to the courts. But the media's ability to cover the courts is diminished due to shrinking resources.
At the same time, many in the public are equipped with new media tools like smartphones, Wi-Fi and access to multiple social networks.
Working with the judiciary and the public, Order in the Court 2.0 will establish best practices for effective and efficient ways to cover the courts using digital technology.
Live Streaming, Place for Bloggers, WikiWe are the first nationally funded initiative to change how courts deal with electronic journalism since video and audio recording standards were established in the 1970's. While the legislative and the executive branch have embraced new technologies developed in the last decade, the judicial branch has been the slowest to adapt to these innovations.
Order in the Court 2.0 will create a pilot program in Quincy District Court, located just outside Boston, to serve as a laboratory to test these new media initiatives. Quincy District Court is one of the busiest courthouses in the Massachusetts with nearly 9,000 new criminal complaints filed each year.
This pilot program will equip the courthouse with live video-streaming capabilities and create designated areas for live bloggers. Additionally, we will post online the court's daily docket to better inform and engage the public of what civil and criminal cases are being heard in the area. We also plan to build a knowledge wiki that will educate the public of common legal terms and proceedings, all in an effort to add transparency to this fundamental aspect of our democratic society.
By the end of this project, the more skeptical members of the legal community -- including judges, court administrators and lawyers -- should accept, if not embrace, the advantages of increased digital access to the nation's court system. To quote Judge Mark Coven, First Justice of the Quincy District court in Massachusetts, "We have long believed that if the public had greater information about what transpires in the court that there would be increased public confidence in the work of our judicial system."
Additionally, we hoped that the effective demonstration of the success of Order in the Court 2.0 will be a model that can be emulated through the nation's courts at all jurisdictional levels.
Leadership and PartnersI will be leading a small team of digital journalists working out of Quincy District Court. My day job is executive director of wbur.org, the website of Boston NPR's website. Over the past year I've overseen our station's efforts to become a major news destination site. I'm responsible for the editorial content of our website, which includes content from our local newsroom, Radio Boston, and our nationally syndicated programs, On Point, Here and Now, and Only a Game. Prior to going over to the digital side, I was WBUR's news director for the last six years. I've also got two decades worth of local television news experience working at Boston's ABC and CBS affiliates.
The idea behind Order in the Court 2.0 came out of work being done by the Massachusetts Supreme Judicial Court Judiciary-Media Committee, of which I am a member. This committee is made up of members of the state and federal judiciary and media representatives from print, radio, television and online. This committee is trying to adapt the current cameras in the court rules to incorporate the new realities of digital access. Order in the Court 2.0 will provide real world opportunities to test out some of these proposed rule changes.
We also plan to work cooperatively with the National Conference of Court Public Information Officers. This past year the new media committee of the CCPIO has been studying the issue raised by increased digital access. It will soon release its findings. After studying the state of new media and gauging the perceptions of judges and court administrators, the CCPIO will issue a framework for the courts on how to make decisions appropriate for the use of new media. Order in the Court 2.0 adds the input of mainstream media, citizen journalists and the public at large to this equation and then tests these assumptions in real time in one of the busiest courts in the state
ChallengesOne of the greatest challenges Order in the Court 2.0 will face is the fear and apprehension of the judges and court staff, who are concerned that greater access and transparency of the legal process could have a detrimental effect on the administration of justice. To address this concern, Order in the Court 2.0 will include judges and other court personnel in its development and implementation.
Order in the Court 2.0 will have to strike the appropriate balance between the public's right to know and the public's right to due process. These two rights play themselves out everyday in court and the introduction of smaller, and more accessible digital communication devices only complicate issues that the courts need to address going into the future.
Even though we haven't officially started at Quincy District Court, this project is getting lots of attention thanks to coverage in the Boston Globe, Neiman Journalism Lab, Current
and even across the pond at journalism.co,uk.
But, most importantly, we'd love to know what you think of our idea. What does it need to accomplish to be a success in your mind? Let us know what you think by adding a comment below. We'd love to have you along for the ride as we attempt to bring about Order in the Court 2.0.
The idea behind Order in the Court 2.0, one of this year's winners of a Knight News Challenge grant, is to restore and reinvigorate the public's access and understanding of our nation's courts.
Up to now journalism has been the primary bridge connecting the public to the courts. But the media's ability to cover the courts is diminished due to shrinking resources.
At the same time, many in the public are equipped with new media tools like smartphones, Wi-Fi and access to multiple social networks.
Working with the judiciary and the public, Order in the Court 2.0 will establish best practices for effective and efficient ways to cover the courts using digital technology.
Live Streaming, Place for Bloggers, WikiWe are the first nationally funded initiative to change how courts deal with electronic journalism since video and audio recording standards were established in the 1970's. While the legislative and the executive branch have embraced new technologies developed in the last decade, the judicial branch has been the slowest to adapt to these innovations.
Order in the Court 2.0 will create a pilot program in Quincy District Court, located just outside Boston, to serve as a laboratory to test these new media initiatives. Quincy District Court is one of the busiest courthouses in the Massachusetts with nearly 9,000 new criminal complaints filed each year.
This pilot program will equip the courthouse with live video-streaming capabilities and create designated areas for live bloggers. Additionally, we will post online the court's daily docket to better inform and engage the public of what civil and criminal cases are being heard in the area. We also plan to build a knowledge wiki that will educate the public of common legal terms and proceedings, all in an effort to add transparency to this fundamental aspect of our democratic society.
By the end of this project, the more skeptical members of the legal community -- including judges, court administrators and lawyers -- should accept, if not embrace, the advantages of increased digital access to the nation's court system. To quote Judge Mark Coven, First Justice of the Quincy District court in Massachusetts, "We have long believed that if the public had greater information about what transpires in the court that there would be increased public confidence in the work of our judicial system."
Additionally, we hoped that the effective demonstration of the success of Order in the Court 2.0 will be a model that can be emulated through the nation's courts at all jurisdictional levels.
Leadership and PartnersI will be leading a small team of digital journalists working out of Quincy District Court. My day job is executive director of wbur.org, the website of Boston NPR's website. Over the past year I've overseen our station's efforts to become a major news destination site. I'm responsible for the editorial content of our website, which includes content from our local newsroom, Radio Boston, and our nationally syndicated programs, On Point, Here and Now, and Only a Game. Prior to going over to the digital side, I was WBUR's news director for the last six years. I've also got two decades worth of local television news experience working at Boston's ABC and CBS affiliates.
The idea behind Order in the Court 2.0 came out of work being done by the Massachusetts Supreme Judicial Court Judiciary-Media Committee, of which I am a member. This committee is made up of members of the state and federal judiciary and media representatives from print, radio, television and online. This committee is trying to adapt the current cameras in the court rules to incorporate the new realities of digital access. Order in the Court 2.0 will provide real world opportunities to test out some of these proposed rule changes.
We also plan to work cooperatively with the National Conference of Court Public Information Officers. This past year the new media committee of the CCPIO has been studying the issue raised by increased digital access. It will soon release its findings. After studying the state of new media and gauging the perceptions of judges and court administrators, the CCPIO will issue a framework for the courts on how to make decisions appropriate for the use of new media. Order in the Court 2.0 adds the input of mainstream media, citizen journalists and the public at large to this equation and then tests these assumptions in real time in one of the busiest courts in the state
ChallengesOne of the greatest challenges Order in the Court 2.0 will face is the fear and apprehension of the judges and court staff, who are concerned that greater access and transparency of the legal process could have a detrimental effect on the administration of justice. To address this concern, Order in the Court 2.0 will include judges and other court personnel in its development and implementation.
Order in the Court 2.0 will have to strike the appropriate balance between the public's right to know and the public's right to due process. These two rights play themselves out everyday in court and the introduction of smaller, and more accessible digital communication devices only complicate issues that the courts need to address going into the future.
Even though we haven't officially started at Quincy District Court, this project is getting lots of attention thanks to coverage in the Boston Globe, Neiman Journalism Lab, Current
and even across the pond at journalism.co,uk.
But, most importantly, we'd love to know what you think of our idea. What does it need to accomplish to be a success in your mind? Let us know what you think by adding a comment below. We'd love to have you along for the ride as we attempt to bring about Order in the Court 2.0.


My friend Effie Kapsalis helped make something very, very cool. Something brilliant, actually. Something you need to check out: Anthologize.
A brilliant idea is defined by how hard you slap yourself in the forehead, saying, “gee, that’s awesome — but so obvious, why didn’t I think of that?” Anthologize is that simple, elegant, “it never occurred to me” idea that I have been waiting for forever: a WYSIWYG way of drag-and-dropping together a linear narrative out of what is often an amalgam of reverse-chronological, jumbled-together, blog posts. Export it into an online, web-accessible “book” or even a proper ebook in the PDF, ePUB or TEI formats that can be exported and popped into your favorite ebook reader like the Amazon Kindle or Sony eReader.
Anthologize and presents itself as a free, easy-to-install and easy-to-grok WordPress plug-in.
Anthologize is a project of One Week | One Tool, a project of the Center for History and New Media, George Mason University. Funding provided by the National Endowment for the Humanities. © 2010, Center for History and New Media. For more information, contact infoATanthologizeDOTorg. Follow @anthologize.
While I have already installed it into both Chris Abraham and Marketing Conversation, I am overwhelmed with how many posts there are on both blogs that I have yet to organize my thoughts and do something with it. However, there has been quite a bit of press on the Anthologize project already.
In our first-ever live broadcast, Digital Campus hosts the big reveal of what came out of One Week | One Tool, a National Endowment for the Humanities–sponsored institute at the Center for History and New Media that brought together a diverse group of developers and scholars to produce a useful software application for the humanities (and beyond) in just one week. Joining the regulars on the podcast are four members of the One Week team, Boone Gorges, Kathie Gossett, Effie Kapsalis, and Steve Ramsay. The tool revealed, Anthologize, is a WordPress–based platform for book publishing. Regular Mills Kelly finds Anthologize as beautiful as his Hawaiian vacation. (Download the .mp3)
And you can now see and experiment with what we built, Anthologize. It’s not a tool with a big scope — it does one thing well (although it is an alpha, so there are known issues). It enables researchers, curators, writers — and bloggers in general — to compile, edit, and publish anything available through RSS feeds. From Anthologize, you can send out your compile work as an eBook, paper publication, or TEI (an open XML format for storage and exchange).
Anthologize enables anyone working with WordPress to easily publish their content in a variety of book formats, including PDF, ePUB, and TEI, an open XML format. Anthologize can handle WordPress blog content as well as feeds from other sources, allowing these items to be updated, reordered, and edited, and then exported.
Blogging has become an increasingly important tool for scholars and educators to share their ideas, but once blogged, that’s often the end-of-the-line for that writing. Anthologize organizes this content and enables users to publish and distribute their work in additional ways — via print or e-readers.
Tim Carmody at Snarkmarket reports on the success of “one week I one tool”, in which a group at the US Center for Digital Humanity spent a week designing and building a digital tool from scratch.
They posted teasers about the project online but did not reveal the result of their work until the seven days were up:
“They put together a great open-source tool: Anthologize, a WordPress plugin that helps you take online content like blog posts and collect, edit, design, and format them into a book — for either digital or print. Solid software, with obvious utility for lots of people, not just academics.”
And it’s open source too — which makes it a free for all. Bookbinding is certainly a lot less fiddly these days…
Anthologize is a WordPress plugin that allows scholars, conference organizers, and bloggers to create eBooks out of websites. Its creators imagine it could be used by researchers to “sketch ideas, collaborate with co-authors, edit and develop research notes into arguments, publish conference proceedings, and engage in public scholarly communication without the typical barriers.” Or perhaps teachers will turn their class blogs into custom publications.
So, what separates Anthologize from commercial blog-to-book services like Blurb or Lulu? (Both fantastic services, IMHO.) First, it’s a WordPress plugin, so if you’re familiar with that tool (as many are), it should be easy to manipulate.
“Because it’s open source, third-party developers can create translators and importers for other formats as well, and contribute them back,” added Doug Knox, director of publication and digital initiatives at the Newberry Library, and part of the One Week, One Tool team. “Lulu and Blurb — and others like FastPencil — are focused on commercial blog-to-book publishing. They don’t have as much flexibility in importing existing content, and they aren’t as open to extending the range of output formats.”
This was all the result of the One Week One Tool project and, to be honest, shows that Rapid Application Development can be the start of a true gift and a true legacy to the world of coding, open source, and online publishing and personal publishing empowerment. Via Chris Abraham.Chris Abraham is co-founder and principal of Abraham Harrison LLC, an international consulting group with specialties in online word-of-mouth/conversation marketing and online business & technology strategy advising. See his profile, contact Chris via email, Twitter, or leave a comment below.
The court appointed referee overseeing Sen. Pedro Espada’s challenge to his opponent Gustavo Rivera’s petitions has declared that Rivera has more than enough valid signatures to be on the ballot.
Rivera issued this statement: “Instead of fighting for our community, Pedro Espada tried to intimidate his own constituents and take away our right to vote for change. But the Bronx is still a democracy and our community will have a chance to elect new leadership on September 14th. I’ve spent my career fighting for change on behalf of my community and our campaign will continue to fight for that change so that on election day the residents of this great district will have a true public servant as their State Senator.”
The city Economic Development Corp. has selected Boston-based Charles River Associates to conduct a $1 million study on the impact of living wage policies across the country and how they might affect the Big Apple’s economy.
The study is in response to an outcry from labor unions and advocates for the city to adopt a living wage — a debate that culminated in the defeat of a controversial development project in the Bronx last year called the Kingsbridge Armory. The City Council voted the plan down when the developer would not promise to force retail tenants to pay a living wage.
The adminsitration has said it would like to conduct a study before it considered any widespread policy, and the move has effectively stalled two pieces of living wage legislation at the council — one to require a living wage for building service workers at city-assisted developments and another that would require all city subsidized developments pay a living wage.
Daniel Hamermesh, a well respected professor at the University of Texas at Austin, will be the chief economist on the study, which is expected to be completed in the spring of 2011. He is also a research associate at the National Bureau of Economic Research. Matthew Thompson, a vice president at Charles River Associates, will lead the project.
Even before Charles River Associates was selected as the consultant, elected officials and living wage advocates were debating the potential results. Comptroller John Liu called it a “sham” in June after the Economic Development Corp. failed to appoint an advisory panel of labor economists to oversee the study’s methodology and results.
Now some advocates are questioning the objectivity of at least one member of the study’s team, specifically David Neumark, a professor of economics at the University of California and a fellow at the Public Policy Institute of California. Neumark has authored several studies questioning the economic viability of living wage laws.
In a paper from 2001 titled, “Living wages: Protection for or protection from low-wage workers?”, Neumark considers whether living wage law increases the wages of lower wage workers or if it instead encourages municipalities to contract with unionized labor. Last summer, in an op-ed in the Wall Street Journal, Neumark discusses the drawbacks of raising the minimum wage — in both good times and bad.
The other members of the study team include: Anthony Yezer, director of the Center for Economic Research at George Washington University, Timothy Riddiough, chair of Real Estate and Urban Land Economics at the University of Wisconsin-Madison, and Martha Courchane of Charles River Associates.
In a previous article I described how self-publishers can easily create, market and sell e-books. In this article we'll discuss the differences and steps required to create more complex enhanced e-books and apps based on books.
In a nutshell, an e-book is a digital snapshot of a book, an enhanced e-book adds multimedia and interactive features as interruptions to the linear story, and a book app is based on a book but acts more like a game with multiple pathways that require the user to interact instead of simply scrolling and clicking.
Enhanced e-books are also referred to as rich media books, book mashups, enriched, hybrid and amplified books. The media and interactivity is provided by you, the self-publisher, who collects and integrates music, audio, video and color photo slideshows, news feeds, illustrations and background materials. You may also provide searchable text, tilt scrolling, internal and external links and Flash animations into the linear story. (Here are some video demos of these features.) To create an enhanced e-book requires the skills of a web developer.
A book app can do everything an enhanced e-book does, but crosses the line from linear storytelling to non-linear storytelling, allowing the user to choose from multiple pathways and select from a potentially huge number of photos, videos, audio files, illustrations, hyperlinks, and interactivity. Apps are third-party software programs requiring a programmer with C++ or Apple's Objective C programming skills.
Much confusion arises from the fact that so many books are simply bundled as apps so they can be sold in an app store. In April 2010 there were twice as many e-books as games in the iPhone App Store, and it's been posited by one pundit that Apple may purge such e-books as they have purged other overly simple apps. There seems to be little point to e-book app-wrapping when compared with more elegant, library-based e-book stores and their e-reader apps (the iBookstore download to the iBook e-reader app, for example), which gives customers a more consistent user experience and keeps the device desktop uncluttered.
What makes a good enhanced e-book?A few years ago I produced a multimedia e-zine, Ireland: The Sacred and the Profane. It was offered for download directly from the Wild Writing Women website until I recently found it easier to offer it via Scribd. Though most links, audio and video don't work inside their browser-based reader (they tell me they're working on that), they perform nicely when you download the PDF. The magazine was very time-consuming to produce, but incredibly rewarding and the enhancements offered readers extra value.
What's a good enhancement?
"If it's a book about music history, having music people can play at certain points in the book can be useful," says Amazon's Jeff Bezos, in an interview with USA Today. "You're not going to make Hemingway better by adding animations."
"Enhancements should only be in support of the central proposition of the writing rather than a 'I can do it therefore I will do it' approach," says Peter Collingridge of UK-based Enhanced Editions. New Media storyteller J.C. Hutchins also has some good advice, such as avoiding "self-congratulatory 'behind the scenes' content such as author bios, old drafts of your manuscripts."
The iPad's capabilities quickly made it the enhanced e-book platform of choice. Designers can create endlessly entertaining distractions within a linear story. The "amplified edition" of Ken Follette's Pillars of the Earth promises a huge cache of multimedia, an interactive character tree, video and still images from the Starz television series, the author's multimedia diary with his impressions of bringing the book to the screen, interviews with the actors, director and producers, and music from the series.
How much does this cost in terms of time and money? It took me months to create the Ireland magazine working in InDesign and with my group who painstakingly reviewed and edited every iteration. It would have been a huge project even without the learning curve, so when Collingridge quoted $8,000 to $15,000 for enhanced e-book production, that sounded about right.
Enhanced e-books are not device-specific but it's impossible to optimize for all of them. For example, audio, video and color simply do not work on the Nook or Kindle, and Flash does not run on the Apple iPad. You'll want to format your book for the platforms you think the majority of your audience is using. Popular format choices are:
Yes, the relationship between hardware devices, software platforms and formats is complicated, especially with Google Editions and Copia entering the game this year along with the Blio, and there are rumors that RIM is planning an iPad competitor.
When enhanced is not enough: The book-based appWhen you've got so much material that linear is no longer practical, then it might be time to consider an app as an add-on product to your book. (The fuzzy boundary between enhanced e-books and apps are discussed in the Digital Book World webcast eBooks vs Apps: The Pros, Cons and Possibilities).
To start the process, you'll first need to have a deep discussion about multimedia, formats, platforms and devices with the team you hire to do the work. "Book-based apps are more likely to be ancillary products with complex graphics and page layouts that can't be handled in something that auto-flows," says Michel Kripalani, founder of Oceanhouse Media (OM). "That's where you cross the line into the need for custom code." Kripalani assembled a team of former interactive CD-ROM and game developers to start his business, and has built over 100 since the company was founded in January 2009.
"Children's books are especially ripe for apps, and compliment the e-book edition," noted Kripalani in an interview with Book Business Magazine. OM has also created a variety of card decks, calendars, and spoken word apps inspired by books from Hay House and Chronicle Books.
The price tag for a complex, quality book-based app? "In the five-figures," says Kripalini, "and requires a team that "includes C++/Objective C programmers, graphic designers, professional actors and custom narration, music soundtrack and sound effects, interactivity, editors and page layout designers for the different devices."
For the budget-impaired, DIY app builders are emerging. Travel guidebook publishers already know their audience is looking online and to apps instead of to the paper book. For them, Sutro Media has created a browser-based tool to let publishers upload material to a content management system, which then gets ported into Objective C on the back end. Co-founder Kevin Collins says, "these apps do things that books can't possibly do.
For example, you can use all the photos you had to leave out in their book versions, and include live maps and hyperlinks, too."
Sutro does not require the author pay any up-front costs, but they carefully evaluate proposed projects. Their payment model is a revenue-sharing agreement with a royalty split of 30% each going to Sutro, Apple, and the author, with the remaining 10% going to their in-house editor.
If you're a technically inclined DIY self-published author, there is a growing list of inexpensive app development options, here are some for the iPhone. And remember, you'll need to decide which devices you want to reach. You can develop for more than one, but that will add to the time and price tag. Today's popular choices are:
* Apple's iBook app for the iPhone and iPad
* The Kindle or Stanza app (both owned by Amazon)
* The B&N eReader, or Kobo (a Borders partner)
* Google's free ebook reader for the iPhone and Android
* The Kobo app for Android
Once you've created your enhanced e-book or app, how do you get it distributed to e-tailers and to readers? Author Cory Doctorow has long and publicly wrestled with these issues, and has had only spotty success with distribution and sales via the major channels. Digital Rights Management (DRM) has been particularly problematic, as some e-tailers require it.
The enhanced e-book and app space is still all very experimental, but expect industry standards to emerge and the market to adjust to the technical possibilities. Apple is letting self-publishers upload directly to the iPad, as long as they adhere to very strict formatting rules.
Personally, I'm offering enhanced e-books on my own websites and on Scribd, amassing digital assets, paying for InDesign upgrades, studying EPUB, renewing my SPAN membership, and keeping an eye on Mark Coker and Smashwords for an easier enhanced e-book aggregation solution for self-publishers.
Carla King is an author, a publishing and social media strategist, and co-founder of the Self-Publishing Boot Camp program providing books, lectures and workshops for prospective self-publishers. She has self-published non-fiction travel and how-to books since 1994 and has worked in multimedia since 1996. Her series of dispatches from motorcycle misadventures around the world are available as print books, e-books and as diaries on her website.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
NowSpots are beautiful online ads that feature the latest social media updates from advertisers, and make it easy for a reader to follow and share their content across the web.
For the last year at WindyCitizen.com, a social network for Chicago news aficionados and urban explorers, we've been selling a simple version of NowSpots ads to small businesses and local colleges -- and we recently won a Knight News Challenge Award to spin the format off into its own company that provides these ads to other publishers.
In a world where thousands of small businesses are signing up for sites like Facebook and Twitter every day, these ads deliver a more personal, dynamic, relevant experience than the banner ads offered by most publishers. NowSpots.com will provide these "real-time ads" to local publishers large and small. Over the next year, our team will be blogging our progress here. You can also receive an e-mail alert when we officially launch this fall by signing up at [nowspots.com].
Why Do We Need NowSpots?Local publishers need better ads. This is true for both the little guys and the big guys. The last few years have seen hundreds of neighborhood and small town blogs spring up around the United States. Many of these sites, like Lake Effect News in Chicago and West Seattle Blog in Seattle, are edited and published by journalists who left mainstream media to try their hands at something more entrepreneurial. Some of them are finding audiences. Some of them aren't. But very, very few of them are making money.
A publisher reaching 1,000 people in their neighborhood each day on a local blog has only a few options for converting that audience into dollars: She could sell text link ads to local businesses looking to boost their SEO -- but Google frowns on that practice -- and unless her blog has a PageRank of five or higher, few businesses will be interested. She could place AdSense or some other cost-per-click ad offering on her site, but the payouts for readers clicking on those ads will amount to pennies and her audience will be subjected to bottom of the barrel ads that have nothing to do with the content they're reading, thereby degrading their experience.
The third option, and the one chosen by a growing number of small, local publishers, is direct sale display advertising. With display ads, which are sold directly, the publisher has to get out and sell, but she will have better targeted ads that pay out at predictable rates, depending on how they're priced.
The problem with this third option is that traditional banner ads -- static or animated images that display an advertiser's messaging each time the page is refreshed -- simply don't scratch much of an itch for small businesses. They convey brand awareness and help an advertiser get clicks. That's great for a large advertiser that can afford to develop a strong web presence with high-conversion landing pages, but for the average small business that still doesn't have much of a website even in 2010, clicks just aren't that valuable.
Local businesses are looking for customers, not clicks; increasingly, they're finding those connections on social networks like Facebook and Twitter, where they can interact in real-time with customers and potential customers. Once someone likes your business on Facebook, they've entered into a relationship with your business that can lead to sales. A "like" is therefore much more valuable to a small business than a click.
Our Goal: Get Local Ads Past the Click EconomyThat's where NowSpots come in. NowSpots are display ads on crack. They are inherently social ads that let advertisers step beyond the click economy and into what we call the introduction economy. When an advertiser buys a NowSpot on Windy Citizen, and soon, on other sites near you, they're not buying clicks -- they're buying an introduction into that site's audience and community. They're buying a very specific kind of relationship that actually converts into sales.
If local publishers are going to make money on the web, they need better ads. NowSpots is going to be there for them starting this fall.
How You Can Help Us Make Local Ads BetterWe've spent this summer assembling a handful of Alpha Publishing Partners. These are local publishers who talk to us about their needs, pain points and goals for online advertising. These conversations are informing our decisions as we develop our product. If you run a local publication or work at one that would be interested in working with us to make your online ads more social, less annoying, and more effective for advertisers, drop us a line at info@nowspots.com and we'll get back to you soon.
I recall a Twilight Zone episode with a great twist: a man, in order to win a bet that he could stay quiet for an entire year, has had his vocal cords severed. The idea being, it is particularly gruesome to imagine a human being rendered mute for money. Sadly, this episode has not aged terribly well: the obscenity of modern three-strikes Internet laws takes any sting out of the twist ending.
One of our allies, New Zealand, is considering a three strikes Internet termination plan. Another ally, France, has already passed such a measure – HADOPI, but can’t seem to enforce it (legally). While I’ve written about the lunacy that is HADOPI, I thought our friends down under might be interested to learn of the hideous side effects of swallowing the Internet Execution program.
I’ve already written about France’s ill-considered HADOPI law, which mandates termination of accused pirates. Supporters of HADOPI have noted that there is at least a five-minute hearing before the line is snipped. In order to make these hearings more efficient, the French government has considered getting into the spyware business.
In order to defend yourself from an accusation of copyright infringment (and avoid the resulting digital execution), you will need to provide a record of your internet use. The government would make available surveillance tools that users would need to install in their machines. The government has asked that the software include:
So, in order to protect yourself from losing your Internet, you need to offer up some of your privacy? How delicious. There was an old woman who swallowed a fly. . . A three-strikes policy can usher in a regime of “voluntary” self-surveillance. You don’t want to provide the court with your Internet records? What have you got to hide?
But I figure that many of us would do pretty much anything to keep our Internet in the face of false accusations of infringement. Despite what three strikes proponents (read: friends of the Entertainment Industry) claim, the Internet is not some trifle. Internet access, or the lack thereof, implicates job training, education, access to government resources, and self-expression. Severing an individual's connection seems akin to mutilation or exile.
The morale of the story is: when you put in place a system with enormous consequences and little-to-no due process, individuals will take measures (however unpleasant) to protect themselves from arbitrary punishment. Between plans mandating that users password protect their wifi and record their own Internet use, we have seen a moment to an online copyright regime of guilty until proven innocent. With three strikes looming in New Zealand, and the hints of a three strikes plan in the ACTA negotiations, we may soon find ourselves sacrificing our rights in order to safeguard our basic necessities.
(Andrew Moshirnia is a third year student at Harvard Law School and a CMLP blogger. Somewhere beyond him, a wheel was turned and his number came up black thirteen.)
"Our Book Club Club has had great success experimenting with Real-Time Ads in a dedicated widget — five sponsors each have their own ad widget with their own dynamic message, which they change out as often as they like through a Twitter, Facebook or blog's RSS feed. One nice feature of this advertising is that it provides a steady stream of useful information to Book Club Club readers, about books and literary events.
"We are now extending that type of messaging to most sections of MinnPost.com, and calling it Real-Time Section Advertising."
(tags: advertising social+media business+models good+example)
Stéphane Guédé, Théophile Kouamouo and Saint Clavier Oula, the detained journalists. Image courtesy Richman.
The African blogosphere exploded with anger and concern when Théophile Kouamouo was arrested with his two colleagues of the Ivorian Daily Le Nouveau Courrier. Ivorian bloggers like Manasse Dehe used blog posts and Facebook groups to update latest information and spread the news to the world. Théophile, also the project manager of the Rising Voices grantee Abidjan Blog camps, was charged for refusing to name the source of a leaked report published in Le Nouveau Courrier describing the high profile embezzlement in the cocoa-coffee sector of Côte d'Ivoire (Ivory Coast).
The three journalists were freed on 26th of July after spending two-weeks in prison. Richman reports:
The law has spoken. A court sentenced the journalists to a fine of 5 million CFA (roughly $10,000 USD) and released. It is a punishment which fits over the press law rather than criminal matters where we had boarded the prosecutor, provoking disgust and shocking the world. The Ivorian court has restored the image that would harm the other.
Beyond the three journalists from The New Courier, the two other defendants in the entourage of attorney (his secretary and his communications advisor) have been released. The flight has not been demonstrated, the better the trial revealed the ignorance of computer security measures in the prosecutor's office, such as a confidential file had no protection due to his rank. (machine translation)
Théophile Kouamouo and Saint-Clavier Oula talking to press after the release. Image courtesy Richman
John Henry Kwahulé at Nouvelle Afrique magazine says that Côte d'Ivoire is probably the only country in the world where journalists are imprisoned for publishing truthful information. He comments:
It is a verdict that makes a double mistake to the colleagues. So, after they have been deprived of liberty for two weeks, their newspaper will not appear for two weeks also. This is not fair. But then, why have them jailed?
Tim Newman at Change.org reports about international support for Théophile and his colleagues:
Over 1,150 activists on Change.org wrote to Ivorian President Laurent Gbagbo and the U.S. Embassy in Abidjan to register concern about this attack on the freedom of the press. Last week, the U.S. Embassy issued a statement in response that expressed concern and emphasized the importance of press freedom.
Théophile Kouamouo thanks his fellow bloggers for the support and activism:
I'm browsing the web, and I'm aware of support and remarkable activism in the blogosphere, in addition to the natural relay that the press is “classic”. The blogosphere exists, and it may take flesh, beyond our thoughts “thrown” on the Web. I do not know what words can contain my gratitude to you all. I feel a great responsibility weighing on my shoulders. I have the duty to be better, more concerned with the interests of the community in my way of practicing journalism, worthy of the mobilization that was yours. (machine translation)


Image from Bite Daily.
How do you measure the ROI of social media? This is a question that we are often asked by companies that want to enter the social media realm but are afraid or unsure of how to prove its success to their superiors. Want to show your bosses that social media works? Below is a great video from Erik Qualman (@equalman) at Socialnomics that showcases several social media ROI success stories.
Here are the top 10 facts you should remember from this video:
1) Gary Vaynerchuk grew his family business from $4 million to $50 million using social media.
2) Wetpaint/Altimeter found companies that widely engage in social media surpass their peers in both revenue and profit. (See Ranking the Top 100 Global Brands — PDF.)
3) Lenovo has experienced a 20% reduction in activity to their call center since they launched their community website for customers.
4) Burger King invested less than $50,000 in their Whopper Sacrifice Facebook application and received an estimated return of over $400,000 in press/media value. They received 32 million impressions as a result of this campaign.
5) Blendtec quintupled sales with its “Will it Blend” series on YouTube.
6) Dell has already made $3 million in sales via twitter (I’ve heard this number has already increased to $6.5 million).
7) Only 18% of traditional TV campaigns generate a positive ROI.
8 ) 37% of generation Y heard about the Ford Fiesta via social media before its launch in the US. 25% of Ford’s marketing budget is spent on digital/social media. They are the only US auto company that didn’t take a government loan.
9) Naked Pizza set a one day sales record using social media: 68% of their sales came via Twitter and 85% of their new customers.
10) Software company Genius.com reports 24% of social media leads convert to sales opportunities.
Here’s the video:
As Alex Bogusky, Co-Chairman of CP&B says: “You can’t buy attention anymore. Having a huge budget doesn’t mean anything in social media…. The old media paradigm was “pay to play.” Now you get back what you authentically put in. You’ve got to be willing to “play to play.”
71% of companies plan to increase investments in social media by an average of 40% because:
1) It’s low-cost marketing
2) Getting traction
3) We have to do it
If you don’t do it, you can be certain that your competitors will.
“Think of Twitter as the canary in the coal mine” — Morgan Johnston, JetBlue Airways
“Our head of social media is the customer” — McDonald’s
The time for social media is now.
Repubished from Blonde 2.0.Ayelet Noff is founder and CEO of Blonde 2.0, a New Media PR firm specializing in helping brands use social media tools such as social networks, the blogosphere and social software to create brand awareness, buzz, find leads, recruit employees or achieve any other goal. See her business profile, contact Ayelet, follow her on Twitter or leave a comment below.
This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial 3.0 Unported.
Charlie Ramos, who is challenging Sen. Ruben Diaz in the Democratic Primary, has received the endorsement of the International Brotherhood of Teamsters Joint Council 16. Ramos has racked up endorsements from progressive groups that support same-sex marriage as well as pro-choice groups because of Diaz’s stance on those topics. This endorsement gives him a little more help from labor.
The union includes 32 Teamster locals in New York City and surrounding areas. Teamsters Joint Council 16 has over 120,000 members.
“I am proud to endorse Charlie Ramos for New York State Senate. His work ethic and commitment to working people make him an ideal candidate to clean up Albany and protect the needs of Teamster families in the Bronx and across the State, said George Miranda president of Teamsters Joint Council 16.
Ramos was more than happy to receive the endorsement.
I am humbled by the Teamsters Joint Council 16 endorsement, said Ramos. The Teamsters have been at the forefront of empowering working people and I am honored to stand with them and I kindly accept their endorsement.
Senators are gearing up to return to Albany as soon as next week so that they can dole out federal cash to prevent teacher layoffs. The Assembly would also have to return to authorize the distribution of cash to schools but it isn’t clear yet if both branches of the legislature have aligned their schedules. The Assembly was scheduled to return after the September primary.
This action could certainly help Democrats heading into the elections but will Federal money for teachers be enough to erase the memory of the Senate coup and this year’s absurdly long budget process?
Mayor Michael Bloomberg announced today that David Bragdon will take the reins as the city’s new sustainability czar.
Bragdon, who was most recently the president of the Portland, Oregon Metro Council, replaces Rohit T. Aggarwala, who helped spearhead the administration’s PlaNYC 2030 sustainability agenda. Aggarwala had been hailed as a chief architect of the administration’s environmental policy, and his departure in April threw much of the 127 PlaNYC proposals up in the air.
Bragdon, however, appears to have a decade of experience in the sustainability area.
At the Metro Council, he coordinated the region’s land use and transportation planning. As part of his role there, Bragdon attempted to plan how the Portland area would handle a million more residents in the next 20 years.
Now he will be doing the same thing here in New York.
As an aside, Bragdon couldn’t run for president of the council again this year because of term limits, according to the The Oregonian. (I am sure he’ll get even more familiar with the subject when he relocates to the Big Apple.)
For more on Bragdon, check out his bio here.
The mayor also announced he has selected Elizabeth Weinstein to head the Mayor’s Office of Operations. She had been the Mayors Office Director of Agency Services and Director of Customer Service.
The full release is after the jump:
Here it is:
Mayor Michael R. Bloomberg today appointed David Bragdon as Director of the Mayors Office of Long-Term Planning & Sustainability, the office responsible for the creation and implementation of PlaNYC, the Citys long-term vision for a greener, greater New York. Bragdon joins City Hall after serving as the President of the Portland, Oregon Metro Council, an elected body that oversees regional planning, protection of natural areas, handling of solid waste and recycling, and management of regional facilities for over one and a half million people in the Portland metro region. The Mayor also appointed Elizabeth Weinstein as the Director of the Mayors Office of Operations, which oversees the daily operations of City agencies, assists agencies in improving customer service and measures agency performance. Weinstein previously served as Mayors Office Director of Agency Services and Director of Customer Service.
With nearly a decade of experience as the leader of a highly respected and influential regional planning agency, David has a rich experience looking across agencies and entities to create a vision for a sustainable future, just as we have done with PlaNYC, said Mayor Bloomberg. David is an exceptional addition to our team here as we continue to implement the initiatives in PlaNYC and work to update the plan and expand it to include solid waste. I am also proud to appoint Liz Weinstein to Director of Operations. Liz has been integral to our efforts to make government more responsive to its customers as well as our new effort to save $500 million in back office functions while improving services. She has taken on big projects and done well with them, I am glad to give her more responsibility.
Through PlaNYC, our Administration has improved New Yorkers air and water quality, parks and open space and transportation options. As we embark upon developing and implementing the update to the plan, and tackling new subjects like solid waste, I am glad that a nationally recognized expert like David will lead that effort for us, said Deputy Mayor Stephen Goldsmith. In these difficult budget times, we are also lucky to have Liz in charge of our wide-ranging effort to make government more efficient and effective and unlock the potential of our workforce.
I am excited to return to New York City and I am honored to work in an Administration with such an ambitious sustainability agenda, said David Bragdon. My appointment is a credit to the people of the Portland region, who have been at the forefront of green buildings, bicycle transportation and natural resource protection.
Its an honor to have the opportunity to lead the Office of Operations and to continue to implement Mayor Bloombergs vision of a fully transparent, accountable and accessible government, said Liz Weinstein. I am looking forward to the hard work of implementing Deputy Mayor Goldsmiths efficiency programs and to finding new and creative ways to work across agencies to save taxpayers even more.
As President of the Portland region Metro Council, Bragdon has managed the acquisition of land for parks, preservation of the natural environment and the improvement of water quality. More than 10,000 acres have been purchased with money raised from two voter-approved bond measures, including a $227 million bond that Bragdon championed to protect natural areas and stream corridors. The Portland region Metro Council is also responsible for solid waste management and recycling; the region has an impressive 56.7 percent solid waste recycling rate.
Mr. Bragdon created an environment of regional collaboration among local governments and non-governmental agencies, businesses and citizens to implement the regions plans and build a sustainable region. He has also improved the Portland Region Metro Councils financial performance, resulting in an improved bond rating and healthy fiscal reserves.
Prior to his service on the Metro Council, Mr. Bragdon worked in the transportation industry as a maritime chartering agent at Lasco Shipping Co., managing Oregon lumber shipments to Japan, and representing Evergreen International Airlines. For five years, he also served as marine marketing manager at the Port of Portland. Bragdon is a graduate of Harvard University. He was born in New York City and moved to Portland at the age of twelve.
In her role as Director of Agency Services, Ms. Weinstein supervised efforts to manage agency accountability, implement strategic project management initiatives and enhance customer service. As the Director of Operations, Ms. Weinstein will be responsible for these functions, as well as overseeing 311, the City’s Web site and call center for government information. During her time at Operations she created the Customer Service Group, which developed the first citywide agency secret shopper program, and set citywide standards for customer service. She also led the implementation of the Citys language access program and helped create the Street Condition Observation Unit (SCOUT), which drives every city street every month, reporting on visually identifiable, quality of life conditions, that are sent to 311 for corrective action.
Working for Deputy Mayor Stephen Goldsmith, Ms. Weinstein is also leading an effort to find and implement efficiencies across City government in areas including information technology and fleet management. Prior to working in the Mayors Office, Ms.Weinstein worked as Chief of Staff at the New York City Department of Transportation. Ms. Weinstein has her Masters degree in Social Policy and Planning from the London School of Economics and is a graduate of the University of Pennsylvania. She lives in Brooklyn.
The Mayor thanked Deputy Mayor Stephen Goldsmith, Nathan Leventhal, Chairman of the Mayors Committee on Appointments and Andrea Shapiro Davis, Special Advisor to the Mayor, for their efforts.
Supernova, an annual technology conference, recently convened for the first time on the East Coast, a change that was evident in the composition of the conference attendees and the direction of the overall conversation. Below are the top three major takeaways from the conference.
Policy matters Harold Feld, legal director of Public Knowledge, earned a place as crowd favorite during a panel about the governmental implications of broadband connectivity. Referencing the FCC's apparent hesitance to pursue regulatory policy, Feld said, "This could end up being the best administration for the tech community or the worst administration for the tech community."Comcast's Cohen, whose company has an obvious stake in issues like net neutrality and reclassification of broadband, made his point by contextualizing an anecdote conference host Kevin Werbach shared during opening ceremonies.
Werbach had explained that the seats in the lecture hall where the conference took place did not have power outlets because Wharton faculty voted to not have them, fearing students would be overly distracted or some other similar supposition. Cohen thought this was an excellent metaphor for unintended consequences of regulation.
"Our concern about governmental regulation in this space drives directly from that story," he said. "Not that our government is ill-intended or that they would try to do something that would impede innovation; but the unintended consequences of legislation that takes a long time to do and a long time to fix could result in actions that retard innovation."
There was also discussion of how governmental agencies are promoting tech initiatives. Projects in different disciplines, like HealthCare.gov and the FCC's broadband portal, are trying to put data (after it's been properly scrutinized for privacy concerns) online in accessible formats. As Beth Noveck, deputy chief technology officer for the United States, explained it, "open government is a horizontal, not a vertical."
Bottom line: Regulating broadband will continue to be a messy process, but it has to be done.
Social Changes Everything Social media is changing the dynamics of content creation and distribution. That's hardly a surprise to the average MediaShift reader, but the observation's familiarity is a reflection of its veracity.
Social media changed conferences, that's for sure. The Twitter backchannel at #sn10 during the conference was nearly as valuable as the sessions themselves. Conference participants (and certain panelists) would share relevant insights and links while the conference was ongoing, which was perfect for information omnivores such as myself.
It's changing civic life, too. The government's strategy is noted above, but initiatives like ThinkUp are trying to improve the process of governance by tapping the wisdom of the crowd.
It's also changing the media, augmenting new and old media's ability alike to connect with consumers. Comcast's Cohen noted that the company no longer sees it as a cable company, but as a technology provider that increasingly experiments with new media delivery technologies such as a Hulu-like online video service. Cohen said the number one reason for Comcast's acquisition of NBC Universal is to increase its "ability to accelerate the application of innovation and technology for the delivery of what consumer demand is in this space: anytime, anywhere television." In a word, convergence.
SB Nation CEO Jim Bankoff noted that, "Media does not need to be saved and it is not the responsibility of social to save media." He said he thought user generated content was not as interesting as user generated distribution of content, an insight echoed by other panelists who noted that many companies were experimenting with television and movies to create "multi-platform" experiences that span offline and online spaces.
Blip.TV cofounder Dina Kaplan spoke to the economic power of new media when she revealed that her company had recently compensated the creators of Halo-themed web series Red vs. Blue more than $123,000 as part of their commitment to split profit with content producers.
Bottom line: Having a social media strategy is table stakes.

Though the two had differing opinions about the definition of privacy, they agreed that the root of privacy concerns was inequity between expectations and outcomes regarding how information flows.
"Privacy is about understanding a social situation and how information will flow, and then making a decision that recognizes this. People scream 'privacy fail!' when they've lost control and found that information flows differently than they expected," Boyd said.
Jarvis used Facebook to illustrate a similar point, referencing ongoing concerns the company faces regarding its approach to personal data. "Facebook created a structure for crafting a public," said Jarvis, "but suddenly people were talking to the public," he said.
The pair also agreed that context has been undervalued as it relates to publicly shared information. "The information itself has value, but so does the interpretation," Boyd said. "We can't divorce the two, interpretations depend on context."
Jarvis essentially agreed with the danger of free-form data being accessed without its necessary context, but also seemed worried that over-compensating for this threat could "risk what makes the Internet powerful."
Bottom line: Defining privacy is just as important a task as protecting it.
Related Links Have a look at these links to read more about the conference:Davis Shaver is MediaShift's editorial intern. He is also the founder and publisher of Onward State, an online news organization at Penn State. He studies history and the intersection of science, technology, and society.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».
Manya Gupta and Andrew Paley are the first Knight "programmer-journalist" scholarship winners to participate in the News21 multimedia reporting project, an initiative in its fifth year that engages some of the nation's top journalism master's students.
The Northwestern University team that Manya and Andrew are part of is focusing on young urban Hispanics and "how they are transforming American politics, media and education now and will continue to do so over the coming decades" said Steve Duke, director of Northwestern's project and associate professor at the Medill School of Journalism.
Gupta, Paley and their teammate Kennedy Elliott are developing the website for the Northwestern project. Paley is building the technical infrastructure and developing a "data wall" with information about Hispanic voting patterns, elected officials, population growth, educational attainment, and more. Gupta is developing graphics and interactive pieces for stories written by her and other News21 reporters.
Here are their reflections on the experience, which wraps up later this month
Describe your role in the Northwestern project
Gupta: As a true multimedia journalist, I am reporting and writing a media story, creating the introductory info graphic for the project, building data-driven Flash packages for two stories and helping in Web design and development of the Northwestern News21 website -- serving as media reporter and web developer.
Paley: Most of my work at News21 has been focused on database-driven, geolocation-specific visualizations that cover a wide array of datasets compiled from the Census, the American Community Survey, National Association of Latino Elected and Appointed Officials, and other sources. The idea is to supplement the team's reporting with a "data wall" that presents the user with a trove of pertinent information based on his/her location -- down as low as the county level whenever possible (when data's available at that level). Beyond that, my work here has also comprised web development, technical assistance on other members' projects, WordPress theme building, and server administration where necessary (in concert with Medill's IT department).
What have you gotten out of the experience?
Gupta: The fact that the Hispanic population is growing at a rapid rate is well-known. But during the course of reporting on my media story and working with other people on different stories, I have learned how the market, institutions and the American landscape are evolving to cater to this audience. I was always interested in web development and creating interactive graphics, but this was the first time that I attempted a data-driven infographic using the Adobe Creative Suite tools. I came up with a simple design and used colors strategically to represent multi-layered data in a clean, accessible format. I am thrilled to have received great feedback on it and have become a more confident designer.

Paley: I suppose the valuable piece of all of this for me has been the opportunity to continue to work with database-driven visualization techniques. A lot of what I'm doing now was informed by my prototyping of the American Visualizer project, though I'm now working with a different visualization library (based in Javascript instead of Flash).
Other thoughts?
Gupta: I think News21 is a great platform. It not only gave me an opportunity to use my technical and journalism skills in creating some wonderful news pieces, but also further proved to me that today's world of news has several opportunities for programmers like me, who can use their technical skills, learn journalistic skills and blend them all together to create news packages that are appropriate for today's audience.
Paley: It's been interesting to have the experience of working with a team of journalists outside the guided classroom environment. Our experiences in News21 have been largely self-directed on a day-to-day basis -- though the overall topic and focus was chosen by Medill -- and that self-direction has afforded us some room to experiment and collaborate in ways that we might not have had otherwise.
"The history of computing over the past 30 years is a move away from requiring people to engage with computers “on their own terms” via programming, and towards enabling users to do creative things through applications."
(tags: creativity programming mobile apps history context psychology)
Although Saudi Arabia was one of the first countries to have been authorized to register domain names in Arabic, it is still one of the most repressive countries when it comes to the Internet.
For example, since 2009 Internet cafes in the country have been required to install hidden cameras, supply a list of customers and websites accesses, not permit the use of prepaid cards or of unauthorized Internet access via satellite, close at midnight and not admit minors. In the latest development of concern, Sheikh Mekhlef bin Dahham al-Shammari, a writer/blogger, human rights activist and social reformer, is in jail. Why? For "annoying others." He has not yet been formally charged.
Blogger Rhymes With PrisonerAl-Shammari has often written about poverty and unemployment in the kingdom, accusing the government of ignoring these problems because it is obsessed with public morality and keeping men and women apart. He has also highlighted the government's failure to promote tourism, and its discrimination against the Shiite minority. Although a Sunni, he was critical of the influential Saudi preacher Mohammed al-Arifi for referring to one of Iran's most respected Shiite clerics, Grand Ayatollah Ali al Sistani, as an "obscene atheist."
In an article published in April of last year, "My Dear Christian", al-Shammari contrasted the work of an American Christian who was killed while helping to protect Palestinian Muslim children with the conditions imposed by Saudi Muslim charities that require its recipients exhibit proper Islamic conduct.
Al-Shammari has been arrested several times in recent years, in part because of his defense of Saudi Arabia's Shiite minority. He told Human Rights Watch that prosecutors used his articles to accuse him of spreading discord among Muslims. His articles criticizing the conservative interpretations of Islam promoted by Saudi officials led to his arrest on May 15, after which he was released on bail. His latest arrest took place on June 15 in Jubail. He was transferred to Damman prison at the start of this month.
Al-Shammari is not the first blogger jailed for seemingly arbitrary reasons in Saudi Arabia. For example, Fouad al Farhan, a blogger known for advocating political reforms, was arrested in 2007 in Jeddah. His arrest was reported by other Arab bloggers, and the Saudi authorities also confirmed he was being held in solitary confinement for "interrogation." No official charges were ever cited or laid. He was released from prison on April 26, 2008. Al Farhan, who is in this thirties, was one of the first Saudi bloggers to dispense with a pseudonym on his site. He was also the first cyber-dissident to be jailed in the country -- but he's far from the last.
According to information from the Arabic Network for Human Rights, Munir alJassas, a prominent Internet activist and defender of the rights of Shiites, has been in jail since November 7, 2009. This is apparently because of his comments and articles on websites and online forums such as Tahara and Shabaket AlRames, where he is one of the most prominent writers.
Free Speech in Saudi ArabiaIn the kingdom, free speech is under constant threat. In March, the Saudi cleric Sheikh Abdul-Rahman al-Barrak, a professor of religion at the Imam Muhammad bin Saud Islamic University in Riyadh, declared a fatwa against two journalists. Reuters reported that he "was responding to recent articles in al-Riyadh newspaper that questioned the Sunni Muslim view in Saudi Arabia that adherents of other faiths should be considered unbelievers."
"Anyone who claims this has refuted Islam and should be tried in order to take it back. If not, he should be killed as an apostate from the religion of Islam," read the fatwa.
In another example, the journalist Rozanna al-Yami was sentenced to 60 lashes by a judge because she worked for the Lebanese Broadcast Corporation (LBC), a satellite TV station that shocked conservative Saudis a year ago by broadcasting an interview with a Saudi man talking openly about his sex life.
There was one encouraging development. In June of last year, Saudi Arabia agreed to have its human rights records reviewed by the U.N. Human Rights Council in Geneva, and it welcomed Navi Pillay, the UN high Commissioner for human rights last April. Sheikh Mekhlef bin Dahham al-Shammari was among the few activists who met her.
However, the fact that the authorities have jailed him for such a ridiculous and offensive reason ("annoying others") shows that the kingdom is still not committed to changing its approach to free speech. If this charge is taken seriously by authorities, then how many more bloggers will end up behind bars for similar reasons?
Clothilde Le Coz has been working for Reporters Without Borders in Paris since 2007. She is now the Washington director for this organization, helping to promote press freedom and free speech around the world. In Paris, she was in charge of the Internet Freedom desk and worked especially on China, Iran, Egypt and Thailand. During the time she spent in Paris, she was also updating the "Handbook for Bloggers and Cyberdissidents," published in 2005. Her role is now to get the message out for readers and politicians to be aware of the constant threat journalists are submitted to in many countries.
This is a summary. Visit our site for the full post ».